DLK PDF

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY
SECTION DLKDOOR & LOCK

B
E
CONTENTS
TYPE 1 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly .......31 F
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..................... 22 Switch ......................................................................31
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Status Indica- G
APPLICATION NOTICE .....................................22 tor ............................................................................32
Information .............................................................. 22 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch ......32
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch .....................32
PRECAUTION .............................................. 23 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna .........32
H
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................23 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Buzzer .....................................................................33
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna ......33 I
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................. 23 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit .....................33
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.... 23 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor ..................34
Work ........................................................................ 23 J
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) .... 35
PREPARATION ........................................... 24 System Description ..................................................35
Circuit Diagram ........................................................37
DLK
PREPARATION ..................................................24
Special Service Tools .............................................. 24
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ......... 38
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ....................................38
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 25 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip-
L
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................25 tion ...........................................................................38

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ......40
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ............................................. 25 M
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ..........................................41
Component Parts Location .................................... 25 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ....42
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION ...............................44 N
Close Switch ........................................................... 29 BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System De-
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door scription ...................................................................44
Control Unit ............................................................. 29
O
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door SUPER LOCK FUNCTION ........................................45
Main Switch ............................................................. 29 SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ....46
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door
Switch ...................................................................... 30 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ..................47 P
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
Warning Buzzer ....................................................... 30 tem Description ........................................................47
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assem- KEY REMINDER FUNCTION ....................................49
bly ............................................................................ 30 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Descrip-
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener tion ...........................................................................49
Switch Assembly ..................................................... 30
DLK-1
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION List of ECU Reference ............................................ 82
METER) ..................................................................... 50
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT... 83
METER) : Door Open Warning ............................... 50 Reference Value ..................................................... 83
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION Fail-safe .................................................................. 87
METER) : Engine Start Information ........................ 51 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 88
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION DTC Index .............................................................. 88
METER) : Intelligent Key Low Battery Warning ...... 53
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 89
METER) : Intelligent Key System Malfunction ........ 54 DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM .................................. 89
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 89
METER) : Key ID Verification Information .............. 55
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM .............. 103
METER) : Key ID Warning ...................................... 56 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 103
METER) : P Position Warning (Information Dis- BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 112
play) ........................................................................ 57
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 112
METER) : Steering Lock Information ...................... 59 Work Flow ............................................................. 112
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
METER) : Take Away Warning (Information Dis-
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................. 115
play) ........................................................................ 60
Description ............................................................ 115
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ....................... 61 Work Procedure .................................................... 115
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Lamp/Indicator (Information Display) ...................... 61
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT.. 116
Chime ..................................................................... 61 Description ............................................................ 116
Work Procedure .................................................... 116
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYS-
TEM) ................................................................... 62 CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK
System Description ................................................. 62 DOOR POSITION INFORMATION ................... 117
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 71 Description ............................................................ 117
Work Procedure .................................................... 117
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................ 73
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 118
COMMON ITEM ........................................................ 73
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - B2401 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT.. 118
COMMON ITEM) .................................................... 73 DTC Description .................................................... 118
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 118
DOOR LOCK ............................................................. 74
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - B2409 HALF LATCH SWITCH ......................... 120
DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System and DTC Description .................................................... 120
Super Lock) ............................................................ 74 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 120
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................... 75 B2416 TOUCH SENSOR RH ........................... 123

INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - DTC Description .................................................... 123
INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock) ................. 75 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 123
Component Inspection .......................................... 125
TRUNK ...................................................................... 79
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) B2417 TOUCH SENSOR LH ............................ 126
(With Intelligent Key System and Super Lock) ....... 79 DTC Description .................................................... 126
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK Component Inspection .......................................... 128
DOOR CONTROL UNIT) ................................... 80
CONSULT Function (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR B2419 OPEN SWITCH ..................................... 129
CONTROL UNIT) ................................................... 80 DTC Description .................................................... 129
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 82
B2420 CLOSE SWITCH ................................... 132
BCM ................................................................... 82 DTC Description .................................................... 132
DLK-2
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132 Component Inspection ........................................... 163
A
B2422 BACK DOOR STATE ........................... 134 BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR .................. 165
DTC Description .................................................... 134 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165
BACK DOOR SWITCH ................................... 166 B
B2423 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MOTOR Component Function Check ................................ 166
OPERATION TIME ........................................... 137 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 166
DTC Description .................................................... 137 Component Inspection ........................................... 167 C
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ................... 168
B2426 ENCODER ............................................ 139 Component Function Check ................................ 168
DTC Description .................................................... 139 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168 D
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 139 Component Inspection ........................................... 169
B2427 ENCODER ............................................ 142 BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ................. 170 E
DTC Description .................................................... 142 Description ............................................................. 170
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 142 Component Function Check ................................ 170
B2428 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL Component Inspection ........................................... 171 F
UNIT .................................................................. 145
DTC Description .................................................... 145 CLOSE SWITCH ............................................. 172
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145 Component Function Check ................................ 172 G
B242A CLOSURE CONDITION ....................... 146
DTC Description .................................................... 146 COMBINATION METER BUZZER .................. 174
Component Function Check ................................ 174 H
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................ 149
DTC Description .................................................... 149 DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR .............................. 175 I
DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 175
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................ 152 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 175
DTC Description .................................................... 152 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 175 J
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 176
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 155 PASSENGER SIDE :
DLK
DTC Description .................................................... 155 Component Function Check ................................ 176
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 155 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 176
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 156 REAR LH .................................................................. 177 L

REAR LH : Component Function Check .............. 177
DTC Description .................................................... 156
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 177
REAR RH ................................................................. 178 M
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH.. 157
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 178
Component Function Check ................................ 157
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 178
Component Inspection .......................................... 158 N
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 180
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH .............. 159 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 180
Component Function Check ................................ 159 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 180 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 159 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 180
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 181
AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH ............... 161 PASSENGER SIDE : P
Component Function Check ................................ 161 Component Function Check ................................ 181
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 161 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 181
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR .............. 183
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZ- Component Function Check ................................ 183
ER ..................................................................... 163 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 183
DLK-3
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................. 184 LH : Component Function Check ........................ 208
Component Function Check ................................184 LH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 209
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................184 LH : Component Inspection .................................. 210
Component Inspection ...........................................185
SPINDLE MOTOR ............................................ 211
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 186
Component Function Check ................................186 RH ............................................................................ 211
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................186 RH : Diagnosis Procedure .................................... 211
Component Inspection ...........................................187 LH ............................................................................ 212
LH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 212
HALF LATCH SWITCH ................................... 188
Component Function Check ..................................188 SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR ............................. 214
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................188
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 214
HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 190 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 214
Component Function Check ................................190 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 214
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 215
INFORMATION DISPLAY ............................... 191 PASSENGER SIDE :
Component Function Check ................................191 Component Function Check ................................ 215
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................191 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 215
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 192 REAR LH ................................................................. 216
Component Inspection ...........................................192 REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 216
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 216
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 193
Component Function Check ................................193 REAR RH ................................................................. 217
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................193 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 217
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 217
OPEN SWITCH ................................................ 195
Component Function Check ..................................195 UNLOCK SENSOR ........................................... 219
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................195 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 219
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 197
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 221
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................197
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................197 ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE ................................................................... 221
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................199
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........199
REAR BUMPER .......................................................201

AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure ................201 OPERATE ......................................................... 222
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 204
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR OPERATION
FRONT DOOR LOCK ..............................................204 DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................... 223
FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure .......204
ALL SWITCHES ...................................................... 223
REAR DOOR LOCK .................................................204 ALL SWITCHES : Description ............................... 223
REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ..........204 ALL SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 223
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT .........205 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH ..................... 224
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT : Di- AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Descrip-
agnosis Procedure .................................................205 tion ........................................................................ 224
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Diagnosis
TOUCH SENSOR ............................................ 207 Procedure ............................................................. 224
RH .............................................................................207 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH ........ 224
RH : Component Function Check ........................207 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH :
RH : Diagnosis Procedure .....................................207 Description ............................................................ 224
RH : Component Inspection ..................................208 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH : Di-
LH .............................................................................208 agnosis Procedure ................................................ 224
DLK-4
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 224 REAR RH ................................................................. 234
INTELLIGENT KEY : Description .......................... 225 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 234 A
INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 225 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 234
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ............................ 225 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Description .... 225 B
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Diagnosis Pro- KEY CYLINDER .............................................. 236
cedure ................................................................... 225 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 236
C
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING DOES DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
NOT OPERATE ................................................ 227 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................ 237
BUZZER ................................................................... 227 D
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES ........................ 237
BUZZER : Description ........................................... 227 ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description.. 237
BUZZER : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 227 ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis
Procedure .............................................................. 237 E
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR FUNCTIONS DO
NOT CANCEL .................................................. 228 DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............. 237
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 228 DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De-
F
scription ................................................................. 238
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR ANTI-PINCH DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag-
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................. 229 nosis Procedure ..................................................... 238
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 229 G
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .... 238
BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................... 230 Description ............................................................. 238
H
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION ................................. 230 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 238
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description ......... 230
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Proce- DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN- I
dure ....................................................................... 230 TELLIGENT KEY ............................................ 239
CLOSURE FUNCTION ............................................ 231 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 239
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description .................... 231 J
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 231 NOT OPERATE ............................................... 241
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 241
DLK
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 232 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES
ALL DOOR .............................................................. 232 NOT ILLUMINATE .......................................... 242
ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 232 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 242 L
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 232
HAZARD LAMP OPERATES WHEN AUTO-
FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 232 MATIC BACK DOOR IS OPERATED ............. 243
FRONT DOOR : Description ................................. 232 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 243 M
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 232
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN-
REAR DOOR ........................................................... 233 ING DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 244 N
REAR DOOR : Description ................................... 233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 244
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 233
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 233 DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 245 O
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 245
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 233
KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE .... 246 P
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 246
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 234
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 234 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE ............................................................. 247
REAR LH ................................................................. 234
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 234
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 234 OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP-
ERATE ............................................................. 248
DLK-5
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................248 HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 265
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 265
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
ATE .................................................................. 249 HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 266
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................249 HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 266
REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE .................................................................. 250 RADIATOR CORE SEAL ........................................ 266
RADIATOR CORE SEAL : Removal and Installa-
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .....................................250 tion ........................................................................ 266
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description .............250
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce- HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 267
dure .......................................................................250 HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation ... 267
INTELLIGENT KEY ..................................................250 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 268

INTELLIGENT KEY : Description ..........................250
R9M ......................................................................... 268
INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure ...........250
R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 268
SUPER LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE ............ 251 R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 268
ALL DOOR ...............................................................251 FRONT FENDER .............................................. 271

ALL DOOR : Description .......................................251 Exploded View ...................................................... 271
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................251
FRONT FENDER ..................................................... 271
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................251 FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ....... 271
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................251 FENDER COVER .................................................... 272
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................251 FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ....... 272
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................251
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 274
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................251
Exploded View ...................................................... 274
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 275
REAR LH ..................................................................252
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 275
REAR LH : Description ..........................................252
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 276
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................252
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 276
REAR RH .................................................................252
DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 278
REAR RH : Description .........................................252
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 278
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................252
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 278
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 278
ATE .................................................................. 254
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................254 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 279
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 279
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE ............................................................. 255 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 279
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................255 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 279
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES ............................................................. 256 REAR DOOR .................................................... 282
Work Flow ..............................................................256 Exploded View ...................................................... 282
Inspection Procedure .............................................258
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 283
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................260
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 262 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 284
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 284
HOOD ............................................................... 262
DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 286
Exploded View .......................................................262
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 286
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................262
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 286
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....262
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 286
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................263
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................263 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 287
DLK-6
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 287 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 309
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 309 A
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 287
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa- OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 309
tion ........................................................................ 287 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 310
B
BACK DOOR .................................................... 290 BACK DOOR LOCK ....................................... 312
Exploded View ...................................................... 290 Exploded View ....................................................... 312
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 290 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 312 C

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 312
tion ........................................................................ 290 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 312
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ................. 292 DOOR LOCK : Unlock procedures ........................ 313 D
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 293
SPINDLE UNIT ......................................................... 313
BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 295 SPINDLE UNIT : Removal and Installation ........... 313
E
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 295 TOUCH SENSOR ..................................................... 315
TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation ....... 315
BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 295 F
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 295 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 316
Exploded View ....................................................... 316
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 295
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and FUEL FILLER LID .................................................... 316 G
Installation ............................................................. 295 FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 316
HOOD LOCK .................................................... 297 FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ......................................... 317
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- H
Exploded View ...................................................... 297
tion ......................................................................... 317
HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 297
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 297 FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 318 I
HOOD LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 298 FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 318
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 299
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 319 J
Installation ............................................................. 299 Removal and Installation ....................................... 319
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 300 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR .............. 320
DLK
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Removal and Installation ....................................... 320
Installation ............................................................. 300
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA .................................. 321
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ................................... 300 L
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal- INSTRUMENT CENTER .......................................... 321
lation ...................................................................... 300 INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installa-
tion ......................................................................... 321
M
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 302
LUGGAGE ROOM ................................................... 321
Exploded View ...................................................... 302
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation ...... 321
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 302 N
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 303
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 323
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 303 FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 323
FRONT DOOR : Removal and Installation ............ 323 O
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 303
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 303 REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 323
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation .......... 323
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 304
P
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 304 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 324
REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 308 Removal and Installation ....................................... 324
Exploded View ...................................................... 308 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 325
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 308 Removal and Installation ....................................... 325
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 308 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 309
. 326
DLK-7
Removal and Installation .......................................326 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch .... 341
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch .................. 342
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT. 327 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Hands Free Sensor ...... 342
Removal and Installation .......................................327 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna ...... 342
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH ... 328
Buzzer ................................................................... 343
Removal and Installation .......................................328
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna .... 343
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH ............. 329 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit .................. 343
Removal and Installation .......................................329 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor ............... 344
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH. 330 SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) .... 345
Removal and Installation .......................................330 System Description ............................................... 345
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 347
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZ-
ER .................................................................... 331 SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ........ 348
Removal and Installation .......................................331 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ................................. 348
TYPE 2 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion ........................................................................ 348
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................... 332 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ... 350
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 332 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ....................................... 351
Information .............................................................332 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ... 352
PRECAUTION ............................................ 333 BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION ............................ 354
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System De-
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 333 scription ................................................................. 355
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ............... 356
SIONER" ................................................................333 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..333 tem Description ..................................................... 356
Work ......................................................................333
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION .................................. 358
PREPARATION .......................................... 334 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Descrip-
tion ........................................................................ 358
PREPARATION ............................................... 334
Special Service Tools ............................................334 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) ................................................................... 359
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 335 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) : Door Open Warning ............................. 359
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 335 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) : Engine Start Information ...................... 360
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ............................................335
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM :
METER) : Intelligent Key Low Battery Warning .... 362
Component Parts Location ..................................335
METER) : Intelligent Key System Malfunction ...... 363
Close Switch ..........................................................338
METER) : Key ID Verification Information ............. 364
Control Unit ............................................................338
METER) : Key ID Warning .................................... 365
Main Switch ...........................................................338
METER) : P Position Warning (Information Dis-
Switch ....................................................................339
play) ...................................................................... 366
Warning Buzzer .....................................................340
METER) : Steering Lock Information .................... 368
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assem-
bly ..........................................................................340
METER) : Take Away Warning (Information Dis-
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener
play) ...................................................................... 369
Switch Assembly ...................................................340
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly .....341 WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ..................... 370
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Switch ....................................................................341 Lamp/Indicator (Information Display) .................... 370
DLK-8
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Chime .................................................................... 370 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT . 426 A
Description ............................................................. 426
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYS- Work Procedure ..................................................... 426
TEM) ................................................................. 371
B
System Description ............................................... 371 CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 381 DOOR POSITION INFORMATION ................. 427
Description ............................................................. 427
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 383 Work Procedure ..................................................... 427 C
COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 383
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 428
COMMON ITEM) ................................................... 383 D
B2401 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT . 428
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 384 DTC Description .................................................... 428
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 428
E
DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System, With- B2409 HALF LATCH SWITCH ....................... 430
out Super Lock) ..................................................... 384
DTC Description .................................................... 430
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 385 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 430 F
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM -
B2416 TOUCH SENSOR RH .......................... 433
INTELLIGENT KEY) (Without Super Lock) ........... 385
DTC Description .................................................... 433
TRUNK ..................................................................... 389 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 433 G
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) Component Inspection ........................................... 435
(With Intelligent Key System, Without Super Lock)
.. 389
B2417 TOUCH SENSOR LH .......................... 436 H
DTC Description .................................................... 436
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 436
DOOR CONTROL UNIT) .................................. 390 Component Inspection ........................................... 438
I
CONSULT Function (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
B2419 OPEN SWITCH .................................... 439
CONTROL UNIT) .................................................. 390
DTC Description .................................................... 439
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 392 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 439 J
BCM .................................................................. 392 B2420 CLOSE SWITCH .................................. 442

List of ECU Reference .......................................... 392 DTC Description .................................................... 442
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 442 DLK
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT.. 393
Reference Value ................................................... 393 B2422 BACK DOOR STATE .......................... 444
Fail-safe ................................................................ 397 DTC Description .................................................... 444 L
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 398 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 444
DTC Index ............................................................ 398 B2423 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MOTOR
OPERATION TIME .......................................... 447 M
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 400
DTC Description .................................................... 447
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 400 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 447
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 400 N
B2426 ENCODER ........................................... 449
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM ............. 413 DTC Description .................................................... 449
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 413 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 449
O
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 422 B2427 ENCODER ........................................... 452
DTC Description .................................................... 452
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 422 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 452 P
Work Flow ............................................................. 422
B2428 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING UNIT ................................................................ 455
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................. 425 DTC Description .................................................... 455
Description ............................................................ 425 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 455
Work Procedure .................................................... 425
B242A CLOSURE CONDITION ...................... 456
DTC Description .................................................... 456
DLK-9
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................456 Component Function Check ................................ 483
B242B HANDS FREE DETECT SENSOR ...... 459
DTC Description ....................................................459 COMBINATION METER BUZZER ................... 485
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ............................... 460
DTC Description ....................................................460 DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 486
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 486
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ............................... 463 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 486
DTC Description ....................................................463 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 486
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 487
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 466 PASSENGER SIDE :
DTC Description ....................................................466 Component Function Check ................................ 487
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................466 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 487
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 467 REAR LH ................................................................. 488

DTC Description ....................................................467 REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 488
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................467 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 488
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH. 468 REAR RH ................................................................. 489

Component Function Check ................................468 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 489
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................468 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 489
Component Inspection ...........................................469 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 491
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH ............. 470 Component Function Check ................................ 491
Component Function Check ................................470 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 491
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................470 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............................. 493
AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH ............... 472 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 493
Component Function Check ................................472 Component Inspection .......................................... 494
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................472 DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 495
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZ- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 495
ER .................................................................... 474 Component Inspection .......................................... 496
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................474 HALF LATCH SWITCH .................................... 497
Component Inspection ...........................................474 Component Function Check ................................. 497
BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR .................. 476 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 497
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................476 HANDS FREE SENSOR ................................... 499
BACK DOOR SWITCH .................................... 477 Component Function Check ................................ 499
Component Function Check ................................477
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................477 HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 502
Component Inspection ...........................................478 Component Function Check ................................ 502
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 479 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 502
Component Function Check ................................479 INFORMATION DISPLAY ................................ 503
Component Inspection ...........................................480 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 503
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .................. 481 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ........................ 504
Description .............................................................481 Component Inspection .......................................... 504
Component Function Check ................................481
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................481 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ........ 505
Component Inspection ...........................................482 Component Function Check ................................ 505
CLOSE SWITCH .............................................. 483
DLK-10
OPEN SWITCH ................................................. 507 ALL SWITCHES ....................................................... 530
Component Function Check .................................. 507 ALL SWITCHES : Description ............................... 530 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 507 ALL SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 530
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 509 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH ...................... 531
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Descrip- B
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 509 tion ......................................................................... 531
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 509 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Diagnosis
Procedure .............................................................. 531 C
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 511
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 511 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH ........ 531
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH :
REAR BUMPER ...................................................... 513 D
Description ............................................................. 531
REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 513
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH : Di-
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 516 agnosis Procedure ................................................. 531
E
FRONT DOOR LOCK .............................................. 516 INTELLIGENT KEY .................................................. 531
FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ....... 516 INTELLIGENT KEY : Description .......................... 532
INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 532
REAR DOOR LOCK ................................................ 516 F
REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 516 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ............................ 532
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Description ..... 532
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT ........ 517 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Diagnosis Pro- G
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT : Di- cedure .................................................................... 532
agnosis Procedure ................................................ 517
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR HANDS FREE
TOUCH SENSOR ............................................. 519 FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................ 534 H
RH ............................................................................ 519
RH : Component Function Check ........................ 519 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING DOES I
RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 519 NOT OPERATE ............................................... 535
RH : Component Inspection .................................. 520
BUZZER ................................................................... 535
LH ............................................................................ 520 BUZZER : Description ........................................... 535 J
LH : Component Function Check ........................ 520 BUZZER : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 535
LH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 521
LH : Component Inspection ................................... 522 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR FUNCTIONS DO DLK
NOT CANCEL ................................................. 536
SPINDLE MOTOR ............................................ 523 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 536
RH ............................................................................ 523 L
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR ANTI-PINCH
RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 523
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................ 537
LH ............................................................................ 524 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 537
LH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 524 M
BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION
UNLOCK SENSOR .......................................... 526 DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 538
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION ................................. 538 N
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description ......... 538
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 528 OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Proce-
dure ....................................................................... 538 O
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE ................................................................... 528 CLOSURE FUNCTION ............................................ 539
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 528 CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description ..................... 539
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 539 P
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
OPERATE ......................................................... 529 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 529 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 540
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR OPERATION ALL DOOR ............................................................... 540

ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 540
DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................... 530
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 540
DLK-11
FRONT DOOR ..........................................................540 INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN-
FRONT DOOR : Description .................................540 ING DOES NOT OPERATE .............................. 551
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..................540 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 551
REAR DOOR ............................................................541 IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION
REAR DOOR : Description ....................................541 DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................... 552
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................541 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 552
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................541 KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE ..... 553
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................541
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................541
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................541
ERATE .............................................................. 554
REAR LH ..................................................................542 OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP-

REAR LH : Description ..........................................542 ERATE .............................................................. 555
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................542 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 555
REAR RH .................................................................542 P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER-

REAR RH : Description .........................................542 ATE ................................................................... 556
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................542 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 556
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR ATE ................................................................... 557
KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 544
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ..................................... 557
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description ............. 557
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................. 545 dure ....................................................................... 557
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES .........................545 INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 557

ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description..545 INTELLIGENT KEY : Description .......................... 557
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 557
Procedure ..............................................................545 TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............545 ATE ................................................................... 558
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 558
scription .................................................................546
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag-
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
nosis Procedure .....................................................546 ERATE .............................................................. 559
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ....546
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
Description .............................................................546 NOSES .............................................................. 560
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Work Flow ............................................................. 560
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................546 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 562
Diagnostic Worksheet ........................................... 564
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN-
TELLIGENT KEY ............................................. 547 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 566
HOOD ............................................................... 566
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES Exploded View ...................................................... 566
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 549 HOOD ASSEMBLY ................................................. 566
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 566
HAZARD LAMP OPERATES WHEN AUTO- HOOD ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 567
MATIC BACK DOOR IS OPERATED ............. 550 HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 567
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................550 HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 569
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 569
DLK-12
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 570 DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ......... 594
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- A
tion ........................................................................ 570 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 594
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 594
RADIATOR CORE SEAL ........................................ 570
RADIATOR CORE SEAL : Removal and Installa- DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................ 595 B
tion ........................................................................ 570 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 595
HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 571 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ........................................ 595

DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa- C
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation .. 571
tion ......................................................................... 595
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 572
BACK DOOR ................................................... 290 D
MR20DD .................................................................. 572 Exploded View ....................................................... 598
MR20DD : Exploded View ..................................... 572
MR20DD : Removal and Installation ..................... 572 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 598
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- E
QR25DE ................................................................... 573 tion ......................................................................... 598
QR25DE : Exploded View ..................................... 574 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ................. 600
QR25DE : Removal and Installation ..................... 574 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................ 601 F
R9M .......................................................................... 575 BACK DOOR STRIKER ........................................... 603
R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 576 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 576 tion ......................................................................... 603 G
FRONT FENDER .............................................. 579 BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 603

Exploded View ...................................................... 579 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 603
H
FRONT FENDER ..................................................... 579 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 603
FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ........ 579 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 603 I
FENDER COVER ..................................................... 580
FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ....... 580 HOOD LOCK ................................................... 605
Exploded View ....................................................... 605
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 582 J
Exploded View ...................................................... 582 HOOD LOCK ............................................................ 605
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 605
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 583 HOOD LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 606 DLK
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 583
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 584 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 607
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 584 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 607 L
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 586
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 586 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 608
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 586 Installation ............................................................. 608 M
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ................................... 608
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 587 HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal- N
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 587 lation ...................................................................... 608
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 587 FRONT DOOR LOCK ..................................... 610
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa- Exploded View ....................................................... 610 O
tion ........................................................................ 587
DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 610
REAR DOOR .................................................... 590 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 610
Exploded View ...................................................... 590 P
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 611
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 591 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 611
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 591 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 611
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 592
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 592 OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 612
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 612
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 594
DLK-13
REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 615 Removal and Installation ....................................... 631
Exploded View .......................................................615
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
DOOR LOCK ............................................................615 .. 632
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............615 Removal and Installation ....................................... 632
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................616
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT.. 633
INSIDE HANDLE ......................................................616 Removal and Installation ....................................... 633
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .........616
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH .... 634
OUTSIDE HANDLE ..................................................616 Removal and Installation ....................................... 634
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .....617
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH .............. 635
BACK DOOR LOCK ........................................ 619 Removal and Installation ....................................... 635
Exploded View .......................................................619
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH.. 636
DOOR LOCK ............................................................619 Removal and Installation ....................................... 636
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............619
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................619 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZ-
DOOR LOCK : Unlock procedures ........................620 ER ..................................................................... 637
Removal and Installation ....................................... 637
SPINDLE UNIT .........................................................620
SPINDLE UNIT : Removal and Installation ...........620 HANDS FREE SENSOR ................................... 638
Removal and Installation ....................................... 638
TOUCH SENSOR .....................................................622
TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation .......622 TYPE 3
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 623 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................. 639
Exploded View .......................................................623
APPLICATION NOTICE ................................... 639
FUEL FILLER LID ....................................................624 Information ............................................................ 639
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation .......624
PRECAUTION ........................................... 640
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK .........................................624
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 640
tion .........................................................................624 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE .............................625 SIONER" ............................................................... 640
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover. 640
Installation .............................................................625 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ......... 640
Work ...................................................................... 641
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 626
Removal and Installation .......................................626 PREPARATION ......................................... 642
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA .................................. 627 PREPARATION ................................................ 642
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 642
INSTRUMENT CENTER ..........................................627
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installa- SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 643
tion .........................................................................627
COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 643
LUGGAGE ROOM ...................................................627
Component Parts Location .................................. 643
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation ......627
Back Door Lock Assembly .................................... 644
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 629 Back Door Opener Switch Assembly .................... 644
Door Lock Assembly ............................................. 644
FRONT DOOR ..........................................................629 Door Lock and Unlock Switch ............................... 644
FRONT DOOR : Removal and Installation ............629 Door Switch ........................................................... 645
Ignition Key Cylinder ............................................. 645
REAR BUMPER .......................................................629
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation ..........629 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ...................... 646
System Description ............................................... 646
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 630 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 648
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ............ 649
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 631
DLK-14
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ............... 649 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 681
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys- A
tem Description ..................................................... 649 BACK DOOR SWITCH ................................... 681
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Circuit Component Function Check ................................ 681
Diagram ................................................................. 651 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 681
B
Component Inspection ........................................... 682
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION ...................................... 651
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description.. 652 BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR ............. 683
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 683 C
METER) ................................................................... 652 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ................... 684
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION Component Function Check ................................ 684
METER) : Door Open Warning ............................. 652 D
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION Component Inspection ........................................... 685
METER) : Key System Malfunction ....................... 653
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR .............................. 686 E
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ..................... 654
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 686
Lamp/Indicator (Information Display) .................... 654 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 686
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 686 F
Chime .................................................................... 654
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 687
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM .................... 655 PASSENGER SIDE :
G
System Description ............................................... 655 Component Function Check ................................ 687
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 656 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 687
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 657 REAR LH .................................................................. 688 H

REAR LH : Component Function Check .............. 688
COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 657 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 688
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - I
COMMON ITEM) ................................................... 657 REAR RH ................................................................. 689
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 689
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 658 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 689
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - J
DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System, DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 691
With Super Lock) ................................................... 658
DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 691
MULTI REMOTE ENT .............................................. 659 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 691 DLK
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 691
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (With Super Lock).. 659
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 692
L
TRUNK ..................................................................... 660 PASSENGER SIDE :
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) Component Function Check ................................ 692
(Without Intelligent Key System, With Super Lock) PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 692
.. 660 M
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR .............. 694
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 662 Component Function Check ................................ 694
N
BCM .................................................................. 662
List of ECU Reference .......................................... 662 DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 695
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 663 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 695 O
Component Inspection ........................................... 696
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 663
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 663 HAZARD FUNCTION ...................................... 697
P
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 677 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 697
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 677 KEY SWITCH .................................................. 698
Work Flow ............................................................. 677 Component Function Check .................................. 698
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION .......................... 680 Component Inspection ........................................... 699
Description ............................................................ 680
DLK-15
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 700 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 714
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 714
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 701 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 715
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 715
FRONT DOOR LOCK ..............................................701
FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure .......701 REAR LH ................................................................. 715
REAR LH : Description ......................................... 715
REAR DOOR LOCK .................................................701 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 715
REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ..........701
REAR RH ................................................................. 715
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR ............................. 703 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 715
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................703
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check .......703 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................703 DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................704 KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 717
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 717
Component Function Check ................................704 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
KEYFOB ........................................................... 718
REAR LH ..................................................................705 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 718
REAR LH : Component Function Check ..............705
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................705
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES
NOT ILLUMINATE ............................................ 719
REAR RH .................................................................706 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 719
REAR RH : Component Function Check .............706
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................706 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE .............................................................. 720
UNLOCK SENSOR .......................................... 708 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 720
Component Inspection ...........................................709 REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE ................................................................... 721
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 710 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 721
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER- SUPER LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE ............ 722
ATE .................................................................. 710
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................710 ALL DOOR .............................................................. 722
ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 722
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 722
OPERATE ........................................................ 711
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 722
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 722
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPEN .................... 712 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 722
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 722
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 722
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 713 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 723
REAR LH ................................................................. 723

ALL DOOR ...............................................................713
REAR LH : Description ......................................... 723
ALL DOOR : Description .......................................713
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 723
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................713
REAR RH ................................................................. 723
FRONT DOOR ..........................................................713
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 723
FRONT DOOR : Description .................................713
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..................713
REAR DOOR ............................................................714 UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-

REAR DOOR : Description ....................................714 ERATE .............................................................. 725
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................714 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 725
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................714 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-

DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................714 NOSES .............................................................. 726
DLK-16
Work Flow ............................................................. 726 REAR DOOR ................................................... 752
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 728 Exploded View ....................................................... 752 A
Diagnostic Worksheet ........................................... 730
DOOR ASSEMBLY .................................................. 753
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 732 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 753
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 754 B
HOOD ............................................................... 732 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 754
Exploded View ...................................................... 732
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 756 C
HOOD ASSEMBLY ................................................. 732 DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ......... 756
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 732
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 733 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 756
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 733 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 756 D
HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 735 DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................ 757

HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 735 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 757
E
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 736 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ........................................ 757
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 736 tion ......................................................................... 757 F
RADIATOR CORE SEAL ........................................ 736 BACK DOOR ................................................... 290
RADIATOR CORE SEAL : Removal and Installa- Exploded View ....................................................... 760
tion ........................................................................ 736 G
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 760
HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 737 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation .. 737 tion ......................................................................... 760 H
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ................. 762
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 738 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................ 763
R9M .......................................................................... 738 BACK DOOR STRIKER ........................................... 765 I
R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 738 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 738 tion ......................................................................... 765
FRONT FENDER .............................................. 741 BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 765 J
Exploded View ...................................................... 741 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 765
FRONT FENDER ..................................................... 741 BACK DOOR STAY ................................................. 765 DLK
FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ........ 741 BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 765
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal .............................. 766
FENDER COVER ..................................................... 742
FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ....... 742 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 766 L
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 744 Installation ............................................................. 766
Exploded View ...................................................... 744
M
HOOD LOCK ................................................... 768
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 745
Exploded View ....................................................... 768
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 745
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 746 HOOD LOCK ............................................................ 768 N
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 746 HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 768
HOOD LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 769
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 748
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 748 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 770 O
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 748
Installation ............................................................. 770
P
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 771
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 749
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 749 Installation ............................................................. 771
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ................................... 771
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal-
tion ........................................................................ 749
lation ...................................................................... 771
DLK-17
FRONT DOOR LOCK ...................................... 773 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 791
Exploded View .......................................................773 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
DOOR LOCK ............................................................773 SIONER" ............................................................... 791
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............774 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover. 791
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................774 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ......... 791
INSIDE HANDLE ......................................................774 Work ...................................................................... 792
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .........774
PREPARATION ......................................... 793
OUTSIDE HANDLE ..................................................775
PREPARATION ................................................ 793
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 793
REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 778
Exploded View .......................................................778 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 794
DOOR LOCK ............................................................778 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 794

DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............778 Component Parts Location .................................. 794
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................779 Back Door Lock Assembly .................................... 795
Back Door Opener Switch Assembly .................... 795
INSIDE HANDLE ......................................................779 Door Lock Assembly ............................................. 795
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .........779 Door Lock and Unlock Switch ............................... 796
Door Switch ........................................................... 796
OUTSIDE HANDLE ..................................................779 Ignition Key Cylinder ............................................. 796
SYSTEM ........................................................... 797
BACK DOOR LOCK ........................................ 782
Exploded View .......................................................782 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ............................. 797
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : System De-
DOOR LOCK ............................................................782 scription ................................................................. 797
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............782
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................782 . 799
DOOR LOCK : Unlock procedures ........................783
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ................... 799
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 784 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM : System
Exploded View .......................................................784 Description ............................................................ 800
FUEL FILLER LID ....................................................784 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM : Circuit
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation .......784 Diagram ................................................................ 802
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK .........................................785 BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM ........................... 802
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM : System De-
tion .........................................................................785 scription ................................................................. 803
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM : Circuit Dia-
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE .............................786 gram ...................................................................... 804
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation .............................................................786 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) ................................................................... 804
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 787 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
Removal and Installation .......................................787 METER) : Door Open Warning ............................. 804
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR ............... 788 METER) : Key System Malfunction ....................... 805
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ..................... 806
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 789 WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Removal and Installation .......................................789 Lamp/Indicator (Information Display) .................... 806
TYPE 4 WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Chime .................................................................... 806
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................... 790
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 807
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 790
Information .............................................................790 COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 807
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
PRECAUTION ............................................ 791 COMMON ITEM) .................................................. 807
DLK-18
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 808 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 838
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 838 A
DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System
and Super Lock) .................................................... 808 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 840
MULTI REMOTE ENT .............................................. 809 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 840 B
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Without Super DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 842
Lock) ..................................................................... 809 Component Function Check ................................ 842 C
TRUNK ..................................................................... 810 Component Inspection ........................................... 843
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK)
(Without Intelligent Key System and Super Lock).. 810 HAZARD FUNCTION ...................................... 844 D
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 812 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 844
E
BCM .................................................................. 812 KEY SWITCH .................................................. 845
List of ECU Reference .......................................... 812 Component Function Check .................................. 845
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 813 Component Inspection ........................................... 846 F
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 813 KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 847
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 813 Component Inspection ........................................... 847 G
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 826 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 848
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 826 FRONT DOOR LOCK .............................................. 848 H
Work Flow ............................................................. 826 FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ....... 848
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION .......................... 829 REAR DOOR LOCK ................................................ 848
Description ............................................................ 829 REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 848 I
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 830 UNLOCK SENSOR ......................................... 850

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 850 J
BACK DOOR SWITCH ..................................... 830 Component Inspection ........................................... 851
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 830 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 852
Component Inspection .......................................... 831 DLK
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR .............. 832 ATE .................................................................. 852
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 832 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 852 L
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 833 AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
Component Function Check ................................ 833 OPERATE ....................................................... 853
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 833 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 853 M
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPEN .................... 854
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 835 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 854 N
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 835 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 835 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 855
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 835 O
ALL DOOR ............................................................... 855
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 836 ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 855
PASSENGER SIDE : ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 855
Component Function Check ................................ 836 P
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 836 FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 855
FRONT DOOR : Description ................................. 855
REAR LH ................................................................. 837 FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 855
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 837
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 837 REAR DOOR ............................................................ 856
REAR DOOR : Description .................................... 856
REAR RH ................................................................. 838 REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 856
DLK-19
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................856 RADIATOR CORE SEAL : Removal and Installa-
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................856 tion ........................................................................ 874
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................856
HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 875
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................856 HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation ... 875
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........857 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 876
REAR LH ..................................................................857 MR20DD .................................................................. 876

REAR LH : Description ..........................................857 MR20DD : Exploded View .................................... 876
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................857 MR20DD : Removal and Installation ..................... 876
REAR RH .................................................................857 QR25DE ................................................................... 877

REAR RH : Description .........................................857 QR25DE : Exploded View ..................................... 878
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................857 QR25DE : Removal and Installation ..................... 878
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH R9M ......................................................................... 879

DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 880
R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 880
KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 859
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................859 FRONT FENDER .............................................. 883
Exploded View ...................................................... 883
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
KEYFOB .......................................................... 860 FRONT FENDER ..................................................... 883
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................860 FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ....... 883
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- FENDER COVER .................................................... 884
ERATE ............................................................. 861 FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ....... 884
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 886
REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER- Exploded View ...................................................... 886
ATE .................................................................. 862
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 887
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 888
ERATE ............................................................. 863 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 888
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................863 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 890
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG- DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 890
NOSES ............................................................. 864 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 890
Work Flow ..............................................................864 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 890
Inspection Procedure .............................................866
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................868 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 891
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 891
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 870
HOOD ............................................................... 870 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
Exploded View .......................................................870 tion ........................................................................ 891
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................870 REAR DOOR .................................................... 894

HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....870 Exploded View ...................................................... 894
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................871
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................871 DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 895
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................873 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 896
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............873 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 896
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................874 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 898

HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 898
tion .........................................................................874
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 898
RADIATOR CORE SEAL .........................................874 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 898
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 899
DLK-20
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 899 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 915
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 915 A
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 899 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 916
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 899 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 916
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 916 B
BACK DOOR .................................................... 290
Exploded View ...................................................... 902 OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 917
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 917 C
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 902
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 920
tion ........................................................................ 902 Exploded View ....................................................... 920
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ................. 904 D
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 905 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 920
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 920
BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 907 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 921
E
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 907 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 921
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 921
BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 907 F
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 907 OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 921
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 922
BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 907
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 907 BACK DOOR LOCK ....................................... 924 G
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal ............................. 908 Exploded View ....................................................... 924
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 908 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 924

DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 924 H
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 908 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 924
DOOR LOCK : Unlock procedures ........................ 925
HOOD LOCK .................................................... 910 I
Exploded View ...................................................... 910 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 926
Exploded View ....................................................... 926
HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 910
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 910 FUEL FILLER LID .................................................... 927 J
HOOD LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 911 FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 927
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 912 FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ......................................... 927
DLK
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa-
Installation ............................................................. 912 tion ......................................................................... 927
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 913 FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 928 L
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 913 Installation ............................................................. 928
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ................................... 913 DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 929 M
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal- Removal and Installation ....................................... 929
lation ...................................................................... 913
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 930 N
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 915 Removal and Installation ....................................... 930
Exploded View ...................................................... 915
O
DLK-21
APPLICATION NOTICE
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [TYPE 1]
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

APPLICATION NOTICE
Information INFOID:0000000010709172
Check the vehicle type to use the service information in this section.
Destination
Service information
Handle Intelligent Key system Super lock function
Type 1 RHD With With
Type 2 LHD With Without
Type 3 RHD Without With
Type 4 LHD Without Without
DLK-22
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TYPE 1]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010708011
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
F
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. G
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. I
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing J
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
DLK
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000010708012
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
L
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
PIIB3706J
O
Work INFOID:0000000010708013
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their P
operational.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.
DLK-23
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [TYPE 1]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000010708014
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
(J-39570)
Locates the noise
Chassis ear
SIIA0993E
(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rat- Repairs the cause of noise
tle Kit
SIIA0994E
DLK-24
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
B
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010708015
VIEW WITH REAR C
DLK
DLK-25
COMPONENT PARTS
JMKIB3673ZZ
View with door opened View with door panel View with front bumper fascia as-
sembly removed
View with A/C control removed View with instrument panel center View with rear seat removed
View with front luggage floor board View with rear bumper fascia assem- View with back door panel
removed bly removed
DLK-26
COMPONENT PARTS
No. Component Function A

Rear door lock assembly RH DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
Front door lock assembly (driver side) DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
B
Power window main switch (door lock
DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock Switch"
and unlock switch)
• Performs operation method guide and warning with buzzer.
Combination meter C
• Transmits vehicle speed signal to CAN communication line.
Inputs push-button ignition switch ON/OFF condition to BCM.
Push-button ignition switch
Refer to PCS-65, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
D
Transmits shift position signal to BCM and automatic back door control unit via
CAN communication line.
TCM
Refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location. E
BCM detects the vehicle status according to signals from each door switch and
each outside/inside key antenna. BCM transmits drive signal to door lock actuator
when BCM receives operation signal from remote keyless entry receiver and each F
BCM
switch.
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location.
Front door lock assembly (passenger G
DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
side)
Rear door lock assembly LH DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
H
Back door lock assembly DLK-30, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assembly"
Door switch DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch"
Front door request switch DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch"
I
Outside key antenna (front door) DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna"
Intelligent Key warning buzzer DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer" J
Inside key antenna (instrument cen-
DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna"
ter)
Door lock status indicator DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Status Indicator"
DLK
Inside key antenna (luggage room)

(For 3 seat rows models)
L
Outside key antenna (rear bumper) DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna"
M
Back door opener switch assembly DLK-30, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener Switch Assembly"
VIEW WITH FRONT N
DLK-27
COMPONENT PARTS
JMKIB2949ZZ
View with back door opened View with instrument lower panel LH View with luggage side lower finisher
removed
View with rear bumper fascia assem-
bly removed
No. Component Function

Transmits ignition switch ON signal to BCM and automatic back door control unit
IPDM E/R via CAN communication line.
Transmits vehicle speed signal to BCM and automatic back door control unit via
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
Refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Touch sensor RH DLK-34, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor"
Automatic back door close switch DLK-29, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Close Switch"
Touch sensor LH DLK-34, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor"
DLK-28
COMPONENT PARTS
A
Spindle unit LH DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit"
Spindle unit RH DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit"
Automatic back door switch DLK-30, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Switch" B
Automatic back door main switch DLK-29, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Main Switch"
Automatic back door control unit DLK-29, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Control Unit" C
Automatic back door warning buzzer DLK-30, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Warning Buzzer"
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Close Switch INFOID:0000000010708016 D
• When automatic back door close switch is pressed, back door auto close or reverse operation is detected
and transmits automatic back door close switch signal to automatic back door control unit. E
• Automatic back door close switch is installed in the back door
panel.
H
JMKIB2928ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Control Unit INFOID:0000000010708017

I
• Automatic back door control unit controls the automatic back door system.
• Automatic back door control unit is installed behind luggage side
lower finisher. J
DLK
JMKIB2929ZZ
M
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Main Switch INFOID:0000000010708018
• Controls automatic back door open/close operation of automatic back door open/close function. N
• Automatic back door main switch is installed in the instrument
lower panel RH.
O
JMKIB3657ZZ
DLK-29
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Switch INFOID:0000000010708019
• When automatic back door switch is pressed, back door auto open/close operation is detected and transmits
automatic back door switch signal to automatic back door control unit.
• Automatic back door switch is installed in the instrument lower
panel LH.
JMKIB2930ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Warning Buzzer INFOID:0000000010708020
• Warns the user of the automatic back door condition and inappropriate operations with the buzzer sounds.
• Automatic back door warning buzzer is installed behind rear
bumper fascia assembly.
JMKIB2931ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010708021
• Back door lock assembly integrates back door closure motor, half latch switch, open switch, close switch
and back door switch.
• Closure motor: Inputs open/close signal from automatic back door control unit and activates the back door
auto closure operation.
• Half latch switch: Starts the closure motor close operation.
• Open switch: Stops the closure motor open operation.
• Close switch: Stops the closure motor close operation
• Back door switch: Detects open/close status of back door.
• Back door lock assembly is installed in the back door panel.
JMKIB2942ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener Switch Assembly INFOID:0000000010708022
• Back door opener switch assembly integrates back door opener switch and back door opener request
switch.
DLK-30
COMPONENT PARTS
• Back door opener switch detects open operation of back door and transmits back door opener switch sig-
nal to BCM. A
• Back door request switch detects door lock/unlock operation and transmits door request switch signal to
BCM.
• Back door opener switch assembly is installed in the back door B
panel.
JMKIB2937ZZ
E
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010708023
F
• Door lock actuator and unlock sensor are integrated in front door
lock assembly (driver side).
• Door lock actuator receives lock/unlock signal from BCM, and then
locks/unlocks door. G
• Only front door lock assembly (driver side) integrates unlock sen-
sor. Unlock sensor transmits lock/unlock status of driver side door
to BCM. H
I
JMKIA9347ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock Switch INFOID:0000000010708024
J
• Door lock and unlock switch transmits door lock/unlock signal operation to BCM.
• Driver side door lock and unlock switch is integrated in the
power window main switch. DLK
JMKIA9352ZZ
N
• Passenger side door lock and unlock switch is integrated in front
power window switch (passenger side).
O
JMKIB1506ZZ
DLK-31
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Status Indicator INFOID:0000000010713165
• Door lock status indicates door lock status.

• The indicator illuminates when a lock operation is successful.
• Door lock status indicator is integrated in the integral switch.
JMKIB1879ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch INFOID:0000000010708025
• Door request switch detects door lock/unlock operation and transmits door request switch signal to BCM.
• Door request switch is integrated in the outside handle grip.
JMKIB2935ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch INFOID:0000000010708026
Detects door open/close condition.
JMKIA9779ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna INFOID:0000000010708028
• Inside key antenna detects that Intelligent Key is within the inside
detection area, and then transmits detection status to BCM.
• Inside key antenna (instrument center) is installed behind instru-
ment lower cover.
• Inside key antenna (luggage room) is installed behind rear seat.
JMKIA8646ZZ
DLK-32
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer INFOID:0000000010708029
A
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer warns the user, who is outside vehi-
cle, of operation confirmation according to Intelligent Key operation
and door request switch operation, or of an inappropriate opera- B
tion.
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer is installed in the rear of front
C
D
JMKIB1354ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna INFOID:0000000010708030

E
• Outside key antenna detects that Intelligent Key is within the outside detection area, and then transmits
detection status to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to Intelligent Key.
• Outside key antenna (driver side) and outside key antenna (passenger side) are installed in the outside han- F
dle.
• Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is installed in the rear of bumper fascia assembly.
DRIVER SIDE AND PASSENGER SIDE G
JMKIA8648ZZ J
REAR BUMPER
DLK
JMKIA8646ZZ
N
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit INFOID:0000000010708031
• Spindle unit integrates encoder O

• Encoder: Automatic back door control unit receives the pulse signals from encoders A and B that occurred
due to synchronization with the back door operation. The automatic back door control unit calculates the
back door position, operation direction, and operation speed according to the received pulse signals. P
DLK-33
COMPONENT PARTS
• Spindle motor: Inputs open/close signal from automatic back door
control unit and activates the automatic back door open/close
operation.
JMKIB2939ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor INFOID:0000000010708032
During back door close operation, the touch sensor detects any
trapped foreign material.
JMKIB2940ZZ
DLK-34
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
A
System Description INFOID:0000000010708033
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
JMKIB2435GB
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION G
Door Lock and Unlock Switch

• The door lock and unlock switches are built into power window main switch and front power window switch H
(passenger side).
• Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuator of all doors are
locked.
• Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuator of all doors are I
unlocked.
Unlock Sensor
• BCM locks all doors or unlocks all doors, when driver door lock knob is operated. J
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to lock position, locks door
lock actuator of all doors.
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position once DLK
unlocks the driver door, turning it to unlock position again within 5 seconds after the first unlock operation
unlocks all of the other doors actuator. (Anti-hijack function operation)
Anti-hijack function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT. Refer to DLK-74, "DOOR LOCK :
L
CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System and Super Lock)".
Operation Condition
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed using the door lock
M
and unlock switch.
Door lock and unlock switch operation Operation condition

N
• Doors are not locked by Intelligent Key, door request switch
and auto door lock function
• Ignition position warning function is not activated
LOCK/UNLOCK
• Key remainder function (driver door opened) is not activated. O
Refer to DLK-49, "KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System
Description"
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION P

When ignition switch position is ON and any door is open, all doors cannot locked when door lock and unlock
switch is operated in lock direction.
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock /unlock state, refer to INL-11, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description".
OVERRIDE FUNCTION
DLK-35
When inside handle of driver door is operated while doors are in lock states, lock state of the applicable door
lock becomes invalid and the door is open.
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION
When driver door is opened using the override function, all doors are unlocked.
Unlock function operates when driver door is open while all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Doors are locked by door lock/unlock switch or by automatic lock/unlock function

• Driver side door switch is switched from OFF to ON
Operation condition
• Anti-hijack function is not activated
• Vehicle speed is 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
NOTE:
When anti-hijack function is activated, only the applicable door is unlocked.
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR OPERATION
The door lock status indicator indicates door lock status under the following condition.
Indicator operation Ignition position Door status Lock operation

All doors are closed and door
ON (30 minutes timer) OFF Door lock and unlock switch
is locked
ON ON Door lock and unlock switch
is locked
Intelligent Key, door request
ON (1 minute timer) OFF switch or auto door lock func-
is locked
tion
ON ON switch or auto door lock func-
is locked
tion
(All doors are closed → any
door is open) or (All doors are
ON → OFF – –
locked → any door is un-
locked)
ON (timer is running) → ON
OFF → ON – –
(timer is stop)
ON → ON (30 minutes timer) ON → OFF – Door lock and unlock switch
ON → ON (1 minute timer) ON → OFF – switch or auto door lock func-
tion
DLK-36
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010708034
DLK
JMKIB3706GB
P
DLK-37
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010708035
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3640GB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door locks (door lock/
unlock function) by carrying the Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verifica-
tion using two-way communication between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (BCM).
NOTE:
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key
• The settings for each function can be changed with CONSULT.
• If an Intelligent Key is lost, a new Intelligent Key can be registered. A maximum of 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered.
• It is possible to perform a diagnosis on the system and register an Intelligent Key with CONSULT.
Function Description Refer

Door lock Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the door request switch. DLK-42
The back door can be opened by carrying the Intelligent Key and pressing the
Back door open DLK-44
back door opener switch.
DLK-38
A
When all doors are closed super lock system can be set/release by Intelligent
Super lock DLK-46
Key or door request switch
Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the remote controller button of the
Remote keyless entry DLK-47 B
Intelligent Key.
The Intelligent Key reminder buzzer sounds a warning if the door is locked with
Key reminder DLK-49
the key left inside the vehicle.
Warning (information dis- If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys- C
DLK-61
play) tem is taken, the information display displays to inform the driver.
If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys-
Warning (buzzer) DLK-61
tem is taken, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver. D
Engine start The engine can be turned on while carrying the Intelligent Key. SEC-15
Interior room lamp control Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state. INL-11
E
DLK
DLK-39
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010708036
JMKIB3707GB
DLK-40
DLK
JMKIB3708GB
P
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DLK-41
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010708037
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3641GB
Door lock function controls operation function of the following items.

• Door lock and unlock function (door request switch)
• Anti-hijack function (door request switch)
• Reminder function (door request switch)
• Auto door lock function (door request switch)
• Door lock status indicator operation
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)
When pressing the door request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent
Key.
Operation Description
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it starts the outside key antenna and inside
key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the Intelli-
gent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door.
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID.
• BCM lock/unlock each door lock actuator.
Operation Condition
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed if the door request switch
is operated.
DLK-42
Each door request switch operation Operation condition A

• All doors are closed
• Ignition switch is in the OFF position
Lock • P position warning is not activated
B
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area
• Ignition switch is in the OFF position C
Unlock
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area *
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare D
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.
How to Change Door Lock and Unlock Function Operation Mode

Door lock and unlock function (door request switch) operation mode can be changed using CONSULT. E
Refer to DLK-75, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock)".
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION
Information of super lock system with anti-hijack function. F
Refer to DLK-46, "SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description".
REMINDER FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)
G
When doors are locked or unlocked by door request switch, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a reminder.
Reminder function does not operate if ignition switch in ON position.
Door lock operation H

Hazard warning lamp blink
(With door request switch)
Lock Once
Unlock (all door unlock) Twice I
Unlock (anti-hijack operation) Twice (quick)
How to Change Reminder Function Operation Mode J

With CONSULT
Reminder function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-75, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock)". DLK
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)
After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti- L
vate.
• Door switch is ON (each door is open) M

Operating condition • BCM receives door lock signal
• Push switch is pressed
How to Change Auto Door Lock Function Operation Time N

With CONSULT
Auto door lock function operation time can be changed using CONSULT.
O
• Door lock status indicator turns indicator lamp ON or OFF and indicates door lock or unlock state.
• For door lock status indicator operation, refer to DLK-35, "System Description". P
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA
DLK-43
The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
driver outside door handle, passenger outside door handle and
back door request switch . However, this operating range depends
on the ambient conditions.
JMKIA1954ZZ
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS

Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.
Remote keyless entry receiver
CAN communication system

Hazard warning lamp
Outside key antenna
Door request switch
Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Door lock actuator
Function
Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
Door lock and unlock function (door request switch) × × × × × × × ×
Anti-hijack function (door request switch) × × × × × × × ×
Reminder function (door request switch) × × × ×
Auto door lock function (door request switch) × × × × × ×
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010708038
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3642GB

• When the BCM detects that back door opener switch is pressed, it activates the outside key antenna (rear
bumper) and inside key antenna and transmits the request signal to the Intelligent Key. And then, check that
the Intelligent Key is near the back door.
DLK-44
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver. A
• If the verification result is OK, BCM transmits the back door open request signal to automatic back door con-
trol unit via CAN communication.
B
• BCM unlocks all doors (except back door) and blinks hazard lamp 2 times as a reminder.
• Automatic back door control unit transmits back door open request signal to back door lock assembly and
back door is open.
• When the back door is open, automatic back door system performs waiting operation for next back door C
close operation.
The operation of then back door open is the same as the automatic back door system, refer to DLK-62,
"System Description". D
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, the back door can be opened.
E
Back door opener switch operation Operation condition
• All door: locked
Open • Ignition switch: OFF F
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area*
*
: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, back door can be opened from outside of
the vehicle with a spare Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different. G
The outside key antenna detection area of back door open function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding back H
door opener switch . However, this operating range depends on
the ambient conditions.
I
JMKIA1955ZZ
DLK
L
Outside key antenna (rear bumper)
Automatic back door control unit

M
Back door opener switch
Inside key antenna
Function
Back door switch
N
Intelligent Key
O
BCM
Back open function (back door opener switch) × × × × × × × × ×

P
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION
DLK-45
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010709247
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3312GB
• Super lock provides a higher anti-theft performance than a conventional door lock function.
• BCM controls the super lock function.
• When all doors are closed super lock system can be set/release by Intelligent Key or door request switch.
• When super lock is set, inside handle of doors do not work.
SUPER LOCK SET OPERATION (LOCK OPERATION)
Super Lock Set by Intelligent Key
When Intelligent Key lock button is operated while all doors are in unlock state, super lock of all doors is set,
and simultaneously, all doors are locked.
Super Lock Set by Door Request Switch
When door request switch (driver side, passenger side, or back door) is operated while all doors are in unlock
state, super lock of all doors is set, and simultaneously, all doors are locked.
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITH ANTI-HIJACK MODE
Super Lock Release by Intelligent Key
When Intelligent Key unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, driver door are unlocked. When Intelligent Key unlock button is operated again,
all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch (Driver Side)
When driver side door request switch is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, driver door are unlocked. When driver side door request switch is operated
again within 5 seconds of the 1st driver side door request switch operation, all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch (Passenger Side)
When passenger side door request switch is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all
doors is released, and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch (Back Door)
When back door request switch is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, back door are unlocked. When back door request switch is operated again
within 5 seconds of the 1st back door request switch operation, all doors are unlocked.
DLK-46
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITHOUT ANTI-HIJACK MODE
A
Super Lock Release by Intelligent Key
When Intelligent Key unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
B
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch
When door request switch (driver side, passenger side or back door) is operated while super lock of all doors
is set, super lock of all doors is released, and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
C
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) CHANGE IGNITION SWITCH
Super Lock Release by Ignition Switch is Changed from OFF to ON
When the super lock is set, release super lock when the ignition switch is changed from OFF to ON. D
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION SETTING
With CONSULT E
Anti-hijack function can be set to ON/OFF using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-74, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System and
Super Lock)". F
Without CONSULT
Anti-hijack function can be set to ON/OFF by user with a registered Intelligent Keyfob.
• ON/OFF can be switched when Intelligent Key lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for G
5 seconds or more while steering lock is locked.
• When mode is switched, hazard warning lamp blinks.
H
OFF → ON : 1 blink
ON → OFF : 3 blinks
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION I
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010708039
J
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
DLK
JMKIB3643GB
O
The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the remote control entry function. Therefore, it can be used in
the same manner as the remote controller by operating the door lock/unlock button.
Remote keyless entry function controls operation function of the following items. P
• Door lock and unlock function (Intelligent Key)
• Anti-hijack function
• Reminder function (Intelligent Key)
• Auto door lock function (Intelligent Key)
• Automatic back door open/close function
• Door lock status indicator operation
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY)
DLK-47
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal is transmitted
from Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the signal and compares it with the registered key ID to the vehicle.
• BCM lock/unlock each door lock actuator, when key ID matches.
Operation Condition
If the following condition is satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed if the Intelligent Key button is
pressed.
Intelligent Key button opera-

Operation condition
tion
Lock/set • Ignition switch: OFF position
• P position warning is not activated
Unlock/release Ignition switch: OFF position
Information of super lock system with anti-hijack function.
REMINDER FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY)
When doors are locked or unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as
a reminder.
Door lock operation

(With Intelligent Key button)
Lock Once
Unlock (all door unlock) Twice
Operation Condition
• Reminder function does not operate if ignition switch in ON position.
• When any door is open, reminder function does not operate according to door lock operation.
How to Change Reminder Function Operation Mode
With CONSULT
Reminder function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY)
After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti-
vate.
• Door switch is ON (door is open)

Operating condition • BCM receives lock signal
How to Change Auto Door Lock Function Operation Time

AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION
When back door open button is pressed, back door open automatically for detailed description.
Refer to DLK-62, "System Description".
• Door lock status indicator turns indicator lamp ON or OFF and indicates door lock or unlock state.
• For door lock status indicator operation, refer to DLK-35, "System Description".
DLK-48
OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft.) range of each door, however the opera- A
ble range may differ according to surroundings.
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation. B

C

Hazard warning lamp

Combination meter
D
Door lock actuator

Function
Intelligent Key
Door switch
IPDM E/R
E
BCM
Door lock and unlock function (Intelligent Key) × × × × × F
Reminder function (Intelligent Key) × × × × × × × ×
Auto door lock function (Intelligent Key) × × × × × ×
G
Automatic back door open/close function × × × × ×
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION

H
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010708040
SYSTEM DIAGRAM I
DLK
JMKIB3314GB
BASIC OPERATION N
Key reminder is the function that prevents the key from being left in the vehicle.
Key reminder has the following 3 functions.
O
Key remainder function Operation condition Operation
Right after door is locked by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock
knob operation under the following conditions
Driver door opened • Ignition switch: LOCK or OFF position All doors unlock
P
• Registered Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
• Driver door is opened
DLK-49
Key remainder function Operation condition Operation
When all doors are locked by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock
Driver door closed* knob within 0.2 seconds after driver door is closed
All doors unlock
When all of the following conditions are satisfied

• All doors unlock
• Locked all doors
Door is open to closed • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• [Any door: open] → [all doors: closed]
ing buzzer
*:If the door closing impact shocks the door lock knob, or contacts against baggage with the door lock knob might activate the door locks
accidentally but unlock operation is perform in these cases.
NOTE:
The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be times when
the Intelligent Key cannot be detected, and this function does not operate when the Intelligent Key is on the
instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system sometimes does not operate if the
Intelligent Key is in the door pocket for the open door.
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER)
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Door Open Warning INFOID:0000000010708041
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that each door is open or is not fully closed.
Symbol Message
JMKIB2780ZZ
SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

Synchronization is applied.
Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3593GB
SIGNAL PATH
• BCM transmits door switch signal to combination meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter judges according to received door switch signal that a door is open or not fully
closed, door open warning displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATIONG CONDITION
Each door switch is ON
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION
All door switches are OFF
DLK-50
TIMING CHART
A
JMKIB3594GB
D
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Engine Start Information
INFOID:0000000010708042
DESIGN/PURPOSE E
Information display informs the driver that the engine can be started.
Symbol Message F
CVT models – H
I
JMKIB1883ZZ
DLK
M/T models –
JMKIB1884ZZ M

No applicable
N
DLK-51
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3596GB
SIGNAL PATH
• BCM receives shift position signal and engine status signal from TCM and ECM via CAN communication
and checks that the engine can be started.
• When BCM detects that the engine can be started, meter display signal is transmitted by BCM to combina-
tion meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, engine start information displays.
When Ignition Switch is ON.
When all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition switch is in ON position.
• Shift position: P position
• Engine can be started.
When Ignition Switch is Other Than ON.
• One condition of A
• All conditions of B
A condition B condition
• Any door is open → All door is closed
• Ignition switch: Other than ON position
• Push-button ignition switch: Pressed
• Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition
• Registered Intelligent Key is detected inside vehicle.
switch while brake pedal is depressed.
When Ignition Switch is Turned From ON to OFF.

• Ignition switch: ON → OFF
NOTE:
Engine start information turns ON for several seconds and then turns OFF, when ignition switch is turned to
the ON position from the OFF position. Engine start information does not turn ON until opening and closing of
driver door is detected again.
When any of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Shift position: Other than P position
• Engine is started.
• Engine cannot start.
When Ignition Switch is Other than ON.
DLK-52
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle. A
• When BCM receives Intelligent Key button operation via remote keyless entry receiver.
• When BCM receives door request switch signal from door request switch.
• After 15 seconds are passed since the engine start information is displayed.
B
• After several seconds are passed since the engine start information is displayed.
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Intelligent Key Low Battery C
Warning INFOID:0000000010708043
D
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key battery level is low.
NOTE:
Information display does not display when Intelligent Key battery is discharged. E
Symbol Message
F
Key Battery Low

H
JMKIB1397ZZ
I

No applicable J
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
DLK
JMKIB3597GB
O
SIGNAL PATH
• When Intelligent Key receives request signal from inside key antenna or outside key antenna, transmits key
P
ID signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key to remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives key ID signal via remote keyless entry receiver and detects that Intelligent Key battery level is
low.
• When BCM detects that ignition switch is ON, meter display signal is transmitted by BCM to combination
meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, Intelligent Key low battery warning displays.
DLK-53
• Intelligent Key battery level is low.
• After 30 seconds are passed since the Intelligent Key low battery warning is displayed
• Ignition switch is in a position other than ON.
• When Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while brake pedal is depressed.
TIMING CHART
JMKIB1406GB
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Intelligent Key System Malfunc-

tion INFOID:0000000010708044
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key system malfunctions or that engine cannot be started.
Symbol Message
Key System Error

See Owner’s Manual
JMKIB1398ZZ

DLK-54
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
A
JMKIB1417GB
D
SIGNAL PATH
• When BCM detects that Intelligent Key system malfunctions or that the engine cannot be started, meter dis-
play signal is transmitted by BCM to combination meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, Intelligent Key system malfunction displays. E
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATING CONDITION

• The engine cannot be started. F
• Intelligent Key system malfunction is detected.
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION G
• Intelligent Key system malfunction or engine non-start status is resolved.
• Ignition switch is turned to LOCK or OFF, and 15 seconds are passed.
H
TIMING CHART
DLK
JMKIB1418GB
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Key ID Verification Information

INFOID:0000000010708045 L
DESIGN/PURPOSE
If the system cannot detect a registered Intelligent Key inside the vehicle, it informs the driver that it is neces- M
sary for the vehicle to detect a registered Intelligent Key.
Symbol Message
N
–
P
JMKIB1887ZZ

No applicable
DLK-55
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3598GB
SIGNAL PATH
• BCM activates inside key antenna and checks that Intelligent Key is in vehicle, when push-button ignition
switch operation is performed while ignition switch position is LOCK.
• When BCM does not detect a registered Intelligent Key in vehicle, meter display signal is transmitted by
BCM to combination meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, key ID warning displays.
• After 5 seconds are passed since the key ID warning is displayed, key ID verification information displays.
• Ignition switch: LOCK position
• Push-button ignition switch operation is performed.
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle.
• After 25 seconds are passed since the key ID verification information is displayed.
• When all door is locked with Intelligent Key or door request switch
• Lock the doors after all doors are closed
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Key ID Warning INFOID:0000000010708046
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key is not detected in vehicle.
Symbol Message
Key ID Incorrect
JMKIB1398ZZ

DLK-56
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
A
E
JMKIB3599GB
SIGNAL PATH
F
BCM to combination meter via CAN communication. G
When all of the following conditions are satisfied. H
• Ignition switch is in LOCK position
• A registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle. I
• 5 seconds are passed since operation start. J
• A registered Intelligent Key is detected in passenger room when push-button ignition switch is operated.
• Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while brake pedal is depressed (when
Intelligent Key battery is discharged). DLK
TIMING CHART
JMKIB1420GB
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : P Position Warning (Information

Display) INFOID:0000000010708047
DESIGN/PURPOSE
DLK-57
Information display warns the driver of egression from the vehicle while shift is other than P position.
Symbol Message
Shift to Park
JMKIB1400ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH WARNING CHIME
Synchronization is applied. [P position warning (buzzer)]
Refer to WCS-15, "WARNING CHIME : P Position Warning (Buzzer)".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB1422GB
SIGNAL PATH
• BCM transmits meter display signal to combination meter via CAN communication, when P position warning
(buzzer) is operated.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, P position warning displays.
P position warning (buzzer) is operated.
P position warning (buzzer) is canceled.
TIMING CHART
JMKIB1423GB
DLK-58
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Steering Lock Information
INFOID:0000000010708048 A
DESIGN/PURPOSE
When unlocking steering the lock, the system informs the driver that it cannot be unlocked unless the steering B
wheel is turned.
Symbol Message
C
–
E
F
JMKIB1874ZZ
SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP G

SYSTEM DIAGRAM H
JMKIB3595GB DLK
SIGNAL PATH
• BCM transmits the steering lock unit unlock request signal to the steering lock unit, and simultaneously the
steering lock unit checks that the steering lock can be unlocked. L
• If the LOCK status of the steering lock unit is detected by the steering lock unit even after BCM is transmitted
to the steering unlock request signal, the meter display signal is sent to the combination meter via CAN com-
munication. M
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, steering lock information displays.
When the steering lock cannot be unlocked. N
• When the steering lock is unlocked. (Press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel O
to the left and right gently.)
• After 15 seconds are passed since the steering lock information is displayed.
P
DLK-59
TIMING CHART
JMKIB1427GB
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Take Away Warning (Informa-

tion Display) INFOID:0000000010708049
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Symbol Message
No Key Detected
JMKIB1398ZZ

Take away warning
Refer to WCS-20, "WARNING CHIME : Take Away Warning (Buzzer)".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB1428GB
SIGNAL PATH
DLK-60
• BCM transmits meter display signal to combination meter via CAN communication, when take away warning
(buzzer) is operated. A
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, take away warning displays.
Take away warning (buzzer) operates. B
Take away warning (buzzer) is canceled. C
Refer to WCS-20, "WARNING CHIME : Take Away Warning (Buzzer)"
TIMING CHART D
JMKIB1429GB
G
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamp/Indicator (Information Display)
INFOID:0000000010708050 H
Item Reference
I
Refer to DLK-50, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) :
Door open warning
Door Open Warning"
Refer to DLK-51, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : J
Engine start information
Engine Start Information"
Intelligent Key low battery warning
Intelligent Key Low Battery Warning"
DLK
Intelligent Key system malfunction
Intelligent Key System Malfunction"
Key ID verification information L
Key ID Verification Information"
Key ID warning
Key ID Warning"
M
Refer to DLK-57, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : P
P position warning
Position Warning (Information Display)"
Refer to DLK-57, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : P
Steering lock information N
Position Warning (Information Display)"
Take away warning
Take Away Warning (Information Display)"
O
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Chime INFOID:0000000010708051
P
Item Reference
Door lock operation warning Refer to WCS-10, "WARNING CHIME : Door Lock Operation Warning".
OFF position warning Refer to WCS-13, "WARNING CHIME : OFF Position Warning".
P position warning (buzzer) Refer to WCS-15, "WARNING CHIME : P Position Warning (Buzzer)".
Take away warning (buzzer) Refer to WCS-20, "WARNING CHIME : Take Away Warning (Buzzer)".
DLK-61
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3678GB
The automatic back door system performs the auto open/close operation of the back door by operating the
automatic back door switch, the automatic back door close switch, the back door opener switch, and Intelligent
Key.
Automatic back door system controls operation function of the following items.
• Automatic open/close temporary stop function
• Back door open position setting function
• Warning function
• Back door auto closure function
• Anti-pinch function
AUTOMATIC OPEN/CLOSE TEMPORARY STOP FUNCTION

Automatic open/close temporary stop function temporarily stops the open/close operation by operating back
door opener switch during auto open/close operation or by turning automatic back door main switch OFF.
DLK-62
Back Door Opener Switch Operation
• Automatic open/close operation stops when back door opener switch is operated during auto open/close A
operation.
• Back door performs auto open operation in an open direction when back door opener switch is operated
again during automatic open/close temporary stop function operation.
B
• Back door performs auto close operation in a close direction when automatic back door close switch is oper-
ated during automatic open/close temporary stop function operation.
Automatic Back Door Main Switch Operation
C
• While automatic back door main switch is ON, automatic open/close operation stops when automatic back
door main switch is turned OFF during automatic open/close operation.
• While automatic back door main switch is OFF, automatic open/close operation stops when automatic back
door main switch is turned ON then turned OFF during automatic open/close operation. D
• Back door performs automatic open operation in an open direction when back door opener switch is oper-
ated again during auto open/close temporary stop function operation.
• Back door performs automatic close operation in a close direction when automatic back door close switch is E
operated during automatic open/close temporary stop function operation.
BACK DOOR OPEN POSITION SETTING FUNCTION F

Back door fully open position setting function is a function that enables users to set the full opening stop posi-
tion of automatic open operation when back door may contact an obstacle if fully opened by the automatic
open operation.
CAUTION: G
• It is not possible to set the position farther than the initial setting fully open position in the open
direction.
• If a vehicle is parked on a steep slope after setting the fully open position of back door to half open H
or less, the door may open to near the half open position instead of stopping at the set position.
• When more than one user uses the vehicle, the back door fully open position setting function may
be changed. Be careful when operating automatic open operation for the first time.
I
Setting Procedure
By performing the following operations, stop position of the back door open position setting function can be
set. J
1. Set the shift position to P range.
2. Fully close the back door.
3. After turning OFF the automatic back door main switch, release the latch by back door opener switch
operation. DLK
4. Manually move the back door to the desired stop position.
5. While maintaining the back door position, press and hold the automatic back door close switch for 3 sec-
onds or more. When the setting is successfully completed, automatic back door buzzer sounds (pattern L
D).
Reset Procedure
By performing the following operation, the setting of the back door fully open position setting function can be M
canceled.
2. Open the back door to the fully open position.
3. Manually move the back door to the upper limit position in the opening direction. N
4. Press and hold the automatic back door close switch for 3 seconds or more. When the setting is success-
fully completed, automatic back door buzzer sounds (pattern D).
O
• In the case of the back door fully closed, operate the automatic back door switch, Intelligent Key or back
door opener switch with the back door unlock. The back door closure motor releases the latch, then the spin- P
dle motor opens the back door to the fully open position. The closure motor reverses to the neutral position
simultaneously.
• In the case of the back door fully open, operate the automatic back door switch, Intelligent Key or automatic
back door close switch. The spindle motor closes the back door to the half-latch position, then the back door
closure motor to the full latch position. Then, the closure motor reverses to the neutral position.
Operation Condition
DLK-63
• Shift position: P position (CVT models)
• Parking brake: ON (M/T models)
• Vehicle speed: 0 km/h
• Power supply (automatic power back door control unit): Approx. 11 V or more
Automatic Open/close Operation When Each Switch is Operated
The automatic open/close operation when each switch is operated differs according to the stop position or
operating status of back door. Refer to the following.
JMKIB3531GB
Automatic back door switch

Condition
Automatic back door Automatic back door Back door operation
Back door position Back door condition
main switch switch
Perform the auto close
Full open ON Stop Long press (1 sec)
function
ON Stop Long press (1 sec)
function
Fully open to just before Auto open function op-
– Press function (reverse oper-
fully open erating
ation)
Auto close function op-
– Press Operation is continued
erating
Non-operation (manual
– Stop Press
movement only)
Auto open function op-
Middle erating
ation)
Perform the auto open
erating
ation)
– Stop Press
movement only)
Just before fully closed – Press Operation is continued
erating
to fully closed
erating
ation)
Full closed ON Stop Long press (1 sec)
function
DLK-64
Intelligent Key
Condition A
Back door opera-
Automatic back Back door condition
Back door position Ignition switch Intelligent Key
door main switch tion
Perform the auto B
Full open OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec)
close function
Perform the auto
OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec)
close function C
Perform the auto
Fully open to just Auto open function
OFF – Long press (1 sec) close function (re-
before fully open operating
verse operation)
D
Auto close function Operation is contin-
OFF – Long press (1 sec)
operating ued
Non-operation
E
OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec) (manual movement
only)
Perform the auto
Auto open function F
Middle OFF – Long press (1 sec) close function (re-
operating
verse operation)
Perform the auto
Auto close function
OFF – Long press (1 sec) open function (re- G
operating
verse operation)
Non-operation
OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec) (manual movement H
only)
Just before fully
Auto open function Operation is contin-
closed to fully OFF – Long press (1 sec)
operating ued
closed I
Perform the auto
Auto close function
OFF – Long press (1 sec) open function (re-
operating
verse operation)
J
Perform the auto
Full closed OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec)
open function
Automatic back door close switch

DLK
Condition
main switch close switch
L
Full open ON Stop Press
function
ON Stop Press M
function
fully open erating
ation) N
erating
Perform the auto close O
ON Stop Press
function
– Press function (reverse oper- P
Middle erating
ation)
erating
ation)
DLK-65
Condition
– Stop Press
movement only)
erating
to fully closed
erating
ation)

Condition
Automatic back door Back door opener Back door operation
main switch switch
Full open – Stop Press Non-operation
– Stop Press Non-operation
Operation stop (auto-
– Press matic open/close tem-
Fully open to just before erating
porary stop function)
fully open
erating
ON Stop Press
function
Middle erating
erating
ON Stop Press
function
Just before fully closed – Press matic open/close tem-
erating
to fully closed porary stop function)
erating
ON Stop Press
Full closed function
OFF Stop Press Back door open
Timing Chart (Full Closed to Fully Open Operation)
DLK-66
H
JMKIB3679GB
Timing Operation
I
Buzzer operate after operation permission conditions are satisfied.
After buzzer operation (A pattern) ends, back door closure motor starts the open operation.
Open SW turns ON, and back door latch release operation completes. J
Half latch SW turns ON, and then back door closure motor performs reverse operation and returns to the
neutral position.
DLK
When close SW turns OFF, back door closure motor reverse operation stops, and then completes return-
ing to the neutral position.
Timing Chart (Fully Open to Fully Closed Operation) L
JMKIB3680GB
DLK-67
Timing Operation
After buzzer operation (A pattern) ends, spindle motor starts the close operation.
CONTROL IF NOT WITHIN THE OPERATION CONDITIONS DURING THE OPERATION

If the back door is not within the operation conditions during the operation, the automatic back door control unit
performs the control as follows.
Item
Back door operation status
(Condition)
Automatic back door main switch: ON→OFF Operation stops
Operation condition release during the operation start
Automatic back door function is not operating
announcement
Operation continues (once back door fully closed state is detected, au-
CVT models: Shift position: P position→other than P po-
tomatic operation does not become available again until the shift posi-
sition
tion is shifted to P range)
M/T models: Parking brake: ON→OFF tomatic operation does not become available again until the parking
brake is set to ON)
Auto open function op- Operation stop [Back door fully closed or buzzer sounds until the vehi-
Vehicle speed erating cle stops (pattern C)]
(0 km/h → More than 1 km/h) Auto close function op- The operation is continued [buzzer sounds (pattern C) until back door
erating fully closed]
Operation time
Operation stops
(More than approx. 180 sec.)
Malfunction detected
(Power supply circuit, half latch switch, and back door Operation stops
condition)
Operation continues (operation stops when pinching is detected after-
Open operation
wards.)
Close operation Operation stops
Touch sensor circuit Closure (close) opera-
(Normal → Open) Closure closing operation, or warning buzzer operates (B pattern)
tion
Closure [open (return
the latch to the neutral Operation continues
position)]
WARNING FUNCTION
The warning function is as follows and gives the user warning information using automatic back door warning
buzzer.
Automatic back door warning buzzer
Pattern Description Time
• Operation start announcement

A • Anti-pinch operation start announce- 0.75 sec
ment
JMKIA1862ZZ
During the closure operation, when touch

B Pi--- sensor detects any trapped foreign materi- 2.0 sec
al, the back door stops halfway
DLK-68
A
The conditions are not satisfied in the fully
Back door fully closed or vehi-
C Pi------•••••• open position or during the operation, and
cle is stopped
then the operation continues
B
• Calibration of automatic back door posi-

tion information is complete C
D 2.5 sec
• Back door open position setting proce-
dure is complete
JMKIA6517ZZ D
BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION

E
Open Function
When back door opener switch is pressed and automatic back door main switch in the OFF position, BCM
transmits the back door open request signal to automatic back door control unit via CAN communication, and
automatic back door control unit opens back door lock assembly. F
Timing Chart (Open function)

G
DLK
JMKIB3494GB
Closure Function
When the back door is closed to the half-latch position, the motor drives to rotate the latch lever and pulls it in L
from half latched to fully latched and automatically closes the door. Then, the closure motor reverses to the
neutral position.
Timing Chart (Closure Function) M
JMKIB3495GB
ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
DLK-69
During auto open operation, if an object is detected by encoder pulse in the door's path, a warning chime
sounds and the back door operates in the reverse direction to prevent pinching.
During auto close operation, if an object is detected by the touch sensors and encoder pulse in the door's
path, a warning chime sounds and the back door operates in the open direction until it is fully open.
Operation Condition
Detection method Encoder pulse Touch sensor

Applicable operation Open/close operation Close operation
• Buzzer sounds (pattern A) and the back door stops in
Buzzer sounds (pattern A) the fully-open position after reverse operation
Stop the vehicle
and reverse operation • During closure (close) operation (at main switch OFF):
Operation when Closure [open (neutral position return)] operation
any trapped for-
eign material is de- • The back door reverses a certain amount, and then it
tected reverses automatically to perform the auto close oper-
Running the ve- No reverse operation (buzzer
ation
hicle sounds, pattern C)
• During closure (close) operation (at main switch ON):
Closure (open) operation
• Just after starting the mo-
tor operation
• Back door open operation
Non-reverse area • Full range of closure oper-
• Closure [open (return the latch to the neutral position)]
ation
• Driving
Switch operation during reverse op-
Receive
eration
Number of allowable reverse opera- Perform the automatic open/close temporary stop function after 2 reverse operations re-
tions gardless of the operation direction
DLK-70
DLK
JMKIB3730GB
P
DLK-71
JMKIB3725GB
DLK-72
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000010869004
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode Function Description
Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.
D
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. E
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification. F
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item H
Diagnosis mode
System Sub system selection item
Work Support Data Monitor Active Test
I
Door lock DOOR LOCK × ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × × J
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
Interior room lamp control INT LAMP ×
DLK
Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × ×
— AIR CONDITONER* × × L
Intelligent Key system INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×
Combination switch COMB SW ×
M
Body control system BCM ×
NVIS - NATS IMMU ×
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × N
Back door open TRUNK ×
Vehicle security THEFT ALM × ×
RAP RETAINED PWR × O
Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × ×
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×
P
NOTE:
*: This item is displayed, but not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
DLK-73
CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description

BATTERY VOLTAGE V Battery voltage of the moment a particular DTC is detected.
VEHICLE SPEED km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected.
EXTERNAL TEMP °C External temperature of the moment a particular DTC is detected
NOTE:
VEHICLE COND —
This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item.
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK STATUS —
POWER SUPPLY
min Displays the cumulative time from the time that the battery terminal is connected.
COUNTER
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System
and Super Lock) INFOID:0000000010708057
BCM CONSULT FUNCTION

WORK SUPPORT
Monitor item Description

Anti-hijack function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
AUTO UNLOCK TYPE
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
Signature light function can be changed to operation with this mode
SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING • On: Operate
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
Monitor Item Contents

REQ SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW-BD/TR Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
DOOR SW-BK Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
DLK-74
A
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
NOTE:
KEY SW B
ACTIVE TEST
C
Test item Description
This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched D
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check super lock actuator operation
SUPER LOCK • The all door lock actuators are set when “LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are released when “UNLOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched E
This test is able to check door lock status indicator operation
DOOR LOCK IND • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation F
INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super G
Lock) INFOID:0000000010708058
WORK SUPPORT H

I
INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis
Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this
mode
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY J
• On: Operate
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
ENGINE START BY I-KEY • On: Operate DLK
NOTE:
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored L
Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec
• MODE 3: 1 minute M
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minutes
N
NOTE:
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
O
Ignition battery saver system mode can be changed to operation with this mode
IGN/ACC BATTERY SAVER • On: Operate
NOTE: P
ANSWER BACK
ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UN- NOTE:
LOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS LOCK NOTE:
UNLOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
SELF-DIAG RESULT
DLK-75
Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
Monitor Item Condition

REQ SW -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
CLUTCH SW*1 Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch interlock switch
BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off]*2 condition of stop lamp switch power supply

BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
START CLUTCH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch pedal position switch
PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1
NEUTRAL SW - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of reverse/neutral position switch
SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
STARTER RELAY - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter relay
ENGINE STATE Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states
Display the starter relay/starter control relay status signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communi-
ST/INHIRELAY-IPDM
cation
REVERSE SIGNAL - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of R position
CRANKING PERMIT - ECM Display the engine cranking permit signal from ECM via CAN communication
IS STATUS - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start system
STARTER CUT RELAY - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay signal from ECM via CAN communication
VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h]
Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) by
VEH SPEED 2
numerical value [Km/h]
IGN REQ - IPDM Display the ignition request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication
STARTER REQ - IPDM Display the starter request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication
DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of driver door status
DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger door status
DOOR STAT-RR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door RH status
DOOR STAT-RL Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door LH status
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
ID OK FLAG Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of Intelligent Key ID
PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility
NOTE:
PRMT RKE STRT
Indicates [KEY On/NOT On] condition of Intelligent Key ID and Intelligent Key is detected in-
I-KEY OK FLAG
side vehicle
PRBT ENG STRT Indicates whether or not the engine is in start prohibited status
Indicates whether or not it is in engine start possible status when Intelligent Key verification is
ID AUTHENT CANCEL TIMER
unnecessary
DLK-76
A
ACC BATTERY SAVER Indicates [On/Off] whether or not ignition battery saver is in operation
Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in cranking prohibited status due to starter motor protection
CRNK PRBT TMR
function operation
B
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in AUTO CRANKING MODE status
CRNK PRBT TME Indicates the time for changing from cranking prohibited status to cranking possible status
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates the time that AUTO CRANKING MODE operates C
CRANKING TME Indicates the cranking operation time
NOTE:
SHORT CRANK
This item is displayed, but not used D
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intel-
RKE OPE COUN1
ligent Key, the numerical value start changing
NOTE: E
RKE OPE COUN2
S/L IGN OFF POSITION Indicates [On/Off] condition of Ignition OFF signal
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 1 Indicates [Gnd/On] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit F
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit
S/L POWER OUTPUT Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
G
S/L POWER CHECK Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
ANTICIPATED POWER Indicates [On/Off] condition of anticipated power supply
S/L LOCK REQ Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit lock request signal H
S/L - BCM (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of CAN communication
S/L POWER ERROR Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply error
I
VEH SPEED ERROR (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
VEH SPEED NORMAL (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
ENGINE RUNNING (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of engine running J
S/L ID DISCORD Indicates [Correct/Incorrect] condition of ID verification
S/L ANTI-SCAN MODE Indicates [On/Off] condition of antiscan mode
DLK
S/L LOCK NOT PERMIT Indicates [Inhibition/No inhbt] condition of inhibit steering lock
S/L UNLOCK (CAN) Indicates [Finished/Unfinished] condition of steering lock unit unlock
S/L ID STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Coded/Blank] condition of registration ID L
S/L RESET STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Exit/No exit] condition of steering lock unit reset signal
S/L LO-LEVEL MALFUNC
Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of lo-level malfunction
(CAN) M
S/L LOCK POSITION (CAN) Indicates [Armed/Malf/Unlocked/Undefined] condition of lock/unlock position signal
S/L ACT MALFUNCTION (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of steering lock unit malfunction
N
S/L HI-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of hi-level malfunction
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (SPD) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (PWR) Indicates [Allowed/Forbid] condition of safety line inhibition O
S/L SENSOR POWER (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of sensor test power supply
S/L SEN TEST PERMIT (CAN) Indicates [Forbid/Authorize] condition of sensor test
S/L STAT NOT DETECT (CAN) Indicates [Ok/Undefind] condition of steering lock undefined position signal P
S/L LOCKING FINISHED (CAN) Indicates [Unfinshd/Finished] condition of steering lock unit lock status signal
STOP/START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start off switch
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
DLK-77
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key
RKE PBD Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door open request signal from Intelligent Key
NOTE:
KEY SW
NOTE:
IGN SW
NOTE:
START SW
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models.

*2: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.
ACTIVE TEST

This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation
OUTSIDE BUZZER • On: Operate
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation
• Buzzer 1: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipi...) when CONSULT screen is touched
• Buzzer 2: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipi-pipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
INSIDE BUZZER touched
• Buzzer 3: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipipi-pipipipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
touched
This test is able to check warning lamp operation
• KEY ON: [Intelligent Key system malfunction] displays when CONSULT screen is touched
INDICATOR
• KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation
FLASHER
The hazard lamps are activated after “LH/RH/Off” on CONSULT screen is touched
NOTE:
HORN
This test is able to operate the blower relay in fuse block (J/B)
IGN CONT2 • On: Operates
This test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
Push-ignition switch illumination illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check BCM sends starter request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communi-
cation
• MODE 1: IGN ON, START request OFF
ENGINE START REQUEST
• MODE 2: IGN OFF, START request ON
• MODE 3: IGN ON, START request ON
NOTE:
IGNITION RELAY
This test is able to operate the starter control relay
STARTER CUT RELAY • On: Operates
NOTE:
ENGINE START
DLK-78
A
NOTE:
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR B
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to audio unit or NAVI control unit
AUTO ACC 2 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation C
NOTE:
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to ignition relay D
This test is able to check trunk/luggage room lamp operation E
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
TRUNK F
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) (With Intelligent Key System and Super
Lock) INFOID:0000000010708059
G
DATA MONITOR
NOTE: H
Monitor Item Contents I

PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch
STARTER CUT RELAY Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay
J
NOTE:
DETECTION SENSOR (BK)
VEH SPEED 1 Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter DLK
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
TR CANCEL SW
NOTE: L
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
M
BACK DOOR OPENER SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored N
DLK-79
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Function (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT) INFOID:0000000010708060
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with automatic back door control unit.

Work Support Changes the setting for system function
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by automatic back door control unit
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from automatic back door
CAN Diag Support Monitor
control unit
Data Monitor The automatic back door control unit input/output signals are displayed
Ecu Identification The automatic back door control unit part number is displayed
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
Monitor Item Description

SPINDLE SENSOR LH Indicates [Pulse] condition of encoder LH
SPINDLE LH SPEED Indicates [mm/s] condition of spindle motor LH operation speed
SPINDLE MOTOR LH DUTY Indicates [%] condition of spindle motor LH duty
Display the vehicle speed signal received from unified meter and A/C amp. by numerical
VHCL SPEED MTR
value [km/h]
Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electrical unit by numer-
VHCL SPEED ABS
ical value [km/h]
MAIN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of automatic back door main switch
AUTO BD SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of automatic back door switch
BK DOOR CL SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of automatic back door close switch
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of parking brake status from combination meter via CAN
PKB SW
communication
BACK DOOR LOCK STATUS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door lock status
OPEN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of open switch
CLOSE SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of close switch
HALF LATCH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of half latch switch
TOUCH SEN RH Indicates [ON/OFF/OPEN] condition of touch sensor RH
TOUCH SEN LH Indicates [ON/OFF/OPEN] condition of touch sensor LH
P RANGE IND Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P range signal from unified meter and A/C amp.
RKE REQ Indicates [OFF/MOVE/REV] condition of remote keyless entry signal from BCM
IGN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of IGN power supply
SPINDLE LH ENCODER A Indicates [LO/HI] condition of encoder signal A from encoder LH
SPINDLE LH ENCODER B Indicates [LO/HI] condition of encoder signal B from encoder LH
NOTE:
UNLOCK SEN BD
Indicates [Type 1/Type 2/Type 3/Type 4] specification of destination of the automatic back
DESTINATION door system
Normal: [Type 3] is monitored
TRANSMISSION TYPE Indicates [MT/(AT/CVT)] type of transmission
DLK-80
A
Indicates [YET/DONE] condition of [CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR PO-
AUTO BCK DR POS INITIAL
SITION INFORMATION]
Indicates [YET/DONE] condition of [ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-
AUTO BCK DR POS LEARN B
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL]
SPINDLE SENSOR RH Indicates [Pulse] condition of encoder RH
SPINDLE RH SPEED Indicates [mm/s] condition of spindle motor RH operation speed
C
SPINDLE MOTOR RH DUTY Indicates [%] condition of spindle motor RH duty
SPINDLE RH ENCODER A Indicates [LO/HI] condition of encoder signal A from encoder RH
SPINDLE RH ENCODER B Indicates [LO/HI] condition of encoder signal B from encoder RH D
NOTE:
DETECT SENSOR PWR
CLOSURE OPERATION Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door auto closure function E
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of IGN power supply from IPDM E/R via CAN communica-
IGN SW
tion
NOTE: F
DETECT SENSOR SIG 1
WORK SUPPORT G

RESET AUTO BACK DOOR STA- H
This item is able to calibration of automatic back door position information
TUS
SELF-DIAG RESULT
Refer to DLK-88, "DTC Index". I
DLK
DLK-81
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [TYPE 1]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

BCM
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000010708061
ECU Reference
BCS-53, "Reference Value"
BCS-76, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-77, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-78, "DTC Index"
DLK-82
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010708062
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL B

NOTE:
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. C
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
SPINDLE SENSOR LH Back door: Moving 0 – 1000 D
SPINDLE LH SPEED Back door: Moving 0 – 6553.5
SPINDLE MOTOR LH DUTY Back door: Moving 0 – 255
E
Equivalent to speedometer
VHCL SPEED MTR While driving
reading
VHCL SPEED ABS While driving F
reading
OFF OFF
MAIN SW Automatic back door main switch
Other than above ON
G
Release OFF
AUTO BD SW Automatic back door switch
Press ON
Release OFF H
BK DOOR CL SW Automatic back door close switch
Press ON
OFF OFF
PKB SW Parking brake I
ON ON
Lock OFF
BACK DOOR LOCK STATUS Back door lock
Unlock ON J
OFF OFF
OPEN SW Open switch
ON ON
DLK
OFF OFF
CLOSE SW Close switch
ON ON
OFF OFF L
HALF LATCH SW Half latch switch
ON ON
Other than bellow OFF
TOUCH SEN RH Touch sensor RH M
Detect obstruction ON
TOUCH SEN LH Touch sensor LH
N
Other than P position OFF
P RANGE IND Selector lever
P position ON
Release OFF O
Press (auto open/close
RKE REQ Intelligent Key button (back door) MOVE
operation)
Press (reverse operation) REV P
Other than ON position OFF
IGN SW Ignition switch
ON position ON
Not operate No change HI or LO
SPINDLE LH ENCODER A Automatic back door
Operate Change HI or LO
DLK-83
SPINDLE LH ENCODER B Automatic back door
NOTE:
UNLOCK SEN BD The item is indicated, but OFF
not monitored
DESTINATION — TYPE3
M/T models MT
TRANSMISSION TYPE • Ignition switch: ON position
AT/CVT
• CVT models
Calibration of automatic back door Not complete YET

position information Complete DONE
Additional service when removing Not complete YET

AUTO BCK DR POS LEARN
battery negative terminal Complete DONE
SPINDLE SENSOR RH Back door: Moving 0 – 1000
SPINDLE RH SPEED Back door: Moving 0 – 6553.5
SPINDLE MOTOR RH DUTY Back door: Moving 0 – 255
SPINDLE RH ENCODER A Automatic back door
SPINDLE RH ENCODER B Automatic back door
DETECT SENSOR PWR — OFF
CLOSURE OPERATION Back door
Open operation ON
ON position ON
DETECT SENSOR SIG 1 — OFF
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JMKIB2786ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Voltage
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
(+) (–) Signal name
Output
Detect obstruc-
1 Touch sensor RH sig- 0.4 V
Ground Input Touch sensor RH tion
(LG) nal
Other than above 6.1 V
Detect obstruc-
2 Touch sensor LH sig- 0.4 V
Ground Input Touch sensor LH tion
(G) nal
DLK-84
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Voltage A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
Output
Open 12 V B
3
Ground Half latch switch signal Input Back door Fully closed/half
(SB) 0V
latch
Fully closed 0V C
5
Ground Close switch signal Input Back door
(BR) Open/half latch 12.2 V
6 Moving (auto)
Ground Encoder LH A signal Input Back door E
(W)
JMKIB2762ZZ
F
When stopped 0 V or 12 V
7 Moving (auto)
Ground Encoder LH B signal Input Back door
(L) H
JMKIB2762ZZ
When stopped 0 V or 12 V I
8 Moving (auto)
Ground Encoder RH A signal Input Back door
(R)
DLK
JMKIB2762ZZ
L
M
9 Moving (auto)
Ground Encoder RH B signal Input Back door
(SB)
N
JMKIB2762ZZ
10 Automatic back door Automatic back ON 12.2 V O

Ground Input
(BG) main switch door main switch OFF 0V
Closure opera-
11 0V P
Ground Open switch signal Input Back door tion
(V)
12 Input/
Ground CAN - L — —
(P) Output
13
Ground Touch sensor ground Input — 0V
(GR)
DLK-85
Terminal No.
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
Output
16
Ground Ground Input — 0V
(B)
19 Encoder LH power
Ground Output — 12.7 V
(V) supply
20 Encoder RH power
(P) supply
21
Ground Encoder ground — — 0V
(G)
22 Automatic back door Automatic back Pressed 12.6 V

Ground Input
(LG) switch door switch Released 0V

Ground Input
(W) close switch door close switch Released 0V
24 Input/
Ground CAN - H — —
(L) Output
25
Ground Power supply (BAT) Input — 13.6 V
(W)
Auto open opera-
12 V
tion
27 Spindle motor LH
Ground Output Spindle motor LH
(BR) (open) Auto close opera-
tion
JMKIB2776ZZ
Auto open opera-

12 V
tion
29 Spindle motor RH
Ground Output Spindle motor RH
tion
JMKIB2776ZZ
Closure opera-
31 Back door closure mo- 13 V
Ground Output Back door tion
(L) tor (open)
Other than above 0V
32
Ground Ground — — 0V
(B)
Auto open opera-

34 Spindle motor LH tion
(G) (close)
JMKIB2776ZZ
Auto close opera-

13.4 V
tion
DLK-86
Terminal No.
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
Output
35 B
Ground Ground (noise shield) — — 0V
(B)
Auto open opera-

36 Spindle motor RH tion
Ground Output Spindle motor RH D
(G) (close)
JMKIB2776ZZ
Auto close opera-

E
13.4 V
tion
F
Sounding (auto
Automatic back open/close oper-
37 Automatic back door
Ground Output door warning ation) G
(Y) warning buzzer
buzzer
JMKIB2777ZZ
H
Not sounding 0V
Closure opera-
(SB) tor (close) I
Other than above 0V
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000010708063
J
Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation

U1000 CAN COMM Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status DLK
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
Automatic back door control unit de-
B2401 IGN OPEN Inhibit automatic back door operation tects ignition switch ON signal via
L
CAN communication
tects that half latch switch changes M
B2409 HALF LATCH SW Inhibit automatic back door operation
from ON to OFF when back door ful-
ly closes
B2416 TOUCH SEN R OPEN Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status N
B2417 TOUCH SEN L OPEN Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
B2419 OPEN SW Inhibit automatic back door operation Reconnect battery
B2420 CLOSE SW Inhibit automatic back door operation Reconnect battery O
B2422 BACK DOOR STATE Inhibit automatic back door operation Half latch switch is ON from OFF
At least 180 seconds are passed af-
P
B2423 ABD MTR TIME OUT Inhibit automatic back door operation ter automatic back door operation is
inhibited
B2426 SPINDLE SENSOR LH Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
B2427 SPINDLE SENSOR RH Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
B2428 AUTO BACK DR CNT UNIT Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
B242A CLSR CONDITION Inhibit automatic back door operation Reconnect battery
DLK-87
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010708064
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority DTC
• B2428 AUTO BK DR CNT UNIT
• U1000 CAN COMM
1
• U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• B2401 IGN OPEN
• B2409 HALF LATCH SW
• B2416 TOUCH SEN R OPEN
• B2417 TOUCH SEN L OPEN
• B2419 OPEN SW
• B2420 CLOSE SW
2
• B2422 BACK DOOR STATE
• B2423 ABD MTR TIME OUT
• B2426 SPINDLE SENSOR LH
• B2427 SPINDLE SENSOR RH
• B242A CLSR CONDITION
DTC Index INFOID:0000000010708065
NOTE:
Details of time display
• 1 - 39: Displayed if any previous malfunction is present when current condition is normal. It increases like 1
→ 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. The counter
remains at 39 even if the number of cycles exceeds it. It is counted from 1 again when turning ignition switch
OFF → ON after returning to the normal condition if the malfunction is detected again.
CONSULT display Fail-safe Reference page

U1000: CAN COMM × DLK-155
U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN) × DLK-156
B2401: IGN OPEN × DLK-118
B2409: HALF LATCH SW × DLK-120
B2416: TOUCH SEN R OPEN × DLK-123
B2417: TOUCH SEN L OPEN × DLK-126
B2419: OPEN SW × DLK-129
B2420: CLOSE SW × DLK-132
B2422: BACK DOOR STATE × DLK-134
B2423: ABD MTR TIME OUT × DLK-137
B2426: SPINDLE SENSOR LH × DLK-139
B2427: SPINDLE SENSOR RH × DLK-142
B2428: AUTO BACK DR CNT UNIT × DLK-145
B242A: CLSR CONDITION × DLK-146
DLK-88
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 1]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010708066
B
DLK
JRKWD4418GB
DLK-89
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4419GB
DLK-90
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4420GB
DLK-91
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4421GB
DLK-92
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4422GB
DLK-93
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4423GB
DLK-94
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4424GB
DLK-95
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4425GB
DLK-96
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4426GB
DLK-97
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4427GB
DLK-98
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4428GB
DLK-99
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4429GB
DLK-100
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4430GB
DLK-101
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4431GB
DLK-102
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
A
DLK
P
JRKWD4432GB
DLK-103
JRKWD4433GB
DLK-104
DLK
JRKWD4434GB
DLK-105
JRKWD4435GB
DLK-106
DLK
JRKWD4436GB
DLK-107
JRKWD4437GB
DLK-108
DLK
JRKWD4438GB
DLK-109
JRKWD4439GB
DLK-110
DLK
JRKWD4440GB
DLK-111
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [TYPE 1]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010708068
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-112
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM A

1. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
2. Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC C
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (print them out using CONSULT). D
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. E
Are any symptoms described or any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed>>GO TO 4. F
Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Confirm the symptom described by the customer. G
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
H
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM I
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
J
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected DLK
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-77, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM) or DLK-88,
"DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (automatic back door control unit), and determine trouble diagnosis order. L
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
M
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". O
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step P
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
IS the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CON-
SULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
DLK-113
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check according to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check for DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is completely repaired.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.
DLK-114
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMI-
A
NAL
Description INFOID:0000000010708069
B
When the battery is disconnected from the negative terminal, it is necessary to perform initial setting to oper-
ate automatic back door control system normally. Refer to DLK-117, "Work Procedure".
C
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010708070
1.INITIALIZATION
D
1. Fully close the back door manually. (When back door is already fully closed, this operation is not neces-
sary)
2. Perform automatic back door open/close operation of back door.
3. Check for noise or malfunctioning during operation. E
4. Check automatic back door warning buzzer operates.
NOTE:
Never touch back door, or allow foreign materials to be pinched in back door, when performing automatic back F
door open/close operation of back door, until it is in the fully closed or fully open position.
>> WORK END G
DLK
DLK-115
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CON-
TROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
CONTROL UNIT
When replacing automatic back door control unit, or removing connector terminal, it is necessary to perform
initial setting to operate automatic back door system normally. Refer to DLK-116, "Work Procedure".
1.STEP 1
1. Select “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT.
2. Select “RESET AUTO BACK DOOR STATUS” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Touch “Start” to erase automatic back door position information.
>> GO TO 2.
2.STEP 2
Fully close the back door manually.
>> GO TO 3.
3.STEP 3
Operate back door opener switch and perform automatic back door open operation.
>> GO TO 4.
4.STEP 4
1. The back door fully opens.
2. Check that automatic back door warning buzzer sounds normally.
Does automatic back door warning buzzer sound normally?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
5.STEP 5
Fully close the back door.
>> WORK END
DLK-116
CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR POSITION INFORMATION
A
When the following work is performed, it is necessary to perform initial setting of automatic back door position B
information to operate automatic back door system.
• After removing and installing, or replacing automatic back door control unit
• After removing and installing, or replacing back door assembly
• After removing and installing, or replacing spindle unit C
D
1.STEP 1
2. Select “RESET AUTO BACK DOOR STATUS” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode. E
>> GO TO 2. F
2.STEP 2
G
>> GO TO 3.
3.STEP 3 H
Operate back door opener switch and perform automatic open operation.
>> GO TO 4. I
4.STEP 4
1. The back door fully opens. J
YES >> GO TO 5. DLK
NO >> GO TO 2.
5.STEP 5
L
>> WORK END M
DLK-117
B2401 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010708075
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen items (Trou-

DTC No. DTC detecting condition
ble diagnosis content)
IGN OPEN Automatic back door control unit cannot detect ignition switch ON signal
B2401
(Ignition open) via CAN communication with BCM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• CAN communication system
• BCM
• Automatic back door control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Inhibit automatic back door operation
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Operate automatic back door.
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-118, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708076
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC B2401 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000 or
U1010.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> U1000: Refer to DLK-155, "DTC Description". U1010: Refer to DLK-156, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF BCM AND IPDM E/R
Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” and “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index" (BCM) or PCS-38, "DTC Index" (IPDM E/R).
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
3. Select “IGN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Status
Ignition switch (automatic back ON ON

IGN SW
door control unit judgment) OFF OFF
DLK-118
A
Ignition switch (IPDM E/R judg- ON ON
IGN SW
ment) OFF OFF
Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO-1 >> Automatic back door control unit NG: Replace automatic back door control unit, refer to DLK-327,
"Removal and Installation". C
NO-2 >> IPDM E/R NG: Replace BCM, refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". D
>> INSPECTION END

E
DLK
DLK-119
B2409 HALF LATCH SWITCH
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

HALF LATCH SW Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of half latch switch
B2409
(Half latch switch) during automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Entry of foreign materials to back door lock assembly
• Back door mechanism
• Half latch switch
• Harness or connectors (half latch switch circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?
1.CHECK FOR FOREIGN MATERIALS IN BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY

Check for entry of foreign materials in back door lock assembly.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Remove foreign materials.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION
Manually check open and close operation of back door.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
3.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH MONITOR ITEM
3. Select “HALF LATCH SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Fully closed OFF
HALF LATCH SW Back door
Open ON
YES >> GO TO 7.
DLK-120
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect back door lock assembly connector.
B
3. Check voltage between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.
(+)
Back door lock assembly (–)
Voltage C
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D172 6 Ground 12 V D
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5. E
5.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit connector.
F
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and back door lock assem-
bly harness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Back door lock assembly G

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B24 3 D172 6 Existed
H
3. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and ground.
I
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B24 3 Not existed J
YES >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-327, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness. DLK
6.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground. L
Back door lock assembly

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground M
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7. N
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT O
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
YES >> GO TO 8. P
8.REPLACE BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY
1. Replace back door lock assembly. Refer to DLK-312, "DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation".
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC 2409. Refer to DLK-120, "DTC Description".
DLK-121
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-327, "Removal and Installation".
DLK-122
B2416 TOUCH SENSOR RH
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

ble diagnosis content) C
TOUCH SEN R OPEN Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of touch sensor RH
B2416
(Touch sensor right open) during automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Improper installation of touch sensor
• Touch sensor RH
• Harness or connectors (touch sensor circuit is open or shorted) E
FAIL-SAFE
Inhibit automatic back door operation F

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
Is DTC detected? H
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END I
J
1.CHECK INSTALLATION OF TOUCH SENSOR RH
Check that touch sensor RH is installed normally.
Refer to DLK-315, "TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation". DLK
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-315, "TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation". L
2.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR MONITOR ITEM
2. Select “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT. M
3. Select “TOUCH SEN RH” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
N
Other than below OFF
TOUCH SEN RH Touch sensor RH
Detect obstruction ON O
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3. P
3.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

2. Check voltage between touch sensor RH harness connector and automatic back door control unit harness
connector.
DLK-123
(+)
Voltage
Touch sensor RH (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D175 1 Ground 6.1 V
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR RH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and touch sensor RH connector.
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and touch sensor RH har-
ness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Touch sensor RH

Continuity

Continuity
B24 1 Not existed
5.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR RH GROND CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and each touch sensor connector.
ness connector.

Continuity

Continuity
B24 13 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR RH
Refer to DLK-125, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace touch sensor RH.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-124
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010708081
A
2. Disconnect touch sensor RH connector. B
3. Check resistance between touch sensor RH terminals.
Touch sensor RH Resistance C

Condition
Terminal (Approx.)
Detect obstruction 380 – 420 kΩ

1 2 Touch sensor RH D
Other than above 0.95 – 1.05 kΩ
YES >> INSPECTION END E
DLK
DLK-125
B2417 TOUCH SENSOR LH
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TOUCH SEN L OPEN Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of touch sensor LH
B2417
(Touch sensor left open) during automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Touch sensor LH
• Harness or connectors (touch sensor circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?
1.CHECK INSTALLATION OF TOUCH SENSOR LH

Check that touch sensor LH is installed normally.
Refer to DLK-315, "TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-315, "TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Select “TOUCH SEN LH” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2. Check voltage between touch sensor LH harness connector and automatic back door control unit harness
connector.
DLK-126
(+) A
Voltage
Touch sensor LH (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D174 1 Ground 6.1 V
B

YES >> GO TO 5. C
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR LH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and touch sensor LH connector. D
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and touch sensor LH har-
ness connector.
E
Automatic back door control unit Touch sensor LH
Continuity
B24 2 D174 1 Existed F
Automatic back door control unit G

Continuity
B24 2 Not existed
H
NO >> Repair or replace harness. I
5.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR LH GROND CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and touch sensor LH har- J
ness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Touch sensor LH DLK

Continuity
L

Continuity M
B24 13 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR LH O

P
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace touch sensor LH.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-127
1.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR LH

2. Disconnect touch sensor LH connector.
3. Check resistance between touch sensor LH terminals.
Touch sensor LH Resistance

Condition
Terminal (Approx.)

1 2 Touch sensor LH
DLK-128
B2419 OPEN SWITCH
B2419 OPEN SWITCH
A

OPEN SW Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of open switch dur-
B2419
(Open switch) ing automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Open switch E
• Harness or connectors (open switch circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE F
G
2. Operate automatic back door. H
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-129, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J

DLK
YES >> GO TO 2. L
Manually check open and close operation of back door. M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. N
3.CHECK OPEN SWITCH SIGNAL
1. Select “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT. O
2. Select “OPEN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

P
Closure operation ON
OPEN SW Back door
Other than above OFF
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
DLK-129
B2419 OPEN SWITCH
4.CHECK OPEN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D172 4 Ground 12.2 V
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK OPEN SWITCH CIRCUIT
Automatic back door control unit Back door lock assembly

Continuity

Continuity
B24 11 Not existed
6.CHECK OPEN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 8.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC 2419.
Refer to DLK-129, "DTC Description".
DLK-130
B2419 OPEN SWITCH
NO >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-327, "Removal and Installation". A
DLK
DLK-131
B2420 CLOSE SWITCH
B2420 CLOSE SWITCH
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CLOSE SW Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of close switch dur-
B2420
(Close switch) ing automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Close switch
• Harness or connectors (close switch circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK CLOSE SWITCH SIGNAL
2. Select “CLOSE SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

CLOSE SW Back door
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CLOSE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
DLK-132
B2420 CLOSE SWITCH
2. Disconnect back door lock assembly connector. A
(+)
B
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D172 5 Ground 12.2 V C
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5. D
5.CHECK CLOSE SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit connector. E
F
Continuity
B24 5 D172 5 Existed G
H
Continuity
B24 5 Not existed
I

YES >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-327, "Removal and Installation". J
6.CHECK CLOSE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground. DLK

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground L
D172 8 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N
YES >> GO TO 8. O
8.REPLACE BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY P
2. Erase DTC.
DLK-133
B2422 BACK DOOR STATE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

BACK DOOR STATE When the automatic back door control unit detects back door position mal-
B2422
(Back door state) function according to the pulse signal
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Improper installation of back door assembly
• [CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR POSITION INFORMATION]: not complete
• Encoder
• Harness or connectors (encoder circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?
1.CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR POSITION INFORMATION

1. Perform initialization setting of automatic back door position information.
Refer to DLK-117, "Work Procedure".
2. Erase DTC, and then repeat “PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END
2.CHECK INSTALLATION OF BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY
1. Check that back door assembly is installed normally.
Refer to DLK-293, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
2. Check back door assembly mechanism deformation, looseness, rattle, interference with other parts, and
pinched foreign materials.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL
3. Select “SPINDLE SENSOR LH” and “SPINDLE SENSOR RH” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
DLK-134
Monitor item Status A

SPINDLE SENSOR LH 0 – 1000
SPINDLE SENSOR RH 0 – 1000
B
Is the difference between the 2 monitor items 10 or more?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY
2. Disconnect spindle unit connector. D
3. Check voltage between spindle unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
E
Voltage
Spindle unit (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
LH B38 12.7 V F
3 Ground
RH B29 12.3 V
G
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT H
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and spindle unit harness
connector. I
Automatic back door control unit Spindle unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal J
19 LH B38
B24 3 Existed
20 RH B29
DLK

L
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
19
B24 Not existed M
20
YES >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-327, "Removal and Installation". N
6.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT 2
O
connector.
P
Continuity
LH B38
B24 21 6 Existed
RH B29
DLK-135

Continuity
B24 21 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
DLK-136
B2423 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MOTOR OPERATION TIME
A
CONSULT screen items (Trouble di-

agnosis content) C
ABD MTR TIME OUT
When the automatic back door control unit and spindle motor operate
B2423 (Automatic back door motor time
in the same direction for 180 seconds or more continuously
out)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Spindle motor
• Harness or connectors (circuit is shorted) E
FAIL-SAFE
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT. H
Is DTC detected?
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". I
J
1.ERASE DTC
1. At least 180 seconds are passed after automatic back door operation is inhibited.
DLK
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK SPINDLE MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and spindle unit connector.
connector. N

Continuity
O
27 1
LH B38
34 2
B25 Existed
29 1 P
RH B29
36 2
DLK-137

Continuity
Connector Terminal
27
Ground
29
B25 Not existed
34
36
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE SPINDLE UNIT LH
1. Replace spindle unit LH.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE SPINDLE UNIT RH
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT
1. Replace automatic back door unit.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
DLK-138
B2426 ENCODER
B2426 ENCODER
A

SPINDLE SENSOR LH When the automatic back door control unit can not receive the pulse signal
B2426
(Spindle sensor left handle) from the encoder just after starting the open/close operation
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Back door mechanism E
• Encoder
F
FAIL-SAFE
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
Is DTC detected? I
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END J
1.CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR POSITION INFORMATION DLK

2. Erase DTC, and then repeat “PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. L
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END M
1. Check that back door assembly is installed normally. N
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
P
3. Select “SPINDLE LH ENCODER A” and “SPINDLE LH ENCODER B” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
DLK-139
B2426 ENCODER

Moving (auto or manu-
HI ⇔ LO
SPINDLE LH ENCODER A al)
When stopped HI or LO
Back door
HI ⇔ LO
SPINDLE LH ENCODER B al)
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2. Disconnect spindle unit LH connector.
3. Check voltage between spindle unit LH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Spindle unit LH (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B38 3 Ground 12.7 V
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and spindle unit LH har-
ness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Spindle unit LH

Continuity
B24 19 B38 3 Existed

Continuity
B24 19 Not existed
ness connector.

Continuity
DLK-140
B2426 ENCODER
Automatic back door control unit A

Continuity
B24 21 Not existed
B
YES >> GO TO 7.
C
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.REPLACE SPINDLE UNIT E
1. Replace spindle unit

2. Erase DTC.
F
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure for DTC 2426. Refer to DLK-139, "DTC Description".
G
DLK
DLK-141
B2427 ENCODER
B2427 ENCODER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SPINDLE SENSOR RH When the automatic back door control unit can not receive the pulse signal
B2427
(Spindle sensor right handle) from the encoder just after starting the open/close operation
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Encoder
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?

Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. Select “SPINDLE RH ENCODER A” and “SPINDLE RH ENCODER B” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
DLK-142
B2427 ENCODER
Monitor item Condition Status A

HI ⇔ LO
SPINDLE RH ENCODER A al)
When stopped HI or LO B
Back door
HI ⇔ LO
SPINDLE RH ENCODER B al)
When stopped HI or LO C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-327, "Removal and Installation". D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect spindle unit RH connector.
3. Check voltage between spindle unit RH harness connector and ground.
F
(+)
Voltage
Spindle unit RH (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal G
B29 3 Ground 12.3 V
H
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT I
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and spindle unit RH har-
ness connector. J
Automatic back door control unit Spindle unit RH
Continuity
DLK
L

Continuity
B24 20 Not existed
N
6.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT 2 O
ness connector. P

Continuity
DLK-143
B2427 ENCODER

Continuity
B24 21 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.REPLACE SPINDLE UNIT
2. Erase DTC.
DLK-144
B2428 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT
A

AUTO BACK DR CNT UNIT
B2428 Automatic back door control unit detected CPU malfunction
(Auto back door control unit)
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
FAIL-SAFE E
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

G
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-145, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I

When DTC B2428 is detected, replace automatic back door control unit. J
>> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-327, "Removal and Installation".
DLK
DLK-145
B242A CLOSURE CONDITION
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CLSR CONDITION Automatic back door control unit detects malfunctions of open switch,
B242A
(Closure condition) close switch and half latch switch when auto closure of back door operates
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Close switch
• Open switch
• Harness or connectors (open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
2. Operate back door auto closure operation.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MONITOR ITEM
3. Select “HALF LATCH SW”, “OPEN SW” and “CLOSE SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
DLK-146

Fully closed OFF
HALF LATCH SW
Open ON
B
OPEN SW Back door
Closure operation ON C
CLOSE SW
YES >> GO TO 7. D
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL E
F
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.) G
Connector Terminal
4 12.2 V
D172 5 Ground 12.2 V H
6 12 V
I
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SWITCH CIRCUIT J
bly harness connector. DLK

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal L
3 6
11 4 M
N
Continuity
Connector Terminal
O
3 Ground
B24 5 Not existed
11 P
6.CHECK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
DLK-147

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace back door lock assembly ground circuit.
YES >> GO TO 8.
1. Replace back door lock assembly.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure for DTC 242A. Refer to DLK-146, "DTC Description".
YES >> INSPECTION END.
DLK-148
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
A

INSIDE ANTENNA An excessive high or low voltage from inside key antenna (instrument cen-
B2621–00
(Inside antenna) ter) is sent to BCM.
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• BCM
• Inside key antenna (instrument center)
• Harness or connector [inside key antenna (instrument center) circuit is open or shorted] E
FAIL-SAFE
–
F
G
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT
KEY”. H
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected?
J
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1

DLK
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.
DLK-149
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area
JMMIA1652GB
116
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area
Ignition switch JMMIA1653GB

M86 Ground ON and any
door is open
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area
JSMIA1348GB
117
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area
JSMIA1406GB

YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) harness
connector.
BCM Inside key antenna (instrument center)

Continuity
116 2
M86 M17 Existed
117 1
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
116
M86 Not existed
117
DLK-150
Is the inspection result normal? A

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 B
1. Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
C
(+)
Signal D
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detec- F
tion area
116
JMMIA1652GB
G
When Intelligent H
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area
I
door is open
J
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area DLK
JSMIA1348GB
117 L
When Intelligent
Key is in the an- M
tenna detection
area
JSMIA1406GB
N

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). O
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".
DLK-151
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen terms

(Trouble diagnosis content)
INSIDE ANTENNA An excessive high or low voltage from inside key antenna (luggage room)
B2622–00
(Inside antenna) is sent to BCM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• BCM
• Inside key antenna (luggage room)
• Harness or connector [inside key antenna (luggage room) circuit is open or shorted]
FAIL-SAFE
–
KEY”.

2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
DLK-152
(+) A
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
B
When Intelli-
gent Key is not C
in the antenna
detection area
JMMIA1652GB
D
22
When Intelli-
E
gent Key is in
the antenna
detection area F
B47 Ground ON and any
door is open G
When Intelli-
gent Key is not
in the antenna H
detection area
JSMIA1507GB
23 I
When Intelli- J
gent Key is in
the antenna
detection area
DLK
JSMIA1506GB

YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". L
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT M
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) harness con-
nector. N
BCM Inside key antenna (luggage room)

Continuity O
22 2
B47 B35 Existed
23 1
P
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
22
B47 Not existed
23
DLK-153

YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace inside key antenna (luggage room). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelli-
gent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
JMMIA1652GB
22
When Intelli-
gent Key is in
the antenna
detection area

door is open
When Intelli-
gent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
JSMIA1507GB
23
When Intelli-
gent Key is in
the antenna
detection area
JSMIA1506GB

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (luggage room).
DLK-154
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul- B
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less C
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-41, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica-
tion Signal Chart". D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen items E

CAN COMM When automatic back door control unit cannot communicate CAN com-
U1000
(CAN communication) munication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more. F
POSSIBLE CAUSE
G
FAIL-SAFE
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. I
2. Turn the ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AUTO BACK DOOR”.
s DTC “U1000” displayed? J
DLK
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC L

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AUTO BACK DOOR”. M
s DTC “U1000” displayed?
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". N
DLK-155
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen items

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Automatic back door control unit detected internal CAN communica-
U1010
[Control unit (CAN)] tion circuit malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace automatic back door control unit.
DLK-156
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010708111
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “BK DOOR CL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
Pressed ON
Released OFF
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> Automatic back door close switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL G

2. Disconnect automatic back door close switch connector.
3. Check voltage between automatic back door close switch harness connector and ground. H
(+)
Voltage
Automatic back door close switch (–)
(Approx.) I
Connector Terminal
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and automatic back door L
close switch harness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Automatic back door close switch
Continuity M
3. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and ground. N

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground O
B24 23 Not existed
P
3.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between automatic back door close switch harness connector and ground.
DLK-157

Continuity
D173 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace automatic back door close switch.
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check continuity between automatic back door close switch terminals.

Condition Continuity
Terminal
Automatic back door Pressed Existed

1 2
close switch Released Not existed
DLK-158
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “AUTO BD SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
Pressed ON
Released OFF
YES >> Automatic back door switch is OK.
F
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL G

2. Disconnect automatic back door switch connector.
3. Check voltage between automatic back door switch harness connector and ground. H
(+)
Voltage
Automatic back door switch (–)
(Approx.) I
Connector Terminal
M58 1 Ground 12.6 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
switch harness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Automatic back door switch

Continuity M
B24 22 M58 1 Existed

Continuity
B24 22 Not existed
P
3.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between automatic back door switch harness connector and ground.
DLK-159

Continuity
M58 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace automatic back door switch.
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check continuity between automatic back door switch terminals.

Terminal
Pressed Existed
1 2 Automatic back door switch
Released Not existed
DLK-160
AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “MAIN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
ON ON
MAIN SW Automatic door main switch
OFF OFF
YES >> Automatic door main switch is OK.
F
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL G

2. Disconnect automatic back door main switch connector.
3. Check voltage between automatic back door main switch harness connector and ground. H
(+)
Voltage
Automatic back door main switch (–)
(Approx.) I
Connector Terminal
M54 1 Ground 12.2 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH CIRCUIT
main switch harness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Automatic back door main switch
Continuity M
3. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit connector and ground. N

Continuity
B24 10 Not existed
P
3.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between automatic back door main switch connector and ground.
DLK-161
Automatic back door main switch

Continuity
M54 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace automatic back door main switch.
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check continuity between automatic back door main switch terminals.

Terminal
Automatic back door ON Existed

1 3
main switch OFF Not existed
DLK-162
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZER
A
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT B

2. Disconnect automatic back door warning buzzer connector.
3. Check voltage between automatic back door warning buzzer harness connector and ground. C
(+)
Voltage
Automatic back door warning buzzer (–)
(Approx.)
D
Connector Terminal
B28 1 Ground 12 V
E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
F
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and automatic back door G
warning buzzer harness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Automatic back door warning buzzer H
Continuity
3. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and ground. I

Continuity J
B25 37 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? DLK
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT L
Check continuity between automatic back door warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
Automatic back door warning buzzer M

Continuity
B28 2 Existed
N
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. O
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident"
Is the inspection result normal? P
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZER

DLK-163
3. Check battery power supply directly to automatic back door warning buzzer terminals and check the oper-
ation.

Terminal Operation
(+) (-)
1 2 Buzzer sounds
NO >> Replace automatic back door warning buzzer.
DLK-164
BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR
A
1.CHECK BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL B

3. Turn ignition switch ON. C
(+)
D
Voltage
Back door lock assembly (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Closure operation 13 V E
1
Back door closure Other than above 0V
D172 Ground
motor Closure operation 13 V
2 F
Other than above 0V
YES >> GO TO 3. G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR CIRCUIT
H
I
Continuity
J
31 1
B25 D172 Existed
38 2
3. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and ground. DLK

Continuity
Connector Terminal L
Ground
31
B25 Not existed
38
M
N
O
>> INCPECTION END
DLK-165
BACK DOOR SWITCH
BACK DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
3. Select “DOOR SW-BK” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Open On
DOOR SW-BK Back door
Closed Off
YES >> Back door switch is OK.
1.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

3. Check signal between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
Back door lock assembly (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
D172 7 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Back door lock assembly BCM

Continuity
D172 7 B47 11 Existed
3. Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.

Continuity
D172 7 Not existed
3.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
DLK-166
BACK DOOR SWITCH
Back door lock assembly A

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace back door lock assembly.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
3. Check continuity between back door lock assembly terminals.
Back door lock assembly I

Terminal
Lock Existed
7 8 Back door lock J
Unlock Not existed
YES >> INSPECTION END DLK
DLK-167
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “TRUNK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
3. Select “BACK DOOR OPENER SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
BACK DOOR OPENER Pressed ON

SW Released OFF
YES >> Back door opener switch is OK.
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPEN INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect back door opener switch assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between back door opener switch assembly harness connector and ground.
(+)
Back door opener switch assembly (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
D169 1 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door opener switch assembly harness con-
nector.
BCM Back door opener switch assembly

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
B47 16 Not existed
3.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door opener switch assembly harness connector and ground.
DLK-168
Back door opener switch assembly A

Continuity
D169 2 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace back door opener switch assembly.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
3. Check continuity between back door opener switch assembly terminals.
Back door opener switch assembly I

Terminal
Back door opener Pressed Existed

1 2 J
switch Released Not existed
DLK-169
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Transmits lock/unlock operation to BCM.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “REQ SW BD/TR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Pressed ON
REQ SW -BD/TR Back door request switch
Released OFF
YES >> Back door request switch is OK.

(+)
Connector Terminal
D169 4 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
nector.

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
B47 6 Not existed
3.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
DLK-170
A
Back door opener switch assembly
Continuity
D169 3 Existed B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Refer to DLK-171, "Component Inspection". D
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace back door opener switch assembly. E
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". F
>> INSPECTION END

G

H
3. Check back door opener switch assembly terminals.
I
Terminal
J
Pressed Existed
4 3 Back door opener request switch
Is the inspection result normal? DLK
L
DLK-171
CLOSE SWITCH
CLOSE SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION

CLOSE SW Back door
YES >> Close switch is OK.

(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity

Continuity
B24 5 Not existed
DLK-172
CLOSE SWITCH

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
DLK-173
COMBINATION METER BUZZER
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “INSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Buzzer 1”, “Buzzer 2” or “Buzzer 3” to check that it works normally.
Yes >> Combination meter buzzer is OK.
No >> Refer to DLK-174, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK METER BUZZER CIRCUIT

Refer to WCS-54, "Component Function Check".
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace harness.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-174
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010708141
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT. C
3. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-175, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
E
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708142
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL F

2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
G
(+)
Front door lock assembly
(–) Condition Voltage H
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
4 Lock I
D35 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V
5 Unlock
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side). J
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT DLK
1. Disconnect BCM and front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.
L
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
M
141 4
M85 D35 Existed
148 5
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. N
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal O
Ground
141
M85 Not existed
148
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
DLK-175
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+)
BCM (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
141 Lock
M85 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V
148 Unlock
YES >> Check for internal short of front door lock actuator.
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010708143
1.CHECK FUNCTION
NO >> Refer to DLK-176, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708144
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
(–) Condition Voltage
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (passenger side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM and front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (passenger side) har-
ness connector.
BCM Front door lock assembly (passenger side)

Continuity
139 2
M85 D73 Existed
141 3
DLK-176
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M85 Not existed B
141
YES >> GO TO 3. C
1. Connect BCM connector. D
(+) E
Connector Terminal
139 Unlock
F
141 Lock
Is the inspection result normal? G
REAR LH H
REAR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010708145
1.CHECK FUNCTION I

2. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT. J
DLK
NO >> Refer to DLK-177, "REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708146 L

2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly LH harness connector and ground.
N
(+)
Rear door lock assembly LH (–) Condition Voltage
2 Unlock
3 Lock
P
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and rear door lock assembly RH connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly LH harness connector.
DLK-177
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM Rear door lock assembly LH

Continuity
124 2
B46 D118 Existed
125 3
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B46 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
B46 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V
125 Lock
YES >> Check for internal short of rear door lock actuator.
REAR RH
REAR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010708147
1.CHECK FUNCTION
NO >> Refer to DLK-178, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708148

2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear door lock assembly RH (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
4 Lock
5 Unlock
DLK-178
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly RH. A
NO >> GO TO 2.
B
1. Disconnect BCM connector and rear door lock assembly LH connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly RH harness connector.
BCM Rear door lock assembly RH C

Continuity
124 5
B46 D99 Existed D
125 4
E
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124 F
B46 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL H
I
(+)
Connector Terminal J
124 Unlock
125 Lock
DLK
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". L
DLK-179
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

LOCK ON
CDL LOCK SW
Door lock and unlock switch UNLOCK OFF
(driver door) LOCK OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK ON
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch (driver door) is OK.
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect power window main switch connector.
3. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Power window main switch (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
3
D25 Ground 9 – 16 V
15
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM and front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
BCM Power window main switch

Continuity
50 3
M87 D25 Existed
80 15
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M87 Not existed
80
DLK-180
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-74, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH :
Removal and Installation".
C
PASSENGER SIDE
D
1.CHECK FUNCTION
E
F
LOCK ON
CDL LOCK SW G
(passenger door) LOCK OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK ON H
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch (passenger door) is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-181, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". I
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION J

2. Check door lock/unlock using driver side door lock and unlock switch operation.
DLK
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
2. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. M
3. Check voltage between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
N
Front power window switch (passenger side) (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
1 O
2
P
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
1. Disconnect BCM and power window main switch connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) har-
ness connector.
DLK-181
BCM Front power window switch (passenger side)

Continuity
50 1
M87 D67 Existed
80 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M87 Not existed
80
YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-74, "FRONT POWER WIN-
DOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Removal and Installation".
DLK-182
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
2. Select “DOOR LOCK IND” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C
Monitor item Status

ON Turns ON D
DOOR LOCK IND Door lock status indicator
OFF Turns OFF
E
YES >> Door lock status indicator is OK.
F
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect indicator unit connector.
3. Check voltage between indicator unit harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
Indicator unit (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal I
M92 5 Ground 9 – 16 V
J
YES >> Replace indicator unit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR CIRCUIT DLK
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and indicator unit harness connector.
L
BCM Indicator unit
Continuity
M86 111 M92 5 Existed M
BCM N
Continuity
M86 111 Not existed
O
NO >> Repair or replace harness. P
DLK-183
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “REQ SW-DR”, “REQ SW-AS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Pressed ON
REQ SW -DR Driver side door request switch
Released OFF
Pressed ON
REQ SW -AS Passenger side door request switch
Released OFF
YES >> Front door request switch is OK.
1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door outside handle assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between malfunctioning front door outside handle assembly harness connector and
ground.
(+)
Front door outside handle assembly (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
Driver side D15
Passenger 3 Ground 9 – 16 V
D11
side
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door outside handle assembly harness connector and
BCM harness connector.
Front door outside handle assembly BCM

Continuity
Driver side D15 105
3 M86 Existed
Passenger side D11 82
ground.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
105
M86 Not existed
82
DLK-184
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". A
3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
B
Check continuity between malfunctioning front door outside handle assembly harness connector and ground.
Front door outside handle assembly

Continuity C
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D15
4 Existed
Passenger side D11 D
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. E
4.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Refer to DLK-185, "Component Inspection". F
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace front door outside handle grip. G
H
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010708153 I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front outside handle assembly connector.
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly terminals.
DLK
Front outside handle assembly
Terminal
Pressed Existed L
3 4 Door request switch
NO >> Replace front outside handle grip.
N
DLK-185
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”, “DOOR SW-RL” and “DOOR SW-RR” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.

Open ON
DOOR SW-DR Driver side door
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-AS Passenger side door
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RR Rear door RH
Closed OFF
YES >> Door switch is OK.
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check voltage between malfunctioning door switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
Door switch (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
Driver side B34
Passenger side B27
3 Ground 9 – 16 V
Rear LH B71
Rear RH B53
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Door switch BCM

Continuity
Driver side B34 17
Passenger side B27 13
3 B47 Existed
Rear LH B71 12
Rear RH B53 10
DLK-186
DOOR SWITCH
3. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and ground.
A
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B34 B
Ground
Passenger side B27
3 Not existed
Rear LH B71
C
Rear RH B53
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". D
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
E
YES >> GO TO 4. F
NO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch.
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". G
>> INSPECTION END

H
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH I

3. Check continuity between door switch terminals. J
Door switch
Terminal DLK
Pressed Not existed
Driver side
Released Existed
L
Pressed Not existed
Passenger side
Ground part of door Released Existed
3 Door switch
switch Pressed Not existed
Rear LH M
Released Existed
Pressed Not existed
Rear RH
Released Existed N
O
NO >> Replace malfunction door switch.
DLK-187
HALF LATCH SWITCH
HALF LATCH SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Fully closed OFF
Open ON
YES >> Half latch switch is OK.
1.CHECK HALF LATCH INPUT SIGNAL

(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D172 6 Ground 12 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity

Continuity
B24 3 Not existed
DLK-188
HALF LATCH SWITCH

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
DLK-189
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “FLASHER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “LH” or “RH” to check that it works normally.
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
1.CHECK HAZARD OPERATION

Refer to EXL-36, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EXL-176, "Symptom Table".
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-190
INFORMATION DISPLAY
INFORMATION DISPLAY
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “INDICATOR” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. C
4. Touch “KEY ON” or “KEY IND” to check that it works normally.
YES >> Information display is OK. D
E
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Refer to MWI-84, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. G
H
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
DLK-191
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

Check by connecting a resistance (approximately 300 Ω) so that the
current value becomes about 10 mA. Refer to DLK-325, "Removal
and Installation".
Standard : Approx. 2.5 - 3.0 V

Is the measurement value within the specification?
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery.
OCC0607D
DLK-192
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “OUTSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. C
4. Touch “On” to check that it works normally.
YES >> Intelligent Key warning buzzer is OK. D
E
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
F
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer connector.
3. Check voltage between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
(+) G
Intelligent Key warning buzzer (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
H
E25 1 Ground Buzzer ON 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3. I
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER CIRCUIT
J
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector.
BCM Intelligent Key warning buzzer DLK

Continuity
E23 164 E25 1 Existed
L
BCM
Continuity M
E23 164 Not existed
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER O
Check continuity between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
P
Intelligent Key warning buzzer
Continuity
E25 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
DLK-193

YES >> Replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts
DLK-194
OPEN SWITCH
OPEN SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “OPEN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
OPEN SW Back door
YES >> Open switch is OK.
F
1.CHECK OPEN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL G

3. Check voltage between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground. H
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.) I
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and back door lock assem- L

Continuity M

Continuity
B24 11 Not existed
P
Check continuity between back door lock assembly connector and ground.
DLK-195
OPEN SWITCH

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-196
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
C
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value) D
Connector Terminal
E
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
F
JSMIA1348GB
100
G
Intelligent Key
is inside the H
vehicle
Ignition switch JSMIA1406GB I

door is open
J
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
DLK
JMMIA1652GB
120
L
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle M
JMMIA1653GB
N
NO >> GO TO 2.
O
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connector and front door outside handle assembly (driver side) connector. P
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door outside handle assembly (driver side)
harness connector.
DLK-197
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
BCM Front door outside handle assembly (driver side)

Continuity
100 1
M86 D15 Existed
120 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
100
M86 Not existed
120
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace front door outside handle grip. (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and front door outside handle assembly (driver side) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JSMIA1348GB
100
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle
Ignition switch JSMIA1406GB

door is open
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JMMIA1652GB
120
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle
JMMIA1653GB

DLK-198
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
YES >> Replace front door outside handle grip.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". A
PASSENGER SIDE
B

Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. C
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition D
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle F
JSMIA1507GB
118 G
Intelligent Key
H
is inside the
vehicle

I
door is open
J
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
DLK
JSMIA1507GB
119
L
Intelligent Key
is inside the M
vehicle
JSMIA1506GB
N
NO >> GO TO 2. O
P
2. Disconnect BCM connector and front door outside handle assembly (passenger side) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door outside handle assembly (passenger
side) harness connector.
DLK-199
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Front door outside handle assembly (passenger

BCM
side) Continuity
118 2
M86 D11 Existed
119 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
118
M86 Not existed
119
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Connect BCM connector and front door outside handle assembly (passenger side) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JSMIA1507GB
118
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle

door is open
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JSMIA1507GB
119
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle
JSMIA1506GB
DLK-200
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
YES >> Replace front door outside handle grip. A
REAR BUMPER
B
REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708172
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 C

(+) D
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E
Intelligent Key
is outside the F
vehicle
JMMIA1652GB
G
21
H
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle
I
door is open J
Intelligent Key
is outside the
DLK
vehicle
JSMIA1507GB
24 L
Intelligent Key M
is inside the
vehicle
N
JSMIA1506GB

YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". O
NO >> GO TO 2.
P
2. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) harness con-
nector.
DLK-201
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
BCM Outside key antenna (rear bumper)

Continuity
21 2
B47 B32 Existed
24 1
BCM
Connector Terminal Continuity
Ground
21
B47 Not existed
24
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JMMIA1652GB
21
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle

door is open
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JSMIA1507GB
24
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle
JSMIA1506GB

DLK-202
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
YES >> Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper).
DLK
DLK-203
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708173
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuse is not fusing.
Signal name Fuse No.

Front door lock actuator power supply 5 (20 A)
Is the fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M85 143 Ground 9 – 16 V
Is the measurement value normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M85 Existed
147
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708174
1.CHECK FUSE

Rear door lock actuator power supply 3 (20 A)
Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-204
A
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal B
M85 151 Ground 9 – 16 V
Is the measurement value normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT D
BCM E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M85 Existed F
147
YES >> INSPECTION END G
H
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708175
1.CHECK FUSIBLE LINK AND CIRCUIT BREAKER I

Check that the following fuse and circuit breaker are not fusing.
Fusible link No. Signal name

J
R9M engine models T (30A)
Battery power supply
Except for R9M engine models J (30A)
Is the fuse fusing? DLK
YES >> Replace the blown fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
2. Disconnect automatic back door control unit connector. M
3. Check voltage between automatic back door control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage N
Automatic back door control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B25 25 Ground 13.6 V O
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and ground.
DLK-205

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
B24 16
Existed
B25 32
DLK-206
TOUCH SENSOR
TOUCH SENSOR
A
RH
RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010708176
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT. C
D
TOUCH SEN RH Touch sensor RH E
YES >> Touch sensor RH is OK. F
NO >> Refer to DLK-207, "RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708177
G
2. Disconnect touch sensor RH connector. H
3. Check voltage between touch sensor RH harness connector and ground.
(+) I
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D175 1 Ground 6.1 V J

YES >> GO TO 3. DLK
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit connector. L
ness connector.
M
Continuity
B24 1 D175 1 Existed N
Automatic back door control unit O

Continuity
B24 1 Not existed
P
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and touch sensor LH connector.
DLK-207
TOUCH SENSOR
ness connector.

Continuity

Continuity
B24 13 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
Refer to DLK-208, "RH : Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

RH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010708178

2. Disconnect touch sensor RH connector.
Touch sensor RH Resistance

Condition
Terminal (Approx.)

1 2 Touch sensor RH
LH
LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010708179
1.CHECK FUNCTION

DLK-208
TOUCH SENSOR
YES >> Touch sensor LH is OK. A
NO >> Refer to DLK-209, "LH : Diagnosis Procedure".
LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708180
B
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
3. Check voltage between touch sensor LH harness connector and ground.
(+) D
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E
D174 1 Ground 6.1 V
YES >> GO TO 3. F
NO >> GO TO 2.
G
ness connector.
H
Continuity
I
J
Continuity
B24 2 Not existed DLK
NO >> Repair or replace harness. L
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and touch sensor RH connector. M
ness connector.

N
Continuity
O
Automatic back door control unit P

Continuity
B24 13 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
DLK-209
TOUCH SENSOR

Refer to DLK-210, "LH : Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

LH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010708181


Condition
Terminal (Approx.)

1 2 Touch sensor LH
DLK-210
SPINDLE MOTOR
SPINDLE MOTOR
A
RH
B
1.CHECK SPINDLE MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect spindle unit RH connector. C
(+) D
Voltage
Spindle unit RH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E
Auto open op-
12 V
eration
1
Auto close op-
eration G
JMKIB2776ZZ
B29 Ground Back door H
Auto close op-
13.4 V
eration
2
Auto open op-
eration J
JMKIB2776ZZ
DLK
YES >> Replace spindle unit RH.
NO >> GO TO 2. L
M
connector.
Automatic back door control unit Spindle unit RH N

Continuity
29 1
B25 B29 Existed O
36 2
P
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
29
B25 Not existed
36
DLK-211
SPINDLE MOTOR
LH

(+)
Voltage
Spindle unit LH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Auto open op-
12 V
eration
1
Auto close op-
eration
JMKIB2776ZZ
B38 Ground Back door
Auto close op-
13.4 V
eration
2
Auto open op-
eration
JMKIB2776ZZ

YES >> Replace spindle unit LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
ness connector.

Continuity
27 1
B25 B38 Existed
34 2

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
27
B25 Not existed
34
DLK-212
SPINDLE MOTOR
A
DLK
DLK-213
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “SUPER LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” to check that it works normally.
YES >> Super lock actuator is OK.
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL

(+)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
5 Release
D35 Ground Super lock 9 – 16 V
6 Set
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM and each door lock assembly.
connector.

Continuity
148 5
M85 D35 Existed
149 6
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
148
M85 Not existed
149

YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-214
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
(+) A
Connector Terminal
148 Release
B
M85 Ground Super lock 9 – 16 V
149 Set
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
PASSENGER SIDE D
1.CHECK FUNCTION E

F
YES >> Super lock actuator is OK. G
H
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector. I
(+) J
Front door lock assembly (passenger side) (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
1 Set DLK
2 Release
Is the inspection result normal? L
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT M
ness connector. N

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
139 2
M85 D73 Existed
149 1
P
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M85 Not existed
149
DLK-215
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
139 Release
149 Set
REAR LH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010735195
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH.
(+)
Connector Terminal
1 Set
2 Release
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM, each door lock actuator and fuel filler lid lock actuator connector.

Continuity
124 2
B46 D118 Existed
131 1
DLK-216
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B46 Not existed B
131

C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL D
E
(+)
Connector Terminal F
124 Release
B46 Ground Super lock 9 – 16 V
131 Set
G
H
REAR RH
I
1.CHECK FUNCTION
J
DLK
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010735197 L
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH.
N
(+)
5 Release
6 Set
P
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly RH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-217
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM Rear door lock assembly RH

Continuity
124 5
B46 D99 Existed
131 6
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B46 Not Existed
131
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Release
131 Set
DLK-218
UNLOCK SENSOR
UNLOCK SENSOR
A
1.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL B

3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground with oscillo- C
scope.
(+)
D
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
D35 3 Ground 9 – 16 V E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. F
2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect BCM connector. G
connector.
H
Continuity
M86 104 D35 3 Existed I
BCM J
Continuity
M86 104 Not existed
DLK
3.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
M
Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
D35 2 Existed
N

YES >> GO TO 4. O
4.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR
Refer to DLK-220, "Component Inspection". P
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
DLK-219
UNLOCK SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) terminals.

Terminal
Unlock Existed
3 2 Driver door
Lock Not existed
DLK-220
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
1.CHECK “DOOR LOCK–UNLOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

2. Select “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”
Refer to DLK-74, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System
D
and Super Lock)".
YES >> GO TO 2 E
NO >> Set “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". F
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
DLK
DLK-221
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

2. Select “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-75, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super
Lock)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “MODE 2”, “MODE 3”, “MODE 4”, “MODE 5”, “MODE 6” or “MODE 7” in “AUTO LOCK SET”.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".
DLK-222
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
ALL SWITCHES
ALL SWITCHES : Description INFOID:0000000010708186
B
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using all switches.
ALL SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708187
C
1.CHECK DTC WITH AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT
Check that DTC is not detected with automatic back door control unit. D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-88, "DTC Index". E
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check automatic back door control unit power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to DLK-205, "AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". F
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION
Check back door auto closure function. H
Does back door auto closure function operate with back door opener switch?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Refer to DLK-230, "OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure". I
Check automatic back door main switch.
J
Refer to DLK-161, "Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 5.
DLK
5.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR
Check touch sensor. L
Refer to DLK-208, "LH : Component Function Check" (LH) and DLK-207, "RH :
Component Function Check" (RH).
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SPINDLE MOTOR N
Check spindle motor.
Refer to DLK-212, "LH : Diagnosis Procedure" (LH) and DLK-211, "RH : Diagnosis Procedure" (RH).
O
YES >> GO TO 7.
P
1. Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-327, "Removal and Installation".
DLK-223
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010708188
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using automatic back door switch.
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708189
1.CHECK AUTO CLOSE FUNCTION

Check auto close function using automatic back door close switch or Intelligent Key button operation.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-223, "ALL SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure".
Check automatic back door switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010708190
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using automatic back door close switch.
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708191
1.CHECK AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION

Check auto open/close function using automatic back door switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check automatic back door close switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
INTELLIGENT KEY
DLK-224
INTELLIGENT KEY : Description INFOID:0000000010708192
A
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using Intelligent Key.
INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708193
B
1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
Check remote keyless entry function.
C
Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent Key button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-239, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
YES >> GO TO 3.
F
3.REPLACE INTELLIGENT KEY
1. Replace Intelligent Key.
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. G
NO >> GO TO 4. H
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. I
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". J
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010708194 DLK
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using back door opener switch.
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708195
L

M
YES >> GO TO 2. N
Check back door opener switch. O
YES >> GO TO 3. P
DLK-225
DLK-226
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
BUZZER
BUZZER : Description INFOID:0000000010708197
B
Automatic back door warning buzzer does not operate when automatic back door warning function are per-
formed.
BUZZER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708198
C

D
Check automatic back door warning buzzer.
Refer to DLK-163, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT F
Is the result normal? G
H
DLK
DLK-227
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR FUNCTIONS DO NOT CANCEL
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH

Check automatic door main switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
DLK-228
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT B

Check that DTC is not detected with automatic back door control unit.
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-88, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR LH D
Check touch sensor LH.
Refer to DLK-208, "LH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR RH F
Check touch sensor RH.
Refer to DLK-207, "RH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 4.
H
DLK
DLK-229
BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description INFOID:0000000010708204
Back door auto closure function does not operate when back door opening and closing operations are per-
formed.
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708205

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OPEN SWITCH
Check open switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CLOSE SWITCH
Check close switch.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH
Check half latch switch.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR
Check back door closure motor.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 7.
DLK-230
CLOSURE FUNCTION
A
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description INFOID:0000000010708206
Back door auto closure function does not operate when back door closing operations are performed. B
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708207
1.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH C

YES >> GO TO 2.
E
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. F
NO >> GO TO 3. G
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. H
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". I
DLK
DLK-231
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
ALL DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000010708208
All doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708209

Check door lock and unlock power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to DLK-204, "FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure" (front door) and DLK-204, "REAR DOOR
LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door).
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
Check door lock and unlock switch.
Refer to DLK-180, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check" (driver door) and DLK-181, "PASSENGER
SIDE : Component Function Check" (passenger door).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000010708210
Front doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708211

Check front door lock and unlock power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to DLK-204, "FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock actuator.
Refer to DLK-175, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check" (driver door).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-232
Is the result normal? A
REAR DOOR B
REAR DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000010708212
C
Rear doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708213
D
Check rear doors lock and unlock power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to DLK-204, "REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure". E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. F
Check rear door lock actuator. G
Refer to DLK-177, "REAR LH : Component Function Check" (LH).
YES >> GO TO 3. H
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". I
J
DRIVER SIDE
DLK
DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000010708214
Driver door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch. L
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR M

Check front door lock actuator (driver door).
Refer to DLK-175, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
O
2.REPLACE BCM
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. P
PASSENGER SIDE
DLK-233
PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000010708216
Passenger door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

Check front door lock actuator (passenger door).
Refer to DLK-176, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR LH
REAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000010708218
Rear LH door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

Check rear door lock actuator LH.
Refer to DLK-177, "REAR LH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR RH
REAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000010708220
Rear RH door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

Check rear door lock actuator RH.
Refer to DLK-178, "REAR RH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-234
Is the result normal? A
B
DLK
DLK-235
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK
KNOB OR DOOR KEY CYLINDER
1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION

Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-232, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
Check unlock sensor.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-236
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description INFOID:0000000010708222
B
All doors do not lock/unlock using all door request switches.
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708223
C
Check door lock/unlock using Intelligent Key button operation. D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-239, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
2.CHECK “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
2. Select “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. F
3. Check “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-75, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super
Lock)". G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “On” in “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY”. H
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-186, "Component Function Check". I
YES >> GO TO 4.
J
4.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna. DLK
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-149, "DTC Description".
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-152, "DTC Description".
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA M
Check outside key antenna.
• Driver door : Refer to DLK-197, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Passenger door : Refer to DLK-199, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". N
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-201, "REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 6. O
6.REPLACE BCM
P
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DLK-237
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010708224
All doors do not lock/unlock using front door request switch (driver door).
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708225

Check front door request switch (driver door).
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna (driver door).
Refer to DLK-197, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident"
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010708226
All doors do not lock/unlock using front door request switch (passenger door).
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708227
1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Check front door request switch (passenger door).
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check outside key antenna (passenger door).
Refer to DLK-199, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-238
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
A
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY B

For Intelligent Key that cannot be used for door lock and unlock, check that the Intelligent Key belongs to the
vehicle to be checked.
Does the Intelligent Key belong to the vehicle to checked? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check Intelligent Key button operation with registered Intelligent Key belonging to the vehicle.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING D
Check that the Intelligent Key low battery warning is operated.

Is the Intelligent Key low battery warning operated? E
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 >> With another registered Intelligent Key: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without another registered Intelligent Key: GO TO 4. F
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BUTTON OPERATION
Check that door lock and unlock can be performed by operating the buttons of another registered Intelligent
Key. G
Can door lock and unlock be performed with another registered Intelligent Key?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 7. H
4.CHECK ENGINE START
While depressing the brake pedal, contact the backside of the Intelligent Key that cannot be used to perform I
door lock and unlock operation to the push-button ignition switch. Operate the push-button ignition switch, and
check that the vehicle is in START status.
Is the vehicle in START status? J
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY DLK
Check the inside of the Intelligent Key for rust or corrosion by water. Simultaneously check the internal circuits
for damage.
Is the vehicle in START status? L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key.
6.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY M
Check the Intelligent Key battery.

N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery. O
Check door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
Does door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch? P
YES >> GO TO 8.
DLK-239
DLK-240
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK FUNCTION B

Check door lock using door request switch.
Does door lock with door request switch?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-237, "ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER D
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM F
H
DLK
DLK-241
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR

Check door lock status indicator.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
NO >> GO TO 1.
DLK-242
HAZARD LAMP OPERATES WHEN AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR IS OPERATED
HAZARD LAMP OPERATES WHEN AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR IS OPERAT-
A
ED
B
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Check automatic back door control unit ground circuit.
C
Refer to DLK-205, "AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2. D
Replace automatic back door control unit. E
Refer to DLK-327, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
DLK
DLK-243
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to MWI-105, "DTC Index". (Combination meter)
2.CHECK INFORMATION DISPLAY
Check information display.
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check Intelligent Key battery.
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check inside key antenna.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DLK-244
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM B

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM.
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
F
Check front door switch (driver side).
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE BCM H
Is the result normal? I
J
DLK
DLK-245
KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE BCM
DLK-246
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH B

Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR D

Refer to DLK-219, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check back door switch.
Refer to DLK-166, "Component Function Check". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. H
Check inside key antenna. I
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM DLK
Is the result normal? L
M
DLK-247
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER
Check combination meter buzzer.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DLK-248
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM, TCM AND COMBINATION METER B

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM, TCM and combination meter.
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-2 >> Refer to TM-288, "DTC Index". (TCM)
NO-3 >> Refer to MWI-105, "DTC Index". (Combination meter) D
Check combination meter buzzer. E
YES >> GO TO 3. F
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer. G
YES >> GO TO 4. H
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
I
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA DLK
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-149, "DTC Description". L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. M
N
YES >> GO TO 7. O
7.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". P
DLK-249
REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010735125
Reminder function does not operate using door request switch.

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010735126

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION
Check hazard function.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
INTELLIGENT KEY
Reminder function does not operate using Intelligent Key.


YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-250
SUPER LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE
A
ALL DOOR
B
All super lock do not operate.
C
Check driver door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch. D
Does driver door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-232, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure". E
Check driver door super lock actuator.
Refer to DLK-214, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". F
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". H
YES >> INSPECTION END I
DRIVER SIDE
J
Driver side super lock does not operate.

DLK
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR L

Check driver side super lock actuator.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM N
O
P
PASSENGER SIDE
Passenger side super lock does not operate.
DLK-251
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

Check passenger side super lock actuator.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR LH
Rear LH side super lock does not operate.


Check super lock actuator rear LH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR RH


Check super lock actuator rear RH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-252
A
DLK
DLK-253
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident"
DLK-254
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE OR PASSENGER SIDE DOOR SWITCH B

Check driver side or passenger side door switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

2. Confirm the operation after replacement. E
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". F
DLK
DLK-255
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of
the customer's comments; refer to DLK-260, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to dupli-
cate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by a test drive with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen-
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz – (Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
DLK-256
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: A
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
B
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. C
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE D
1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Engine Ear or mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: E
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. F
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem-
porarily. G
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks. H
Refer to DLK-258, "Inspection Procedure".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
I
• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
- separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane J
tape are available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. DLK
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
• INSULATOR (Foam blocks) L
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
• INSULATOR (Light foam block)
• FELT CLOTHTAPE M
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
The following materials, not available through NISSAN Parts Department, can also be used to repair
squeaks and rattles.
• UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE N
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
• SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. O
Note: Will only last a few months.
• SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
• DUCT TAPE P
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
DLK-257
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000010708246
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. Cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by apply-
ing felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring har-
ness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to
repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
DLK-258
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat A
when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include: B
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket C
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area. D
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment. E
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall F
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment G
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
H
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
I
DLK
DLK-259
Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000010708247
PIIB8740E
DLK-260
DLK
PIIB8742E
DLK-261
HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TYPE 1]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

HOOD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010708248
JMKIB2689ZZ
Hood assembly Bumper rubber Hood rod grommet

Radiator core seal Radiator core seal RH Radiator core seal
Radiator core seal LH Hood insulator Hood bumper rubber
Hood hinge Hood rod clamp Hood support rod
: Pawl
: Body grease
HOOD ASSEMBLY
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708249
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation.
REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported with appropriate material when removing
hood assembly.
2. Remove hood assembly mounting nuts, and then remove hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
DLK-262
HOOD
• Before installation of hood, apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface of the hood hinge.
• After installing, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-263, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust- A
ment".
• Apply touch-up paint to the body color if the paint around the hinge is peeled off during removal.
• After installation, check that hood opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-263, "HOOD ASSEMBLY
B
: Inspection".
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Inspection INFOID:0000000010708250
C
1. Open and close the hood. Check that hood hinge rotation portion moves smoothly.
2. Check hood hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary,
apply grease. D
: Body grease
E
JMKIB2933ZZ
G
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000010708251
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
H
DLK
DLK-263
HOOD
JMKIB2934GB
Hood assembly Front grille Front combination lamp

Front fender Hood bumper rubber Hood hinge
Hood lock assembly
: Vehicle front
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Body grease
Fitting Adjustment Standard

Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
DLK-264
HOOD
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
Portion Standard (RH/LH,
MAX)
7.2 – 11.2 B
Hood – Front grille – D Clearance —
[0.283 – 0.441]
Hood – 7.0 – 11.0
– E Clearance — C
Front combination lamp [0.276 – 0.433]
2.5 – 4.5
F Clearance < 1.4 [0.055]
[0.098 – 0.177] D
Hood – Front fender –
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
G Surface height < 1.4 [0.055]
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
Fitting Adjustment Procedure
1. Remove hood lock assembly mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock assembly.
2. Adjust the surface height of hood assembly according to the specified value by rotating hood bumper rub- F
ber.
3. Loosen hood hinge mounting bolts, and then adjust clearance of hood according to the specified value by
moving the hood assembly. G
4. Tighten hood hinge mounting bolts to the specified torque.
5. Install hood lock assembly and temporary tighten hood lock
assembly mounting bolts, and then position hood lock assembly H
and engage primary striker . Check hood lock assembly
and primary striker for looseness.
I
JMKIB3550ZZ
DLK
6. Move hood lock assembly laterally until the center of primary striker and hood lock assembly are vertical
when viewed from the front.
7. Tighten hood lock assembly mounting bolts to the specified torque. L
8. After adjusting, check that hood opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-298, "HOOD LOCK : Inspec-
tion".
HOOD HINGE M
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708252
N
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood assembly. Refer to DLK-262, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove upper mounting bolt of front fender assembly . O
JMKIB2955ZZ
DLK-265
HOOD
3. Remove hood hinge mounting bolts, and then remove hood hinge.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Before installation of hood hinge, apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface of the hood
hinge.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-263, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
: Inspection".
HOOD SUPPORT ROD
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708253
CAUTION:
2 workers are required to support the hood.
REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly with a suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported by the proper material when removing hood
assembly.
2. Pull hood support rod from grommet and remove it.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
RADIATOR CORE SEAL
RADIATOR CORE SEAL : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708254
REMOVAL
1. Apply protective tape (A) to hood assembly around radiator
core seal fixing clips for preventing damage.
JMKIB2956ZZ
2. Disengage fixing clips on the reverse side of radiator core seal

using a remover tool (A).
CAUTION:
Never damage hood assembly.
: Clip
JMKIB2957ZZ
3. Remove radiator core seal from hood assembly.

INSTALLATION
DLK-266
HOOD
HOOD INSULATOR A
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708255
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood rod clamp from hood assembly.
C
: Clip
JMKIB0387ZZ
F
2. Remove hood insulator fixing clips, and then remove hood insulator from hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. G
DLK
DLK-267
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
R9M
R9M : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010728100
JMKIB3660GB
Radiator core support upper Air guide RH Air lower guide

Air guide LH Radiator core support lower Hood lock support stay
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
R9M : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728101
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER

Removal
1. Remove air duct 1. Refer to EM-308, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front grille assembly. Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-297, "HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips from radiator core support upper. Refer to DLK-297,
"Exploded View".
DLK-268
5. Remove fixing clip of engine room harness connector .
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3661ZZ
D
6. Remove fixing clips of engine room harness from radiator
core support upper .
E
: Vehicle front
G
JMKIB3662ZZ
7. Remove fixing clip of engine room harness from radiator

core support upper . H
: Vehicle front
I
JMKIB3005ZZ
DLK
8. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-31, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove hood lock support stay mounting bolts, and then move hood lock support stay to a location where
it does not inhibit work. L
10. Remove radiator mounting bracket fixing clips. Refer to CO-70, "Exploded View".
11. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support upper.
Installation M
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
N
Removal
1. Remove front bumper fascia and apron bracket. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove air lower guide fixing clips, and then remove air lower guide. O
DLK-269
3. Using strings (A), hang inlet hose and inlet hose together
with charge air cooler.
CAUTION:
Never damage inlet hoses and charge air cooler.
JMKIB3663ZZ
4. Use belts (A) to suspend radiator and condenser to prevent

them from falling as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never damage radiator and condenser.
JMKIB3664ZZ
5. Remove radiator core support lower mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower.
Installation
DLK-270
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
A
I
JMKIB3665ZZ
Front fender cover Front fender spacer Front hood seal J

Front fender bracket Front fender assembly Front fender seal
: Pawl
DLK
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708261 L
REMOVAL
1. Remove front fender protector. Refer to EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation". M
2. Remove sill cover. Refer to EXT-62, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front bumper fascia assembly and bumper side bracket. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installa-
tion". N
4. Remove front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-191, "Removal and Installation" (LED headlamp), EXL-
376, "Removal and Installation" (halogen headlamp).
5. Remove front fender cover. Refer to DLK-272, "FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation". O
DLK-271
FRONT FENDER
6. Remove front hood seal fixing clips and front fender spacers
, and then remove front hood seal .
JMKIB3666ZZ
7. Remove mounting bolts of front fender assembly.

8. Remove front fender stiffener from the vehicle body while
carefully pulling upper portion of front fender toward vehicle
outside.
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5633ZZ
9. Remove front fender assembly.

CAUTION:
A viscous urethane foam is installed on the back surface of front fender. When removing the front
fender, be careful to not deform the front fender while performing the procedure and removing the
viscous urethane foam a little at a time.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, adjust the following part.
- Hood assembly: Refer to DLK-263, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
- Front door: Refer to DLK-276, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of front fender mounting
bolts.
FENDER COVER
FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708262
REMOVAL
1. Fully open hood assembly.
DLK-272
FRONT FENDER
2. Disengage fixing pawls according to the numerical order 1→3 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure,
and then remove front fender cover. A
JMKIB3008ZZ
F
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
CAUTION: G
When performing the procedure after removing fender cover, protect the lower of windshield glass
with urethane etc.
H
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: I
Install so that there is no clearance between windshield and cowl top cover.
DLK
DLK-273
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3163GB
Front door panel Door hinge (upper) Door hinge (lower)

Door check link Bumper rubber Bumper rubber
DLK-274
FRONT DOOR
Door striker TORX bolt Grommet
A
Front door weather-strip Front door weather-strip clip
: Clip
: Pawl B
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) C

: Body grease
D
DOOR ASSEMBLY
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708264 E
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro- F
tect door and body.
REMOVAL G
1. Remove dash side finisher. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove SMJ (super multiple junction).
3. Disconnect front door harness connectors . H
JMKIB3019ZZ DLK
4. Remove front door harness grommet from vehicle body ,

and then pull out front door harness from vehicle body. L
JMKIB3020ZZ
O
5. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on vehicle body.
6. Remove door hinge mounting nuts of door side, and then remove front door assembly.
INSTALLATION P
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-276, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.
DLK-275
FRONT DOOR
• After installation, check that door opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-276, "DOOR ASSEMBLY
: Inspection".
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection INFOID:0000000010708265
1. Open and close the door. Check that door hinge and check link rotation portion moves smoothly.
2. Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease if necessary.
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
3. Check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply
body grease if necessary.
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000010708266
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-276
FRONT DOOR
DLK
L
JMKIB3479GB
Front fender Front door Rear door M

Body side outer Door striker TORX bolt
Front door hinge Rear door hinge (upper) Rear door hinge (lower)
N

O
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visually and touching. P
shown below.
DLK-277
FRONT DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.0 – 5.0
H Clearance
[0.118 – 0.197]
Front fender – Front door –
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
I Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Front door – Rear door –
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
K Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

1. Remove front fender assembly. Refer to DLK-271, "FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation".
2. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts of door side.
3. Adjust the surface height of front door according to the fitting standard dimension.
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
5. Loosen door hinge mounting bolts of vehicle body side.
6. Raise front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion.
7. After adjustment, tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts and
nuts.
8. Install front fender assembly. Refer to refer to DLK-271, "FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction.
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708267
REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
ment".
: Inspection".
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708268
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
1. Remove front door assembly. Refer to DLK-275, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front door hinge mounting bolts of vehicle body side, and then remove front door hinge.
INSTALLATION
DLK-278
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION: A
ment".
B
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting bolts.
: Inspection".
DOOR CHECK LINK C
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708269
D
REMOVAL
1. Fully close front door glass.
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation". E
3. Disconnect harness connector of front door speaker.
4. Remove mounting bolts of front door speaker, and then remove front door speaker.
F
5. Remove door check link mounting bolt of vehicle body side.
6. Remove door check link mounting bolts of door panel, and then
take door check link out from the hole of door panel .
G
JMKIB3021ZZ
INSTALLATION J
CAUTION:
After installation, check that door opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-276, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : DLK
Inspection".
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708270
L
REMOVAL
M
1. Apply protective tape (A) to front door panel around front door
weather-strip fixing clips for preventing damage.
N
P
JMKIB2225ZZ
DLK-279
FRONT DOOR
2. Disengage fixing clips on the reverse side of front door weather-
strip using a remover tool (A).
: Clip
JMKIB2226ZZ
CAUTION:
• Never damage front door panel.
• When removing, never confuse the 2 types of front door weather-strip fixing clips and .
JMKIB3058ZZ
: Vehicle front
3. Remove fixing clips on front upper end of front door weather-strip.
JMKIB3059ZZ
DLK-280
FRONT DOOR
4. Disengage fixing pawl on rear upper end of front door weather-strip using a remover tool (A), and then
remove weather-strip clip. A
JMKIB3060ZZ
F
: Pawl

6. Remove front door weather−strip from front door panel. G
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. H
DLK
DLK-281
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
JMKIB3181GB
Rear door panel Door hinge (upper) Door hinge (lower)

Door check link Child lock lever cover Bumper rubber
DLK-282
REAR DOOR
A
Rear door weather-strip clip Rear door weather-strip Rear door weather-strip clip
: Clip
: Pawl B

: Body grease
D
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro- F
tect door and body.
REMOVAL G
1. Remove rear door harness grommet from vehicle body ,
and then pull out rear door harness.
H
J
JMKIB3071ZZ
2. Disconnect rear door harness connector. DLK
JMKIB3072ZZ
N
3. Remove mounting bolt of door check link of vehicle body side.
4. Remove door hinge mounting nuts of door side, and then remove door assembly.
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
ment".
: Inspection".
DLK-283
REAR DOOR
2. Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply body grease if necessary.
• Door hinge (upper)
: Body grease
JMKIB0329ZZ
• Door hinge (lower)
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-284
REAR DOOR
DLK
L
JMKIB3479GB

N

O
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between rear door and each part by visually and touching. P
shown below.
DLK-285
REAR DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
K Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.0 – 5.0
L Clearance
[0.118 – 0.197]
Rear door – Body side outer –
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
M Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

1. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
3. Adjust the surface height of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension.
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts of door side.
5. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts and bolts of vehicle body side.
6. Raise rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension.
CAUTION:
nuts.
8. Install center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal and
Installation".
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Inspection".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door assembly. Refer to DLK-283, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
and Installation".
DLK-286
REAR DOOR
3. Remove rear door hinge mounting bolts and nuts of vehicle body side, and then remove rear door hinge.
A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface. B
ment".
• After installing, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting bolts C
and nuts.
: Inspection".
D
DOOR CHECK LINK
E
REMOVAL
1. Fully close rear door glass.
2. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-19, "Removal and Installation". F
3. Disconnect harness connector of rear door speaker.
4. Remove mounting bolts of rear door speaker, and then remove rear door speaker.
G
take door check link out from the hole of door panel . H
JMKIB3073ZZ
INSTALLATION DLK
CAUTION:
After installation, check that door opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-284, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : L
Inspection".
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
M
REMOVAL
N
1. Apply protective tape (A) to rear door panel around rear door
O
JMKIB2232ZZ
DLK-287
REAR DOOR
2. Disengage fixing clips on the reverse side of rear door weather-
: Clip
JMKIB2233ZZ
CAUTION:
• Never damage rear door panel.
• When removing, never confuse the 3 types of rear door weather-strip fixing clips , and .
JMKIB3090ZZ
: Vehicle front
3. Remove front fixing clips from weather-strip.
JMKIB3091ZZ
DLK-288
REAR DOOR
4. Disengage fixing pawl on front upper end of rear door weather-strip using a remover tool (A), and then
JMKIB3092ZZ
F
: Pawl
5. Remove rear fixing clips from weather-strip.

G
JMKIB3093ZZ
J
6. Disengage fixing pawl on rear upper end of rear door weather-strip using a remover tool (A), and then
remove weather-strip clip.
DLK
O
JMKIB3094ZZ
: Pawl P
8. Remove rear door weather-strip from rear door panel.
INSTALLATION
DLK-289
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3683GB
Back door hinge Back door weather-strip Bumper rubber

Wedge bracket Back door wedge Back door striker
TORX bolt Back door panel Plug
Stud ball Back door damper
: Center mark
: Seam
: Vehicle front
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Body grease
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708280
CAUTION:
• Back door is made of resin. Never apply strong force to it, and be careful to prevent contact with oil.
DLK-290
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove headlining. Refer to INT-37, "Removal and Installation". A
2. Disconnect back door harness connectors , and , and
then remove harness fixing clips .
B
: Vehicle front
D
JMKIB3115ZZ
3. Disconnect harness connector , and then remove harness fix- E

ing clips .
: Vehicle front F
JMKIB3116ZZ H
4. Remove grommet from roof panel , and then pull out back
door harness from vehicle body.
I
DLK
JMKIB3117ZZ
5. Remove air tube from tube clip , and then disconnect tube L
joint connector and air tube (with around view monitor).
: Vehicle front M
JMKIB3118ZZ
O
DLK-291
BACK DOOR
6. Remove tube grommet from roof panel , and then pull out
air tube from vehicle body.
JMKIB3119ZZ
7. Disconnect rear washer tube A and rear washer tube B. Refer to WW-102, "REAR WASHER TUBE :
8. Disconnect rear view camera washer tube (with around view monitor). Refer to DAS-156, "Removal and
Installation".
rear washer tube B and rear camera washer tube from vehicle
body.
JMKIB3120ZZ
10. Support back door with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the back door open when removing the
back door stay.
11. Remove spindle unit from back door. Refer to DLK-313, "SPINDLE UNIT : Removal and Installation".
12. Remove back door hinge mounting nuts of back door and remove back door assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-293, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
• After installation, check whether harness is not pinched. If harness is pinched, pull harness down-
ward lightly.
• After installation, check that door opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-292, "BACK DOOR
ASSEMBLY : Inspection".
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection INFOID:0000000010708281
1. Open and close the back door. Check that door hinge rotation portion moves smoothly.
DLK-292
BACK DOOR
2. Check back door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply
body grease if necessary. A
: Body grease
B
JMKIB3113ZZ
D
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000010708282
FITTING ADJUSTMENT E
DLK
JMKIB3480GB
Back door assembly Roof panel Body side outer panel

Rear bumper fascia Back door hinge Bumper rubber
DLK-293
BACK DOOR
Back door striker TORX bolt
: Body grease

Check the clearance and the surface height between back door and each part by seeing and touching.
shown below.
When back door is reused.
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
Portion Standard (LH/RH,
MAX)
5.0 – 9.0
D Clearance —
[0.197 – 0.354]
Back door – Roof panel –
(−3.0) – (+1.0)
E Surface height —
[(−0.118) – (+0.039)]
3.0 – 7.0 <2.0
Back door – Body side outer F Clearance
[0.118 – 0.276] [0.079]
panel –
(−3.0) – (+1.0)
G Surface height —
[(−0.118) – (+0.039)]
Back door – Rear bumper 5.5 – 9.5
– H Clearance —
fascia [0.217 – 0.374]
When back door is replaced.
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
MAX)
5.1 – 9.1
D Clearance —
[0.201 – 0.358]
(−2.0) – (+2.0)
[(−0.079) – (+0.079)]
2.5 – 6.5 <2.0
[0.098 – 0.256] [0.079]
panel –
(−3.3) – (+0.7)
[(−0.130) – (+0.028)]
– H Clearance —
fascia [0.224 – 0.382]

1. Loosen back door hinge mounting nuts of back door side.
2. Loosen bumper rubber.
3. Remove luggage rear plate mask. Refer to INT-41, "LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation".
4. Loosen back door striker mounting TORX bolts.
5. Position back door lock assembly and engage back door striker. Check back door lock assembly and back
door striker for looseness.
6. Adjust the clearance and surface height of back door according to the fitting standard dimension by back
door hinge and bumper rubber.
DLK-294
BACK DOOR
7. After adjustment, tighten back door striker mounting TORX bolts, bumper rubber and back door hinge
mounting nuts of back door side to the specified torque. A
CAUTION:
After installation, apply touch-up paint to the body color if the paint around back door hinge and
back door hinge mounting nuts is peeled off.
B
8. Install luggage rear plate mask. Refer to INT-41, "LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
• After adjusting, check that bumper rubber is in contact with vehicle body surely.
C
• After adjusting, check that door opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-292, "BACK DOOR
• After adjusting, perform calibration of automatic back door position information (with automatic
back door). Refer to DLK-117, "Work Procedure". D
• After adjusting, perform calibration camera image (with around view monitor). Refer to AV-161,
"CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure" (with navigation).
BACK DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT E
Adjust back door striker so that it becomes parallel with back door lock insertion direction.
BACK DOOR STRIKER
F
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708283
REMOVAL G
1. Remove luggage rear plate. Refer to INT-41, "LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove TORX bolts, and then remove back door striker.
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed. I
Adjustment".
• After installation, check that door opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-292, "BACK DOOR J
BACK DOOR HINGE
DLK
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708284
REMOVAL
L
1. Remove back door assembly. Refer to DLK-290, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove back door hinge cover. Refer to EXT-46, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove back door hinge mounting nuts of vehicle body side, and then remove back door hinge. M
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: N
Adjustment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts. O
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
P
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708287
REMOVAL
Pull up and remove engagement with body from weather-strip joint.
CAUTION:
Never pull strongly on back door weather-strip.
DLK-295
BACK DOOR
INSTALLATION
1. Working from the upper section, align back door weather-strip center mark with vehicle center posi-
tion mark and install weather-strip onto the vehicle .
JMKIB3151ZZ
: Vehicle front
2. Align the connecting point of back door weather-strip with the center of back door striker , and
then install weather-strip onto the vehicle.
JMKIB3152ZZ
: Vehicle front
3. Pull back door weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section.
CAUTION:
Check that weather-strip fits tightly in each corner.
DLK-296
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
A
J
JMKIB3483GB
Hood lock control handle assembly Hood lock control cable assembly Hood lock assembly DLK
Hood lock bell crank assembly
Cable clip
L
: Body grease
M
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708289
N
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect hood lock switch harness connector (if equipped). O
: Vehicle front
P
JMKIB2974ZZ
DLK-297
HOOD LOCK
2. Disconnect hood lock bell crank cable from hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-300, "HOOD LOCK BELL
CRANK : Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock
assembly according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by
arrows as shown in the figure.
JMKIB2975ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never bend cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.937 in) or more.
• Check that hood lock control cable is properly engaged with hood lock.
ment".
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-298, "HOOD LOCK : Inspec-
tion".
HOOD LOCK : Inspection INFOID:0000000010708290
NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Check that hood opener operating is condition 49 N (5.0 kg, 11.0 lb) or below.
2. Check that secondary latch is securely engaged with second-
ary striker from the dead load of hood assembly.
JMKIB3518ZZ
3. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary

striker when hood assembly is closed [free-fall from approxi-
mately 200 mm (7.874 in) height].
JMKIB3551ZZ
4. While operating the hood opener carefully, check that the front end of the hood is lifted by approximately
20 mm (0.787 in) (A). Also, check that the hood opener returns to the original position.
DLK-298
HOOD LOCK
JMKIB3487ZZ
D
Secondary striker Secondary latch Primary striker
Primary latch
E
5. Check that secondary latch is properly engaged with secondary striker [6.8 mm (0.268 in)] (B).
6. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply body grease to hood lock.
• Hood lock assembly
F
: Body grease
JMKIB2979ZZ
I
• Hood lock bell crank assembly

J
: Body grease
DLK
JMKIB2980ZZ
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE M
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708291
N
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock control handle.
2. Remove hood lock control cable from hood opener lever O
according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as
shown in the figure.
P
JMKIB0327ZZ
DLK-299
HOOD LOCK
3. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid opener lever. Refer to DLK-318, "FUEL FILLER
OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-298, "HOOD LOCK : Inspection".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708292
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-297, "HOOD LOCK
: Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fender protector RH. Refer to EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips.
4. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock control handle. Refer to DLK-299, "HOOD
LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove dash side finisher RH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
6. Remove grommet of the lower dash, and pull the hood lock control cable assembly toward inside vehicle.
CAUTION:
While pulling, never damage (peeling) the outside of hood lock control cable.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Install grommet in the panel hole surely.
• Check that cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and apply the sealant to the grommet properly.
JMKIA5814ZZ
tion".
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708293
REMOVAL
DLK-300
HOOD LOCK
1. Disengage pawls of hood lock bell crank cable and disconnect hood lock bell crank cable from housing
bracket of hood lock assembly according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in A
the figure.
JMKIB2981ZZ F
: Pawl
: Vehicle front G
2. Disconnect hood lock bell crank cable from lever of hood lock assembly according to the numerical
order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure.
H
DLK
JMKIB2982ZZ
: Vehicle front M
3. Remove hood lock bell crank assembly mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock bell crank assembly.
INSTALLATION N
CAUTION:
After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-298, "HOOD LOCK : Inspection". O
DLK-301
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3667GB
Outside handle escutcheon Outside handle grip Front gasket

Outside handle bracket Inside handle Cable clip
Door lock assembly TORX bolt Key rod protector (driver side)
Key rod (driver side) Rear gasket
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
DLK-302
FRONT DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708295
A
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect lock knob cable and inside handle cable from inside handle. Refer to DLK-303, "INSIDE HAN-
DLE : Removal and Installation". B
2. Disconnect outside handle cable from outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-304, "OUTSIDE HANDLE :
3. Disconnect door lock assembly connector. C
4. Remove door lock assembly TORX bolts, and then remove door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION D
CAUTION:
E
• When installing outside handle cable to outside handle, be careful that outside handle cable is
routed normally.
• When installing key rod, rotate key rod holder until a click is felt.
• After installation, check door lock. Refer to DLK-303, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection". F
DOOR LOCK : Inspection INFOID:0000000010708296
1. After opening and closing the door, check that door is fixed to the vehicle body normally. G
2. Check the lock/unlock operation of door lock.
3. Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body
H
grease to door lock if necessary.
: Body grease
I
JMKIA8534ZZ
DLK
INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708297 L
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation". M
2. Remove inside handle mounting bolt.
3. Disengage inside handle from door panel while sliding
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han- N
dle.
: Pawl O
JMKIB3668ZZ
DLK-303
FRONT DOOR LOCK
4. Disengage inside handle cable from inside handle accord-
ing to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in
the figure.
JMKIB3669ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation, check door lock. Refer to DLK-303, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection".
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708298
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door glass.
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-303, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove sealing screen and front door glass run lower sash. Refer to GW-43, "FRONT DOOR GLASS
RUN LOWER SASH : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove key rod protector mounting bolt and fixing clip, and then remove key rod protector.
6. Disengage outside handle cable from cable clip .
JMKIB3670ZZ
: Vehicle front
DLK-304
FRONT DOOR LOCK
7. Disconnect door harness connector and disengage outside handle harness connector fixing clip .
A
E
JMKIB3671ZZ
: Clip F
: Vehicle front
8. Disengage rod holder and disconnect key rod from door lock assembly according to the numerical G
order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure (driver side).
DLK
JMKIB3672ZZ
L
: Vehicle front
9. Remove door side grommet , and then loosen TORX bolt from grommet hole. M
JMKIB3066ZZ
DLK-305
FRONT DOOR LOCK
10. Remove outside handle escutcheon while pulling outside
handle grip according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated
by arrows as shown in the figure.
JMKIA0441ZZ
11. Slide outside handle grip toward rear of vehicle and remove it
JMKIA2948ZZ
12. Remove front gasket and rear gasket .
JMKIB2240ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
13. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle and remove
it.
: Vehicle front
JMKIB2241ZZ
DLK-306
FRONT DOOR LOCK
14. Disconnect outside handle cable from outside handle bracket
according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as A
JMKIB2242ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: E
routed normally.
• After installation, check door lock. Refer to DLK-303, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection". F
DLK
DLK-307
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3684GB
Outside handle escutcheon Outside handle grip Inside handle

Door lock assembly TORX bolt Rear gasket
Front gasket Outside handle bracket
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect inside handle cable from inside handle. Refer to DLK-309, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and
Installation".
3. Disconnect door lock assembly connector.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-308
REAR DOOR LOCK
routed normally. A
• After installation, check door lock. Refer to DLK-309, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection".
B
1. After opening and closing the door, check that door is fixed to the vehicle body normally.
3. Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body C
: Body grease D
F
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
G
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708302
REMOVAL H
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-19, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disengage inside handle from door panel while sliding I
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han-
dle.
J
: Pawl
DLK
JMKIB3685ZZ
L

ing to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in M
the figure.
JMKIB3669ZZ
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
DLK-309
REAR DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the rear door glass.
4. Remove sealing screen and rear door lower sash. Refer to GW-52, "REAR DOOR LOWER SASH :
5. Remove door side grommet , and then loosen TORX bolt from grommet hole.
JMKIB3096ZZ

JMKIA9526ZZ

JMKIA2948ZZ
DLK-310
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
JMKIB2240ZZ
D
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
E
it.
F
: Vehicle front
H
JMKIB2241ZZ

according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as I
DLK
JMKIB2242ZZ
L
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: M
routed normally.
• After installation, check door lock. Refer to DLK-309, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection". N
DLK-311
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3552GB
Back door panel Spindle unit Back door stay upper bracket
Double-sided tape Back door lock & remote control as-
Back door touch sensor
[t: 1.2 mm (0.047 in)] sembly
: Body grease
, , : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-47, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect back door lock & remote control assembly harness connector.
3. Remove back door lock & remote control assembly mounting bolts, and then remove back door lock &
remote control assembly from back door panel.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation, check back door lock. Refer to DLK-312, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection".
1. After opening and closing the back door, check that door is fixed to the vehicle body normally.
DLK-312
BACK DOOR LOCK
3. Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body A
: Body grease B
JMKIB1220ZZ
D
DOOR LOCK : Unlock procedures INFOID:0000000010708307
E
UNLOCK PROCEDURES
NOTE:
Release lock according to the following procedures when lock cannot be unlocked due to a malfunction of F
door lock assembly or battery discharge.
Insert a screwdriver, etc. into tool insertion hole of back door inner finisher , and then back door lock is
unlocked by operating knob of cancel lever in the direction of arrow as shown in the figure.
G
DLK
JMKIB3161ZZ
L
: Vehicle front
SPINDLE UNIT
M
SPINDLE UNIT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708308
REMOVAL N
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-139, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove luggage side upper finisher. Refer to INT-45, "LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation". O
DLK-313
BACK DOOR LOCK
3. Disconnect spindle unit harness connector.
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3153ZZ
4. Remove harness grommet from back main center pillar ,

and then pull out spindle unit harness from vehicle body.
JMKIB3154ZZ
WARNING:
back door stay.
6. Apply protective tape (A) to back door touch sensor around spin-
dle unit for preventing damage.
JMKIB3155ZZ
7. Remove metal clip located on connection between back door

stay and stud ball using a remover tool (A) according to the
numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure.
JMKIA2255ZZ
8. Disengage spindle unit and stud ball of back door side.

9. Remove back door stay upper bracket mounting bolts, and then remove spindle unit with back door stay
upper bracket.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-314
BACK DOOR LOCK
• Perform calibration of automatic back door position information. Refer to DLK-117, "Work Proce-
dure". A
• After installation, check back door lock. Refer to DLK-312, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection".
TOUCH SENSOR
B
TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708309
REMOVAL
C
2. Disconnect back door touch sensor harness connector .
D
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3156ZZ
3. Remove spindle unit of back door side. G

4. Remove back door touch sensor fixing clips, and then remove back door touch sensor while tearing off
double-sided tape.
H
5. Remove harness grommet from back door panel , and then
pull out back door touch sensor harness from back door panel
and remove back door touch sensor .
I
: Vehicle front
DLK
JMKIB3157ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. L
CAUTION:
• Before installing, remove double-sided tape remaining on back door touch sensor and back door
panel neatly. M
• When installing, apply primer for resin to double-sided tape sticking point of back door touch sensor
and back door panel.
• After installing, check that there is no clearance between back door touch sensor and back door
panel. N
• After installing, check that back door turns over normally by back door touch sensor.
O
DLK-315
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
JMKIB3182ZZ
Fuel filler lid opener cable Cable protector Fuel filler lid lock assembly
Bumper rubber Fuel filler lid assembly Spring
: Clip
: Pawl
FUEL FILLER LID

FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708311
REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
DLK-316
2. Remove fuel mounting pin .
A
JMKIB3183ZZ
D
3. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove fuel filler lid assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. E
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the mounting screws.
• After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation. F
NOTE:
• The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation status.
• Fitting adjustment cannot be performed.
Unit: mm [in] G
Clearance Evenness
2.5 – 4.5 (−1.0) – (+1.0) H
Fuel filler lid – Body side outer
[0.098 – 0.177] [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK
I
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708312
REMOVAL J
2. Remove luggage side lower finisher RH. Refer to INT-43, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation". DLK
3. Rotate fuel filler lid lock assembly to disengage pawls and
remove fuel filler lid lock assembly according to the numerical
order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure. L
NOTE:
Operation is performed easily when rotating fuel filler lid lock
from passenger room side.
M
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
N
JMKIB1094ZZ
4. Disengage fuel filler lid opener cable and remove fuel filler lid O
opener cable while pressing stopper pin according to the
P
JMKIA5719ZZ
DLK-317
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708313
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts, and then hood lock control handle. Refer to DLK-299,
"HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid opener
lever according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by
JMKIA5672ZZ
3. Remove kicking plate inner RH and rear kicking plate inner RH. Refer to INT-24, "KICKING PLATE :
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish RH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
7. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid lock assembly. Refer to DLK-317, "FUEL FILLER LID
LOCK : Removal and Installation".
8. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from harness protectors.
9. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable fixing clips, and then remove fuel filler lid opener cable.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-318
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708314
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the TORX bolt .
2. Disconnect door switch harness connector and then remove
door switch . C
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION F
DLK
DLK-319
REMOVAL
1. Remove A/C control. Refer to HAC-125, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove door lock status indicator mounting bolt , and then
remove door lock status indicator .
JMKIB3656ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-320
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708315
B
REMOVAL
C
2. Disconnect inside key antenna (instrument center) harness connector.
3. Remove inside key antenna (instrument center) mounting clip
, and then remove inside key antenna (instrument center) . D
JMKIB2755ZZ
G
INSTALLATION
LUGGAGE ROOM H
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708316
I
REMOVAL
3 Seat Rows
1. Remove rear seat. Refer to SE-54, "Removal and Installation". J
2. Disconnect inside key antenna (luggage room) harness connector.
3. Remove inside key antenna (luggage room) mounting clip ,
and then remove inside key antenna (luggage room) . DLK
JMKIB2756ZZ
N
2 Seat Rows
1. Remove luggage floor board. Refer to INT-40, "Exploded View".
O
DLK-321
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
and then remove inside key antenna (luggage room) .
JMKIB3602ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-322
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708317
B
REMOVAL
Remove outside handle grip. Refer to DLK-304, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
C
INSTALLATION
REAR BUMPER D
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010708318
REMOVAL E
1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and Installation".

2. Disconnect outside key antenna (rear bumper) harness connector.
F
3. Remove the outside key antenna (rear bumper) mounting clip ,
and then remove outside key antenna (rear bumper) .
G
I
JMKIB2757ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. J
DLK
DLK-323
REMOVAL
1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector.
3. Remove Intelligent Key warning buzzer mounting bolt , and
then remove Intelligent Key warning buzzer .
JMKIB2758ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-324
A
1. Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key. B
2. Insert remover tool (A) wrapped with a cloth into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. C
CAUTION:
• Never touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
• The key fob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet,
immediately wipe it dry. D
PIIB6221E
F
3. Replace the battery with new one.
Battery replacement :Coin-type lithium battery G

(CR2032)
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts, and then push them H
together until it is securely closed.
CAUTION:
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other for-
eign materials off the electrode contact area. I
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key
functions work normally.
J
PIIB6222E DLK
DLK-325
REMOVAL
2. Remove back door lock assembly. Refer to DLK-312, "DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect back door opener switch assembly harness connector.
4. Remove switch cover mounting screw .
JMKIB2751ZZ
5. Remove grommet , and then remove switch cover .
JMKIB2752ZZ
6. Press toward outside (in the direction shown by arrow) and then
remove back door opener switch assembly .
JMKIB2753ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-326
A
REMOVAL B
1. For 3 seat row models: Remove third seat. Refer to SE-70, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove luggage side lower finisher LH. Refer to INT-43, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation". C
3. Disconnect automatic back door control unit harness connector.
4. Remove the automatic back door control unit mounting bolt ,
and then remove the automatic back door control unit . D
JMKIB2759ZZ
G
INSTALLATION
NOTE: H
After installing automatic back door control unit, perform additional service when replace control unit. Refer to
DLK-116, "Work Procedure".
DLK
DLK-327
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws and then remove the switch bracket from
the instrument lower panel RH.
JMKIB2781ZZ
3. Remove automatic back door main switch from the switch

bracket.
: Pawl
JMKIB3654ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-328
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation".
the instrument lower panel RH . C
JMKIB2781ZZ
F
3. Remove automatic back door switch from the switch bracket.
: Pawl G
I
JMKIB3655ZZ
INSTALLATION J
DLK
DLK-329
REMOVAL
1. Remove automatic back door close switch and switch finisher
using a remover tool.
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape on the part to protect it from damage.
JMKIB2761ZZ
2. Disconnect automatic back door close switch harness connector.

3. Remove automatic back door close switch from automatic
back door close switch finisher using flat-bladed screwdriver
(A).
: Pawl
JMKIA6045ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-330
A
REMOVAL B
2. Disconnect automatic back door warning buzzer harness connector.
C
3. Remove the automatic back door warning buzzer mounting
nuts , and then remove automatic back door warning buzzer .
F
JMKIB2784ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-331
APPLICATION NOTICE

APPLICATION NOTICE
Destination
Service information
DLK-332
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
F
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. G
connectors. H
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. I
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing J
serious injury.
DLK
L
windshield.
PIIB3706J
O
Work INFOID:0000000010717415
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their P
operational.
DLK-333
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000010717416
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
(J-39570)
Locates the noise
Chassis ear
SIIA0993E
(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rat- Repairs the cause of noise
tle Kit
SIIA0994E
DLK-334
COMPONENT PARTS
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
B
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010717417
VIEW WITH FRONT C
DLK
JMKIB3572ZZ
O
View with door opened View with door panel View with A/C control removed
View with front bumper fascia as- View with rear seat removed View with front luggage floor board P
sembly removed removed

Rear door lock assembly RH DLK-341, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
Front door lock assembly (passenger
DLK-341, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
side)
DLK-335
COMPONENT PARTS
Combination meter
Transmits vehicle speed signal to automatic back door control unit via CAN com-
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
munication line.
unit)
Refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Transmits shift position signal to BCM and automatic back door control unit via
TCM
Refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
Transmits ignition switch ON signal to BCM and automatic back door control unit
IPDM E/R via CAN communication line.
BCM detects the vehicle status according to signals from each door switch and
each outside/inside key antenna. BCM transmits drive signal to door lock actuator
when BCM receives operation signal from remote keyless entry receiver and each
BCM
switch.
DLK-341, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock Switch"
and unlock switch)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) DLK-341, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
Rear door lock assembly LH DLK-341, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
Door switch DLK-342, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch"
Front door request switch DLK-341, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch"
Outside key antenna (front door) DLK-343, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna"
Inside key antenna (instrument cen-
ter)
Intelligent Key warning buzzer DLK-343, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer"
VIEW WITH REAR
DLK-336
COMPONENT PARTS
DLK
L
JMKIB3573ZZ
View with instrument lower panel LH View with luggage side lower finisher View with back door opened M
removed
View with rear bumper fascia assem- View with back door panel View with rear bumper fascia assem-
bly removed bly removed
N

Inputs push-button ignition switch ON/OFF condition to BCM. O
Automatic back door switch DLK-339, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Switch"
P
Automatic back door main switch DLK-338, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Main Switch"
Automatic back door control unit DLK-338, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Control Unit"
Touch sensor LH DLK-344, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor"
Spindle unit LH DLK-343, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit"
Spindle unit RH DLK-343, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit"
DLK-337
COMPONENT PARTS
Touch sensor RH DLK-344, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor"
Automatic back door close switch DLK-338, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Close Switch"
Automatic back door warning buzzer DLK-340, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Warning Buzzer"
Hands free sensor
DLK-342, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Hands Free Sensor"
(with hands free sensor models)
Back door opener switch assembly DLK-340, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener Switch Assembly"
Outside key antenna (rear bumper) DLK-343, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna"
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Close Switch INFOID:0000000010717418
• When automatic back door close switch is pressed, back door auto close or reverse operation is detected
and transmits automatic back door close switch signal to automatic back door control unit.
• Automatic back door close switch is installed in the back door
panel.
JMKIB2928ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Control Unit INFOID:0000000010717419
• Automatic back door control unit controls the automatic back door system.
• Automatic back door control unit is installed behind luggage side
lower finisher.
JMKIB2929ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Main Switch INFOID:0000000010717420
WITH HANDZ FREE SENSOR MODELS

• Controls automatic back door open/close operation of automatic back door open/close function and hands
free function.
DLK-338
COMPONENT PARTS
Automatic back door open/close A

Setting position Hands free function
function
ON ON
C
JMKIB2820ZZ
ON OFF E
JMKIB2821ZZ F
OFF OFF OFF
lower panel LH. G
JMKIB2932ZZ
J
WITHOUT HANDS FREE SENSOR MODELS

• Controls automatic back door open/close operation of automatic back door open/close function.
DLK
lower panel LH.
N
JMKIB3657ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Switch INFOID:0000000010717421

O
• When automatic back door switch is pressed, back door auto open/close operation is detected and transmits
automatic back door switch signal to automatic back door control unit.
P
DLK-339
COMPONENT PARTS
• Automatic back door switch is installed in the instrument lower
panel LH.
JMKIB2930ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Warning Buzzer INFOID:0000000010717422
• Warns the user of the automatic back door condition and inappropriate operations with the buzzer sounds.
• Automatic back door warning buzzer is installed behind rear
JMKIB2931ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010717423
• Back door lock assembly integrates back door closure motor, half latch switch, open switch, close switch
and back door switch.
• Closure motor: Inputs open/close signal from automatic back door control unit and activates the back door
auto closure operation.
• Half latch switch: Starts the closure motor close operation.
• Open switch: Stops the closure motor open operation.
• Close switch: Stops the closure motor close operation
• Back door switch: Detects open/close status of back door.
JMKIB2942ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener Switch Assembly INFOID:0000000010717424
• Back door opener switch assembly integrates back door opener switch and back door opener request
switch.
• Back door opener switch detects open operation of back door and transmits back door opener switch sig-
nal to BCM.
• Back door request switch detects door lock/unlock operation and transmits door request switch signal to
BCM.
DLK-340
COMPONENT PARTS
• Back door opener switch assembly is installed in the back door
panel. A
JMKIB2937ZZ
D
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010717425
• Door lock actuator and unlock sensor are integrated in front door E
locks/unlocks door. F
to BCM.
G
JMKIA9347ZZ H
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock Switch INFOID:0000000010717426
• Door lock and unlock switch transmits door lock/unlock signal operation to BCM. I
• Door lock and unlock switch is integrated in the power window
main switch.
J
DLK
L
JMKIA9352ZZ
M
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch INFOID:0000000010717427
• Door request switch detects door lock/unlock operation and transmits door request switch signal to BCM.
• Door request switch is integrated in the outside handle grip. N
JMKIB2935ZZ
DLK-341
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch INFOID:0000000010717428
JMKIA9779ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Hands Free Sensor INFOID:0000000010717429
• When the back door is fully closed and the operating conditions are satisfied, automatic back door control
unit supplies power to hands free sensor. When a hand or baggage is held over the hands free sensor is
shaded with a hand or baggage for approximately 1 second while carrying the Intelligent Key, the hand-free
sensor transmits hands-free sensor signal to BCM.
• The hands free sensor detection area of hands free function is in
the range of approximately 80mm surrounding the hands free sen-
sor.
JMKIB3491GB
• Hands free sensor is installed in the back door finisher.
JMKIB2936ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna INFOID:0000000010717430
• Inside key antenna detects that Intelligent Key is within the inside
detection area, and then transmits detection status to BCM.
• Inside key antenna (instrument center) is installed behind instru-
ment lower cover.
• Inside key antenna (luggage room) is installed behind rear seat.
JMKIA8646ZZ
DLK-342
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer INFOID:0000000010717431
A
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer warns the user, who is outside vehi-
cle, of operation confirmation according to Intelligent Key operation
and door request switch operation, or of an inappropriate opera- B
tion.
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer is installed in the rear of front
C
D
JMKIB1354ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna INFOID:0000000010717432

E
• Outside key antenna detects that Intelligent Key is within the outside detection area, and then transmits
detection status to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to Intelligent Key.
• Outside key antenna (driver side) and outside key antenna (passenger side) are installed in the outside han- F
dle.
• Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is installed in the rear of bumper fascia assembly.
DRIVER SIDE AND PASSENGER SIDE G
JMKIA8648ZZ J
REAR BUMPER
DLK
JMKIA8646ZZ
N
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit INFOID:0000000010717433
• Spindle unit integrates encoder O

• Encoder: Automatic back door control unit receives the pulse signals from encoders A and B that occurred
due to synchronization with the back door operation. The automatic back door control unit calculates the
back door position, operation direction, and operation speed according to the received pulse signals. P
DLK-343
COMPONENT PARTS
• Spindle motor: Inputs open/close signal from automatic back door
control unit and activates the automatic back door open/close
operation.
JMKIB2939ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor INFOID:0000000010717434
During back door close operation, the touch sensor detects any
trapped foreign material.
JMKIB2940ZZ
DLK-344
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
JMKIB3693GB
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION G

• The door lock and unlock switch is built into power window main switch. H
locked.
• Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuator of all doors are
unlocked. I
Unlock Sensor
• BCM locks all doors or unlocks all doors, when driver door lock knob is operated.
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to lock position, locks door J
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position once
unlocks the driver door, turning it to unlock position again within 5 seconds after the first unlock operation DLK
CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System, Without Super Lock)".
L
Operation Condition
and unlock switch.
M
• Doors are not locked by Intelligent Key, door request switch
and auto door lock function.
N
• Ignition position warning function is not activated.
LOCK/UNLOCK
• Key remainder function (driver door opened) is not activated.
Refer to DLK-358, "KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System O
Description"
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION

When ignition switch position is ON and any door is open, all doors cannot locked when door lock and unlock P
switch is operated in lock direction.
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock /unlock state, refer to INL-11, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
OVERRIDE FUNCTION
DLK-345
When driver door opened using the override function, all doors are unlocked.
• Doors are locked by door lock/unlock switch or by automatic lock/unlock function.

• Driver side door switch is switched from OFF to ON.
Operation condition
• Anti-hijack function is not activated.
• Vehicle speed is 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less.
NOTE:
DLK-346
DLK
JMKIB3726GB
P
DLK-347
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010717437
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3694GB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door locks (door lock/
unlock function) by carrying the Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verifica-
tion using two-way communication between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (BCM).
NOTE:
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key
• The settings for each function can be changed with CONSULT.
• If an Intelligent Key is lost, a new Intelligent Key can be registered. A maximum of 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered.
• It is possible to perform a diagnosis on the system and register an Intelligent Key with CONSULT.

Door lock Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the door request switch. DLK-352
The back door can be opened by carrying the Intelligent Key and pressing the
Back door open DLK-355
back door opener switch.
DLK-348
A
Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the remote controller button of the
Remote keyless entry DLK-356
Intelligent Key.
The Intelligent Key reminder buzzer sounds a warning if the door is locked with
Key reminder DLK-358 B
the key left inside the vehicle.
Warning (information dis- If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys-
DLK-370
play) tem is taken, the information display displays to inform the driver.
If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys- C
Warning (buzzer) DLK-370
tem is taken, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver.
Engine start The engine can be turned on while carrying the Intelligent Key. SEC-15
D
Interior room lamp control Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state. INL-11
DLK
DLK-349
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010717438
JMKIB3727GB
DLK-350
DLK
JMKIB3728GB
P
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DLK-351
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010717439
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3695GB
Door lock function controls operation function of the following items.

• Door lock and unlock function (door request switch)
• Anti-hijack function (door request switch)
• Reminder function (door request switch)
• Auto door lock function (door request switch)
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)
When pressing the door request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent
Key.
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it starts the outside key antenna and inside
key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the Intelli-
gent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door.
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM lock/unlock each door lock actuator.
Operation Condition
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed if the door request switch
is operated.
DLK-352
Each door request switch operation Operation condition A

• Ignition switch is in the OFF position
B
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area
• Ignition switch is in the OFF position C
Unlock
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area *
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare D
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.
How to Change Door Lock and Unlock Function Operation Mode

Door lock and unlock function (door request switch) operation mode can be changed using CONSULT. E
Refer to DLK-385, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Without Super
Lock)".
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION F
Lock Operation
When an LOCK signal is sent from door request switch (driver side, passenger side or back door), all doors
are locked. G
Unlock Operation
• When an UNLOCK signal from front door request switch (driver side) is transmitted, driver side door
H
unlocks. When another UNLOCK signal is transmitted within 5 seconds, all door unlocks.
• When an UNLOCK signal from front door request switch (passenger side) is transmitted, all doors unlocks.
• When an UNLOCK signal from back door request switch is transmitted, back door open permission is set.
When another UNLOCK signal is transmitted within 5 seconds, all door unlocks. I
How to change anti-hijack mode.
With CONSULT
Anti-hijack mode can be set to ON or OFF using CONSULT. J
Refer to DLK-384, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System,
Without Super Lock)".
Without CONSULT
DLK
• ON/OFF can be switched when Intelligent Key lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for
• When mode is switched, hazard warning lamp blinks. L
OFF → ON : 1 blink
ON → OFF : 3 blinks M
REMINDER FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)
When doors are locked or unlocked by door request switch, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a reminder.
Reminder function does not operate if ignition switch in ON position. N
Door lock operation

(With door request switch) O
Lock Once
Unlock (anti-hijack operation) Twice (quick) P
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)

After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
vate.
DLK-353
• Door switch is ON (each door is open)

Operating condition • BCM receives door lock signal

With CONSULT
Lock)".
The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
driver outside door handle, passenger outside door handle and
back door request switch . However, this operating range depends
on the ambient conditions.
JMKIA1954ZZ


Hazard warning lamp
Outside key antenna
Door request switch
Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Door lock actuator
Function
Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
Door lock and unlock function (door request switch) × × × × × × × ×
Anti-hijack function (door request switch) × × × × × × × ×
Reminder function (door request switch) × × × × ×
Auto door lock function (door request switch) × × × × × ×
DLK-354
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010717440
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3642GB
G
• When the BCM detects that back door opener switch is pressed, it activates the outside key antenna (rear
bumper) and inside key antenna and transmits the request signal to the Intelligent Key. And then, check that H
the Intelligent Key is near the back door.
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver. I
• If the verification result is OK, BCM transmits the back door open request signal to automatic back door con-
trol module via CAN communication.
• BCM unlocks all doors (except back door) and blinks hazard lamp 2 times as a reminder. J
• Automatic back door control module transmits back door open request signal to back door lock assembly
and back door is open.
• When the back door is open, automatic back door system performs waiting operation for next back door DLK
close operation.
The operation of then back door open is the same as the automatic back door system, refer to DLK-371,
"System Description".
L
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, the back door can be opened.
M
• All door: locked
Open • Ignition switch: OFF
N
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area*
*
: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, back door can be opened from outside of
the vehicle with a spare Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different. O
DLK-355
The outside key antenna detection area of back door open function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding back
door opener switch . However, this operating range depends on
the ambient conditions.
JMKIA1955ZZ

Outside key antenna (rear bumper)


Inside key antenna
Function
Back door switch

Intelligent Key
BCM
Back open function (back door opener switch) × × × × × × × × ×
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3696GB
The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the remote control entry function. Therefore, it can be used in
the same manner as the remote controller by operating the door lock/unlock button.
Remote keyless entry function controls operation function of the following items.
• Door lock and unlock function (Intelligent Key)
• Anti-hijack function (Intelligent Key)
• Reminder function (Intelligent Key)
• Auto door lock function (Intelligent Key)
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY)
DLK-356
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal is transmitted A
from Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the signal and compares it with the registered key ID to the vehicle.
• BCM lock/unlock each door lock actuator, when key ID matches.
B
Operation Condition
If the following condition is satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed if the Intelligent Key button is
pressed. C
Intelligent Key button opera-
Operation condition
tion
D
• Ignition switch: OFF position
Unlock Ignition switch: OFF position E
• When an LOCK signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key, all doors are locked. F
• When an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key once, driver door is unlocked.
• Then, if an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key again, all other doors are unlocked.
With CONSULT G
Anti-hijack mode can be set to ON or OFF using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-384, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System,
Without Super Lock)". H
Without CONSULT
• ON/OFF can be switched when Intelligent Key lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for I
OFF → ON : 1 blink J
ON → OFF : 3 blinks
REMINDER FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY) DLK

When doors are locked or unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as
a reminder. L
Door lock operation

(With Intelligent Key button)
M
Lock Once
Unlock (anti-hijack operation) Twice (quick) N
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY)

After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing O
vate.
• Door switch is ON (door is open) P

Operating condition • BCM receives lock signal

Lock)".
DLK-357
When back door open button is pressed, back door open automatically for detailed description.
Refer to DLK-371, "System Description".
OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft.) range of each door, however the opera-
ble range may differ according to surroundings.


Hazard warning lamp

Combination meter
Door lock actuator
Function
Intelligent Key
Door switch
IPDM E/R
BCM
Door lock and unlock function (Intelligent Key) × × × × ×
Reminder function (Intelligent Key) × × × × × × × ×
Auto door lock function (Intelligent Key) × × × × × ×
Automatic back door open/close function × × × × ×

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010717442
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3556GB
BASIC OPERATION
Key reminder is the function that prevents the key from being left in the vehicle.
Key reminder has the following 3 functions.
DLK-358
Key remainder function Operation condition Operation A

Right after door is locked by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock
knob operation under the following conditions
Driver door opened • Ignition switch: LOCK or OFF position All doors unlock
B
• Driver door is opened
When all doors are locked by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock
Driver door closed* knob within 0.2 seconds after driver door is closed
All doors unlock C
When all of the following conditions are satisfied
• All doors unlock
• Locked all doors
Door is open to closed • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• [Any door: open] → [all doors: closed] D
ing buzzer
*:If the door closing impact shocks the door lock knob, or contacts against baggage with the door lock knob might activate the door locks
accidentally but unlock operation is perform in these cases. E
NOTE:
The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be times when
the Intelligent Key cannot be detected, and this function does not operate when the Intelligent Key is on the
instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system sometimes does not operate if the F
Intelligent Key is in the door pocket for the open door.
G
DESIGN/PURPOSE H
Information display warns the driver that each door is open or is not fully closed.
Symbol Message
I
–
DLK
L
JMKIB2780ZZ
SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP M

SYSTEM DIAGRAM N
JMKIB3593GB
SIGNAL PATH
DLK-359
TIMING CHART
JMKIB3594GB
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Engine Start Information

INFOID:0000000010750522
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display informs the driver that the engine can be started.
Symbol Message
CVT models –
JMKIB1883ZZ
M/T models –
JMKIB1884ZZ

No applicable
DLK-360
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
A
E
JMKIB3596GB
SIGNAL PATH
F
• BCM receives shift position signal and engine status signal from TCM and ECM via CAN communication
and checks that the engine can be started.
• When BCM detects that the engine can be started, meter display signal is transmitted by BCM to combina-
tion meter via CAN communication. G
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, engine start information displays.
H
• Shift position: P position I
• Engine can be started.
When Ignition Switch is Other Than ON.
J
• One condition of A
• All conditions of B
DLK
A condition B condition
• Any door is open → All door is closed
• Ignition switch: Other than ON position
• Push-button ignition switch: Pressed L
• Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition
switch while brake pedal is depressed.
When Ignition Switch is Turned From ON to OFF. M

• Ignition switch: ON → OFF
• Shift position: P position N
NOTE:
Engine start information turns ON for several seconds and then turns OFF, when ignition switch is turned to
the ON position from the OFF position. Engine start information does not turn ON until opening and closing of O
driver door is detected again.
P
• Engine is started.
• Engine cannot start.
When Ignition Switch is Other than ON.
DLK-361
• When BCM receives Intelligent Key button operation via remote keyless entry receiver.
• When BCM receives door request switch signal from door request switch.
• After 15 seconds are passed since the engine start information is displayed.
• After several seconds are passed since the engine start information is displayed.
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Intelligent Key Low Battery
Warning INFOID:0000000010750523
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key battery level is low.
NOTE:
Information display does not display when Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
Symbol Message
Key Battery Low
JMKIB1397ZZ

No applicable
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3597GB
SIGNAL PATH
• When Intelligent Key receives request signal from inside key antenna or outside key antenna, transmits key
ID signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key to remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives key ID signal via remote keyless entry receiver and detects that Intelligent Key battery level is
low.
• When BCM detects that ignition switch is ON, meter display signal is transmitted by BCM to combination
meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, Intelligent Key low battery warning displays.
DLK-362
• Ignition switch is in ON position. A
• Intelligent Key battery level is low.
When any of the following conditions are satisfied. B
• After 30 seconds are passed since the Intelligent Key low battery warning is displayed
• Ignition switch is in a position other than ON.
• When Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while brake pedal is depressed. C
TIMING CHART
JMKIB1406GB H
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Intelligent Key System Malfunc-

tion INFOID:0000000010750524
I
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key system malfunctions or that engine cannot be started. J
Symbol Message
DLK
L
Key System Error
M
JMKIB1398ZZ N

O
DLK-363
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB1417GB
SIGNAL PATH
• When BCM detects that Intelligent Key system malfunctions or that the engine cannot be started, meter dis-
play signal is transmitted by BCM to combination meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, Intelligent Key system malfunction displays.
• The engine cannot be started.
• Intelligent Key system malfunction is detected.
• Intelligent Key system malfunction or engine non-start status is resolved.
TIMING CHART
JMKIB1418GB
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Key ID Verification Information

INFOID:0000000010750525
DESIGN/PURPOSE
If the system cannot detect a registered Intelligent Key inside the vehicle, it informs the driver that it is neces-
sary for the vehicle to detect a registered Intelligent Key.
Symbol Message
JMKIB1887ZZ

No applicable
DLK-364
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
A
E
JMKIB3598GB
SIGNAL PATH
F
BCM to combination meter via CAN communication. G
• After 5 seconds are passed since the key ID warning is displayed, key ID verification information displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATIONG CONDITION H
• Ignition switch: LOCK position
• Push-button ignition switch operation is performed. I
When any of the following conditions are satisfied. J
• After 25 seconds are passed since the key ID verification information is displayed.
• When all door is locked with Intelligent Key or door request switch
• Lock the doors after all doors are closed DLK
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Key ID Warning INFOID:0000000010750526
L
DESIGN/PURPOSE
M
Symbol Message
O
Key ID Incorrect
JMKIB1398ZZ

DLK-365
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3599GB
SIGNAL PATH
BCM to combination meter via CAN communication.
• Ignition switch is in LOCK position
• A registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle.
• 5 seconds are passed since operation start.
• A registered Intelligent Key is detected in passenger room when push-button ignition switch is operated.
• Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while brake pedal is depressed (when
Intelligent Key battery is discharged).
TIMING CHART
JMKIB1420GB
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : P Position Warning (Information

Display) INFOID:0000000010750527
DESIGN/PURPOSE
DLK-366
Information display warns the driver of egression from the vehicle while shift is other than P position.
A
Symbol Message
C
Shift to Park
JMKIB1400ZZ
E
Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp". F
Synchronization is applied. [P position warning (buzzer)]
Refer to WCS-15, "WARNING CHIME : P Position Warning (Buzzer)". G
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
H
J
JMKIB1422GB
SIGNAL PATH DLK

• BCM transmits meter display signal to combination meter via CAN communication, when P position warning
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, P position warning displays.
L
P position warning (buzzer) is operated.
M
P position warning (buzzer) is canceled.
Refer to WCS-15, "WARNING CHIME : P Position Warning (Buzzer)". N
TIMING CHART
JMKIB1423GB
DLK-367
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Steering Lock Information
INFOID:0000000010750528
DESIGN/PURPOSE
When unlocking steering the lock, the system informs the driver that it cannot be unlocked unless the steering
wheel is turned.
Symbol Message
JMKIB1874ZZ

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3595GB
SIGNAL PATH
• BCM transmits the steering lock unit unlock request signal to the steering lock unit, and simultaneously the
steering lock unit checks that the steering lock can be unlocked.
• If the LOCK status of the steering lock unit is detected by the steering lock unit even after BCM is transmitted
to the steering unlock request signal, the meter display signal is sent to the combination meter via CAN com-
munication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, steering lock information displays.
When the steering lock cannot be unlocked.
• When the steering lock is unlocked. (Press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel
to the left and right gently.)
• After 15 seconds are passed since the steering lock information is displayed.
DLK-368
TIMING CHART
A
JMKIB1427GB F
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Take Away Warning (Informa-
tion Display) INFOID:0000000010750529
G
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key is not detected in vehicle. H
Symbol Message
J
No Key Detected
DLK
JMKIB1398ZZ L

Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp". M

Take away warning N
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
O
JMKIB1428GB
SIGNAL PATH
DLK-369
• BCM transmits meter display signal to combination meter via CAN communication, when take away warning
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, take away warning displays.
Take away warning (buzzer) operates.
Take away warning (buzzer) is canceled.
Refer to WCS-20, "WARNING CHIME : Take Away Warning (Buzzer)"
TIMING CHART
JMKIB1429GB
INFOID:0000000010717452
Item Reference
Door open warning
Door Open Warning"
Engine start information
Engine Start Information"
Intelligent Key low battery warning
Intelligent Key Low Battery Warning"
Intelligent Key system malfunction
Intelligent Key System Malfunction"
Key ID verification information
Key ID Verification Information"
Key ID warning
Key ID Warning"
P position warning
P Position Warning (Information Display)"
Steering lock information
Steering Lock Information"
Take away warning
Take Away Warning (Information Display)"
Item Reference
Door lock operation warning Refer to WCS-10, "WARNING CHIME : Door Lock Operation Warning".
OFF position warning Refer to WCS-13, "WARNING CHIME : OFF Position Warning".
P position warning (buzzer) Refer to WCS-15, "WARNING CHIME : P Position Warning (Buzzer)".
Take away warning (buzzer) Refer to WCS-20, "WARNING CHIME : Take Away Warning (Buzzer)".
DLK-370
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
DLK
JMKIB3709GB
The automatic back door system performs the auto open/close operation of the back door by operating the N
automatic back door switch, the automatic back door close switch, the back door opener switch, and Intelligent
Key.
Automatic back door system controls operation function of the following items. O
• Automatic open/close temporary stop function
• Back door open position setting function
• Hands free function (with hands free sensor models)
• Automatic back door open/close function P
• Warning function
• Back door auto closure function
• Anti-pinch function
AUTOMATIC OPEN/CLOSE TEMPORARY STOP FUNCTION
DLK-371
Automatic open/close temporary stop function temporarily stops the open/close operation by operating back
door opener switch during auto open/close operation or by turning automatic back door main switch OFF.
Back Door Opener Switch Operation
• Automatic open/close operation stops when back door opener switch is operated during auto open/close
operation.
• Back door performs auto open operation in an open direction when back door opener switch is operated
again during automatic open/close temporary stop function operation.
• Back door performs auto close operation in a close direction when automatic back door close switch is oper-
ated during automatic open/close temporary stop function operation.
Automatic Back Door Main Switch Operation
• While automatic back door main switch is ON, automatic open/close operation stops when automatic back
door main switch is turned OFF during automatic open/close operation.
• While automatic back door main switch is OFF, automatic open/close operation stops when automatic back
door main switch is turned ON then turned OFF during automatic open/close operation.
• Back door performs automatic open operation in an open direction when back door opener switch is oper-
ated again during auto open/close temporary stop function operation.
• Back door performs automatic close operation in a close direction when automatic back door close switch is
operated during automatic open/close temporary stop function operation.
BACK DOOR OPEN POSITION SETTING FUNCTION

Back door fully open position setting function is a function that enables users to set the full opening stop posi-
tion of automatic open operation when back door may contact an obstacle if fully opened by the automatic
open operation.
CAUTION:
• It is not possible to set the position farther than the initial setting fully open position in the open
direction.
• If a vehicle is parked on a steep slope after setting the fully open position of back door to half open
or less, the door may open to near the half open position instead of stopping at the set position.
• When more than one user uses the vehicle, the back door fully open position setting function may
be changed. Be careful when operating automatic open operation for the first time.
Setting Procedure
By performing the following operations, stop position of the back door open position setting function can be
set.
2. Fully close the back door.
3. After turning OFF the automatic back door main switch, release the latch by back door opener switch
operation.
4. Manually move the back door to the desired stop position.
5. While maintaining the back door position, press and hold the automatic back door close switch for 3 sec-
onds or more. When the setting is successfully completed, automatic back door buzzer sounds (pattern
D).
Reset Procedure
By performing the following operation, the setting of the back door fully open position setting function can be
canceled.
2. Open the back door to the fully open position.
3. Manually move the back door to the upper limit position in the opening direction.
4. Press and hold the automatic back door close switch for 3 seconds or more. When the setting is success-
fully completed, automatic back door buzzer sounds (pattern D).
HANDS FREE FUNCTION (WITH HANDS FREE SENSOR MODELS)

Hands free function is a function that automatically opens the back door just by holding a hand or baggage
over the hands free sensor.
Automatic Back Door Main Switch Setting
DLK-372
Automatic back door open/close A

Setting position Hands free function
function
ON ON
C
JMKIB2820ZZ
ON OFF E
JMKIB2821ZZ F
OFF OFF OFF
Operation Condition G
• Automatic back door main switch: ON position (hands free function ON) H
• Back door: Full closed
• Intelligent Key: Within outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area
Operation Description I
• When the back door is fully closed and the operating conditions are satisfied, automatic back door control
unit supplies power to hands free sensor.
• When a hand or baggage is held over the hands free sensor is shaded with a hand or baggage for approxi- J
mately 1 second while carrying the Intelligent Key, the hand free sensor transmits hands free sensor signal
to BCM.
• BCM receives the hands free sensor signal, and then activates the outside key antenna (rear bumper), and
DLK
checks that the Intelligent Key is near the rear bumper.
• When Intelligent Key is within the detection area of outside key antenna (rear bumper), the Intelligent Key
receives the request signal and transmits the key ID signal to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver (inte-
grated in BCM). L
• BCM receives the key ID signal and verifies the received key ID with the registered key ID.
• When the key IDs match, BCM transmits back door open request signal to the automatic back door control
unit. All doors are unlocked simultaneously. M
• Once automatic back door operation request signal is received from BCM, the automatic back door control
unit activates the automatic open function and automatically opens the back door to the fully open position*.
*
: Fully open position can be changed with the back door fully open position setting function. N
NOTE:
• Hands free function does not operate when, an object that absorbs light (leather glove, etc.) is held over the
hands free sensor for approximately 1 second, while Intelligent Key is carried.
• When the hands free sensor is exposed to the light of headlamp and/or the sun, or when an accessory, such O
as a frame, is attached to the license plate, the hands free function may not operate.
Hands Free Sensor Detection Area
P
DLK-373
The hands free sensor detection area of hands free function is in the
range of approximately 80 mm surrounding the hands free sensor.
JMKIB3491GB

• In the case of the back door fully closed, operate the automatic back door switch, Intelligent Key or back
door opener switch with the back door unlock. The back door closure motor releases the latch, then the spin-
dle motor opens the back door to the fully open position. The closure motor reverses to the neutral position
simultaneously.
• In the case of the back door fully open, operate the automatic back door switch, Intelligent Key or automatic
back door close switch. The spindle motor closes the back door to the half-latch position, then the back door
closure motor to the full latch position. Then, the closure motor reverses to the neutral position.
Operation Condition
• Shift position: P position (CVT models)
• Parking brake: ON (M/T models)
• Power supply (automatic power back door control unit): Approx. 11 V or more
Automatic Open/close Operation When Each Switch is Operated
The automatic open/close operation when each switch is operated differs according to the stop position or
operating status of back door. Refer to the following.
JMKIB3531GB

Condition
main switch switch
Full open ON Stop Long press (1 sec)
function
ON Stop Long press (1 sec)
function
fully open erating
ation)
erating
DLK-374
Condition
Back door operation A
Automatic back door Automatic back door
main switch switch
– Stop Press B
movement only)
Middle erating
ation) C
erating
ation) D
– Stop Press
movement only)
Auto open function op- E
erating
to fully closed
erating
ation)
F
Full closed ON Stop Long press (1 sec)
function
G
Intelligent Key
Condition
Back door opera-
Automatic back Back door condition H
Back door position Ignition switch Intelligent Key
door main switch tion
Perform the auto
Full open OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec)
close function
I
Perform the auto
OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec)
close function
Perform the auto
Fully open to just Auto open function J
OFF – Long press (1 sec) close function (re-
before fully open operating
verse operation)
Auto close function Operation is contin-
OFF – Long press (1 sec) DLK
operating ued
Non-operation
only) L
Perform the auto
Auto open function
Middle OFF – Long press (1 sec) close function (re-
operating
verse operation)
M
Perform the auto
Auto close function
OFF – Long press (1 sec) open function (re-
operating
verse operation)
N
Non-operation
only)
Just before fully
Auto open function Operation is contin- O
closed to fully OFF – Long press (1 sec)
operating ued
closed
Perform the auto
Auto close function
OFF – Long press (1 sec) open function (re- P
operating
verse operation)
Perform the auto
Full closed OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec)
open function
DLK-375
Condition
Full open ON Stop Press
function
ON Stop Press
function
fully open erating
ation)
erating
ON Stop Press
function
Middle erating
ation)
erating
ation)
– Stop Press
movement only)
erating
to fully closed
erating
ation)

Condition
Automatic back door Back door opener Back door operation
main switch switch
Full open – Stop Press Non-operation
– Stop Press Non-operation
Fully open to just before erating
fully open
erating
ON Stop Press
function
Middle erating
erating
ON Stop Press
function
Just before fully closed – Press matic open/close tem-
erating
to fully closed porary stop function)
erating
DLK-376
Condition
Back door operation A
Automatic back door Back door opener
main switch switch
ON Stop Press B
Full closed function
OFF Stop Press Back door open
Hands free function (with hands free sensor models)

C
Condition
Automatic back door Back door operation
Back door position Back door condition Hands free sensor
main switch
D
hand or baggage is
held over the hands-
free sensor is shaded
ON (hands free func- Perform the auto open E
Full closed Stop with a hand or baggage
tion: ON) function
for approximately 1
second while carrying
the Intelligent Key
F
Timing Chart (Full Closed to Fully Open Operation)
DLK
JMKIB3679GB
N
Timing Operation
Buzzer operate after operation permission conditions are satisfied. O
After buzzer operation (A pattern) ends, back door closure motor starts the open operation.
Open SW turns ON, and back door latch release operation completes. P
Half latch SW turns ON, and then back door closure motor performs reverse operation and returns to the
neutral position.
When close SW turns OFF, back door closure motor reverse operation stops, and then completes return-
ing to the neutral position.
Timing Chart (Fully Open to Fully Closed Operation)
DLK-377
JMKIB3680GB
Timing Operation
After buzzer operation (A pattern) ends, spindle motor starts the close operation.
CONTROL IF NOT WITHIN THE OPERATION CONDITIONS DURING THE OPERATION

If the back door is not within the operation conditions during the operation, the automatic back door control unit
performs the control as follows.
Item
Back door operation status
(Condition)
Automatic back door main switch: ON→OFF Operation stops
Operation condition release during the operation start
Automatic back door function is not operating
announcement
CVT models) Shift position: P position→other than P po-
tomatic operation does not become available again until the shift posi-
sition
tion is shifted to P range)
M/T models) Parking brake: ON→OFF tomatic operation does not become available again until the parking
brake is set to ON)
Auto open function op- Operation stop [Back door fully closed or buzzer sounds until the vehi-
Vehicle speed erating cle stops (pattern C)]
(0 km/h → More than 1 km/h) Auto close function op- The operation is continued [buzzer sounds (pattern C) until back door
erating fully closed]
Operation time
Operation stops
(More than approx. 180 sec.)
Malfunction detected
(Power supply circuit, half latch switch, and back door Operation stops
condition)
Operation continues (operation stops when pinching is detected after-
Open operation
wards.)
Close operation Operation stops
Touch sensor circuit Closure (close) opera-
(Normal → Open) Closure closing operation, or warning buzzer operates (B pattern)
tion
Closure [open (return
the latch to the neutral Operation continues
position)]
WARNING FUNCTION
DLK-378
The warning function is as follows and gives the user warning information using automatic back door warning
buzzer. A
B
• Operation start announcement

A • Anti-pinch operation start announce- 0.75 sec C
ment
JMKIA1862ZZ
D
During the closure operation, when touch
B Pi--- sensor detects any trapped foreign materi- 2.0 sec
al, the back door stops halfway E
The conditions are not satisfied in the fully
Back door fully closed or vehi-
C Pi------•••••• open position or during the operation, and
cle is stopped
then the operation continues F
• Calibration of automatic back door posi-

G
tion information is complete
D 2.5 sec
• Back door open position setting proce-
dure is complete
H
JMKIA6517ZZ
BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION I

Open Function
When back door opener switch is pressed and automatic back door main switch in the OFF position, BCM
transmits the back door open request signal to automatic back door control unit via CAN communication, and J
automatic back door control unit opens back door lock assembly.
Timing Chart (Open function)
DLK
O
JMKIB3494GB
Closure Function
P
When the back door is closed to the half-latch position, the motor drives to rotate the latch lever and pulls it in
from half latched to fully latched and automatically closes the door. Then, the closure motor reverses to the
neutral position.
DLK-379
Timing Chart (Closure Function)
JMKIB3495GB
ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
During auto open operation, if an object is detected by encoder pulse in the door's path, a warning chime
sounds and the back door operates in the reverse direction to prevent pinching.
During auto close operation, if an object is detected by the touch sensors and encoder pulse in the door's
path, a warning chime sounds and the back door operates in the open direction until it is fully open.
Operation Condition
Detection method Encoder pulse Touch sensor

Applicable operation Open/close operation Close operation
• Buzzer sounds (pattern A) and the back door stops in
Buzzer sounds (pattern A) the fully-open position after reverse operation
Stop the vehicle
and reverse operation • During closure (close) operation (at main switch OFF):
Operation when Closure [open (neutral position return)] operation
any trapped for-
eign material is de- • The back door reverses a certain amount, and then it
tected reverses automatically to perform the auto close oper-
Running the ve- No reverse operation (buzzer
ation
hicle sounds, pattern C)
• During closure (close) operation (at main switch ON):
Closure (open) operation
• Just after starting the mo-
tor operation
• Back door open operation
Non-reverse area • Full range of closure oper-
• Closure [open (return the latch to the neutral position)]
ation
• Driving
Switch operation during reverse op-
Receive
eration
Number of allowable reverse opera- Perform the automatic open/close temporary stop function after 2 reverse operations re-
tions gardless of the operation direction
DLK-380
DLK
JMKIB3730GB
P
DLK-381
JMKIB3729GB
DLK-382
A
COMMON ITEM
B
APPLICATION ITEM
C
D
Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
NOTE:
Diagnosis mode
I
DLK
M
NVIS - NATS IMMU ×
P
NOTE:
CONSULT.
DLK-383

NOTE:
VEHICLE COND —
NOTE:
POWER SUPPLY
COUNTER
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key Sys-
tem, Without Super Lock) INFOID:0000000010717459
BCM CONSULT FUNCTION

WORK SUPPORT

Anti-hijack function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
NOTE:
AUTO UNLOCK TYPE
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

REQ SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW-BD/TR Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
DLK-384
A
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
NOTE:
KEY SW B
ACTIVE TEST
C
DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched D
NOTE:
SUPER LOCK
E
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK IND
INTELLIGENT KEY F
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Without Super

Lock) INFOID:0000000010717460
G
WORK SUPPORT
H
INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis
Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this I
mode
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
• On: Operate
J
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
ENGINE START BY I-KEY • On: Operate
NOTE:
DLK
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: OFF L
• MODE 2: 30 sec
• MODE 3: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 5: 3 minutes M
NOTE: N
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
Ignition battery saver system mode can be changed to operation with this mode
IGN/ACC BATTERY SAVER • On: Operate O
NOTE:
ANSWER BACK
P
ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UN- NOTE:
LOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be used
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS LOCK NOTE:
UNLOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be used
SELF-DIAG RESULT
Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
DLK-385
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

REQ SW -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch

DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1
NEUTRAL SW - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of reverse/neutral position switch
SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
STARTER RELAY - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter relay
ENGINE STATE Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states
Display the starter relay/starter control relay status signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communi-
ST/INHIRELAY-IPDM
cation
REVERSE SIGNAL - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of R position
CRANKING PERMIT - ECM Display the engine cranking permit signal from ECM via CAN communication
IS STATUS - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start system
STARTER CUT RELAY - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay signal from ECM via CAN communication
VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h]
Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) by
VEH SPEED 2
numerical value [Km/h]
IGN REQ - IPDM Display the ignition request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication
STARTER REQ - IPDM Display the starter request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
ID OK FLAG Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of Intelligent Key ID
PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility
NOTE:
PRMT RKE STRT
Indicates [KEY On/NOT On] condition of Intelligent Key ID and Intelligent Key is detected in-
I-KEY OK FLAG
side vehicle
PRBT ENG STRT Indicates whether or not the engine is in start prohibited status
Indicates whether or not it is in engine start possible status when Intelligent Key verification is
ID AUTHENT CANCEL TIMER
unnecessary
ACC BATTERY SAVER Indicates [On/Off] whether or not ignition battery saver is in operation
DLK-386
A
Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in cranking prohibited status due to starter motor protection
CRNK PRBT TMR
function operation
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in AUTO CRANKING MODE status
B
CRNK PRBT TME Indicates the time for changing from cranking prohibited status to cranking possible status
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates the time that AUTO CRANKING MODE operates
CRANKING TME Indicates the cranking operation time C
NOTE:
SHORT CRANK
This item is displayed, but not used
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intel- D
RKE OPE COUN1
ligent Key, the numerical value start changing
NOTE:
RKE OPE COUN2
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored E
S/L IGN OFF POSITION Indicates [On/Off] condition of Ignition OFF signal
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 1 Indicates [Gnd/On] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit F
S/L POWER OUTPUT Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
S/L POWER CHECK Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
G
ANTICIPATED POWER Indicates [On/Off] condition of anticipated power supply
S/L LOCK REQ Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit lock request signal
S/L - BCM (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of CAN communication H
S/L POWER ERROR Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply error
VEH SPEED ERROR (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
I
VEH SPEED NORMAL (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
ENGINE RUNNING (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of engine running
S/L ID DISCORD Indicates [Correct/Incorrect] condition of ID verification J
S/L ANTI-SCAN MODE Indicates [On/Off] condition of antiscan mode
S/L LOCK NOT PERMIT Indicates [Inhibition/No inhbt] condition of inhibit steering lock
DLK
S/L UNLOCK (CAN) Indicates [Finished/Unfinished] condition of steering lock unit unlock
S/L ID STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Coded/Blank] condition of registration ID
S/L RESET STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Exit/No exit] condition of steering lock unit reset signal L
S/L LO-LEVEL MALFUNC
Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of lo-level malfunction
(CAN)
S/L LOCK POSITION (CAN) Indicates [Armed/Malf/Unlocked/Undefined] condition of lock/unlock position signal M
S/L ACT MALFUNCTION (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of steering lock unit malfunction
S/L HI-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of hi-level malfunction
N
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (SPD) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (PWR) Indicates [Allowed/Forbid] condition of safety line inhibition
S/L SENSOR POWER (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of sensor test power supply O
S/L SEN TEST PERMIT (CAN) Indicates [Forbid/Authorize] condition of sensor test
S/L STAT NOT DETECT (CAN) Indicates [Ok/Undefind] condition of steering lock undefined position signal
S/L LOCKING FINISHED (CAN) Indicates [Unfinshd/Finished] condition of steering lock unit lock status signal P
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
DLK-387
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key
RKE PBD Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door open request signal from Intelligent Key
NOTE:
KEY SW
NOTE:
IGN SW
NOTE:
START SW

ACTIVE TEST

This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation
OUTSIDE BUZZER • On: Operate
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation
• Buzzer 1: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipi...) when CONSULT screen is touched
• Buzzer 2: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipi-pipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
INSIDE BUZZER touched
• Buzzer 3: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipipi-pipipipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
touched
This test is able to check warning lamp operation
• KEY ON: [Intelligent Key system malfunction] displays when CONSULT screen is touched
INDICATOR
• KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation
FLASHER
The hazard lamps are activated after “LH/RH/Off” on CONSULT screen is touched
NOTE:
HORN
This test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
Push-ignition switch illumination illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check BCM sends starter request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communi-
cation
• MODE 1: IGN ON, START request OFF
ENGINE START REQUEST
• MODE 2: IGN OFF, START request ON
• MODE 3: IGN ON, START request ON
NOTE:
IGNITION RELAY
This test is able to operate the starter control relay
STARTER CUT RELAY • On: Operates
NOTE:
ENGINE START
NOTE:
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
DLK-388
A
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
AUTO ACC 2 • On: Operate B
NOTE:
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
This item is displayed, but cannot be used C
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to ignition relay
• Off: Non-operation D
This test is able to check trunk/luggage room lamp operation
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
E
TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) (With Intelligent Key System, Without F
Super Lock) INFOID:0000000010717461
DATA MONITOR G
NOTE:
H
PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch
I
DETECTION SENSOR (BK) Indicates [On/Off] condition of hands free sensor
VEH SPEED 1 Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter J
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
NOTE: DLK
TR CANCEL SW
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored L
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored M
DLK-389
CONSULT Function (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT) INFOID:0000000010717462
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with automatic back door control unit.

Work Support Changes the setting for system function
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by automatic back door control unit
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from automatic back door
CAN Diag Support Monitor
control unit
Data Monitor The automatic back door control unit input/output signals are displayed
Ecu Identification The automatic back door control unit part number is displayed
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

SPINDLE SENSOR LH Indicates [Pulse] condition of encoder LH
SPINDLE LH SPEED Indicates [mm/s] condition of spindle motor LH operation speed
SPINDLE MOTOR LH DUTY Indicates [%] condition of spindle motor LH duty
Display the vehicle speed signal received from unified meter and A/C amp. by numerical
VHCL SPEED MTR
value [km/h]
Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electrical unit by numer-
VHCL SPEED ABS
ical value [km/h]
MAIN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of automatic back door main switch
AUTO BD SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of automatic back door switch
BK DOOR CL SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of automatic back door close switch
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of parking brake status from combination meter via CAN
PKB SW
communication
BACK DOOR LOCK STATUS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door lock status
OPEN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of open switch
CLOSE SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of close switch
HALF LATCH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of half latch switch
TOUCH SEN RH Indicates [ON/OFF/OPEN] condition of touch sensor RH
TOUCH SEN LH Indicates [ON/OFF/OPEN] condition of touch sensor LH
P RANGE IND Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P range signal from unified meter and A/C amp.
RKE REQ Indicates [OFF/MOVE/REV] condition of remote keyless entry signal from BCM
IGN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of IGN power supply
SPINDLE LH ENCODER A Indicates [LO/HI] condition of encoder signal A from encoder LH
SPINDLE LH ENCODER B Indicates [LO/HI] condition of encoder signal B from encoder LH
NOTE:
UNLOCK SEN BD
Indicates [Type 1/Type 2/Type 3/Type 4] specification of destination of the automatic back
DESTINATION door system
Normal: [Type 3] is monitored
TRANSMISSION TYPE Indicates [MT/(AT/CVT)] type of transmission
DLK-390
A
Indicates [YET/DONE] condition of [CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR PO-
SITION INFORMATION]
Indicates [YET/DONE] condition of [ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-
AUTO BCK DR POS LEARN B
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL]
SPINDLE SENSOR RH Indicates [Pulse] condition of encoder RH
SPINDLE RH SPEED Indicates [mm/s] condition of spindle motor RH operation speed
C
SPINDLE MOTOR RH DUTY Indicates [%] condition of spindle motor RH duty
SPINDLE RH ENCODER A Indicates [LO/HI] condition of encoder signal A from encoder RH
SPINDLE RH ENCODER B Indicates [LO/HI] condition of encoder signal B from encoder RH D
DETECT SENSOR PWR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of hands free sensor power supply
CLOSURE OPERATION Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door auto closure function
E
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of IGN power supply from IPDM E/R via CAN communica-
IGN SW
tion
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of hands free sensor signal from BCM via CAN communi-
DETECT SENSOR SIG 1 F
cation
WORK SUPPORT
G
RESET AUTO BACK DOOR STA-
This item is able to calibration of automatic back door position information
TUS H
SELF-DIAG RESULT
Refer to DLK-398, "DTC Index".
I
DLK
DLK-391
BCM

BCM
ECU Reference
BCS-76, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-78, "DTC Index"
DLK-392
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010717464
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL B

NOTE:
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. C
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
SPINDLE SENSOR LH Back door: Moving 0 – 1000 D
SPINDLE LH SPEED Back door: Moving 0 – 6553.5
SPINDLE MOTOR LH DUTY Back door: Moving 0 – 255
E
VHCL SPEED MTR While driving
reading
VHCL SPEED ABS While driving F
reading
OFF OFF
MAIN SW Automatic back door main switch
Other than above ON
G
Release OFF
Press ON
Release OFF H
Press ON
OFF OFF
PKB SW Parking brake I
ON ON
Lock OFF
BACK DOOR LOCK STATUS Back door lock
Unlock ON J
OFF OFF
OPEN SW Open switch
ON ON
DLK
OFF OFF
CLOSE SW Close switch
ON ON
OFF OFF L
HALF LATCH SW Half latch switch
ON ON
TOUCH SEN RH Touch sensor RH M
N
Other than P position OFF
P RANGE IND Selector lever
P position ON
Release OFF O
Press (auto open/close
RKE REQ Intelligent Key button (back door) MOVE
operation)
Press (reverse operation) REV P
ON position ON
SPINDLE LH ENCODER A Automatic back door
DLK-393
SPINDLE LH ENCODER B Automatic back door
NOTE:
UNLOCK SEN BD The item is indicated, but OFF
not monitored
DESTINATION — TYPE3
M/T models MT
TRANSMISSION TYPE • Ignition switch: ON position
AT/CVT
• CVT models
Calibration of automatic back door Not complete YET

position information Complete DONE
Additional service when removing Not complete YET

AUTO BCK DR POS LEARN
battery negative terminal Complete DONE
SPINDLE SENSOR RH Back door: Moving 0 – 1000
SPINDLE RH SPEED Back door: Moving 0 – 6553.5
SPINDLE MOTOR RH DUTY Back door: Moving 0 – 255
SPINDLE RH ENCODER A Automatic back door
SPINDLE RH ENCODER B Automatic back door
• Automatic back door main switch: ON (hands free function
DETECT SENSOR PWR ON)
ON
• Back door: Full closed
CLOSURE OPERATION Back door
Open operation ON
ON position ON
DETECT SENSOR SIG 1 Hands free sensor ON (perform the auto
ON
open function)
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JMKIB2786ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
DLK-394
Terminal No. A
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
Output
B
Detect obstruc-
1 Touch sensor RH sig- 0.4 V
Ground Input Touch sensor RH tion
(LG) nal
Other than above 6.1 V C
Detect obstruc-
2 Touch sensor LH sig- 0.4 V
Ground Input Touch sensor LH tion
(G) nal
Other than above 6.1 V D
Open 12 V
3
Ground Half latch switch signal Input Back door Fully closed/half
(SB) 0V
latch E
5 Fully closed 0V
Ground Close switch signal Input Back door
(BR) Open/half latch 12.2 V
F
G
6 Moving (auto)
Ground Encoder LH A signal Input Back door
(W)
H
JMKIB2762ZZ
7 Moving (auto) J
Ground Encoder LH B signal Input Back door
(L)
JMKIB2762ZZ DLK
8 Moving (auto)
Ground Encoder RH A signal Input Back door M
(R)
JMKIB2762ZZ
N
9 Moving (auto)
Ground Encoder RH B signal Input Back door
(SB)
P
JMKIB2762ZZ
10 Automatic back door Automatic back ON 12.2 V

Ground Input
(BG) main switch door main switch OFF 0V
DLK-395
Terminal No.
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
Output
Closure opera-
11 0V
Ground Open switch signal Input Back door tion
(V)
12 Input/
Ground CAN - L — —
(P) Output
13
Ground Touch sensor ground Input — 0V
(GR)
16
Ground Ground Input — 0V
(B)
19 Encoder LH power
(V) supply
20 Encoder RH power
(P) supply
21
Ground Encoder ground — — 0V
(G)

Ground Input
(LG) switch door switch Released 0V

Ground Input
(W) close switch door close switch Released 0V
24 Input/
Ground CAN - H — —
(L) Output
25
Ground Power supply (BAT) Input — 13.6 V
(W)
Auto open opera-
12 V
tion
27 Spindle motor LH
tion
JMKIB2776ZZ
Auto open opera-

12 V
tion
29 Spindle motor RH
tion
JMKIB2776ZZ
• Automatic door main switch: ON

30 Hands free sensor • Shift position: P position 12.8 V
Ground Output • Back door: Full closed
(R) power supply
Other than above 0V
Closure opera-
(L) tor (open)
Other than above 0V
DLK-396
Terminal No.
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
Output
32 B
Ground Ground — — 0V
(B)
Auto open opera-

34 Spindle motor LH tion
Ground Output Spindle motor LH D
(G) (close)
JMKIB2776ZZ
Auto close opera-

E
13.4 V
tion
35
Ground Ground (noise shield) — — 0V
(B) F
G
Auto open opera-
36 Spindle motor RH tion
(G) (close)
H
JMKIB2776ZZ
Auto close opera-

13.4 V I
tion
J
Sounding (auto
Automatic back open/close oper-
37 Automatic back door
Ground Output door warning ation)
(Y) warning buzzer
buzzer DLK
JMKIB2777ZZ
Not sounding 0V
L
Closure opera-
(SB) tor (close)
Other than above 0V
M
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000010717465
N
U1000 CAN COMM Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
O
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
B2401 IGN OPEN Inhibit automatic back door operation tects ignition switch ON signal via
CAN communication P
tects that half latch switch changes
B2409 HALF LATCH SW Inhibit automatic back door operation
from ON to OFF when back door ful-
ly closes
B2416 TOUCH SEN R OPEN Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
B2417 TOUCH SEN L OPEN Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
DLK-397
B2419 OPEN SW Inhibit automatic back door operation Reconnect battery
B2420 CLOSE SW Inhibit automatic back door operation Reconnect battery
B2422 BACK DOOR STATE Inhibit automatic back door operation Half latch switch is ON from OFF
At least 180 seconds are passed af-
B2423 ABD MTR TIME OUT Inhibit automatic back door operation ter automatic back door operation is
inhibited
B2426 SPINDLE SENSOR LH Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
B2427 SPINDLE SENSOR RH Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
B2428 AUTO BACK DR CNT UNIT Inhibit automatic back door operation Return to normal status
B242A CLSR CONDITION Inhibit automatic back door operation Reconnect battery
B242B DETECT SENSOR POWER SUP-
Hands free sensor power supply: ON→OFF Reconnect battery
PLY
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010717466
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority DTC
• B2428 AUTO BK DR CNT UNIT
• U1000 CAN COMM
1
• U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• B2401 IGN OPEN
• B2409 HALF LATCH SW
• B2416 TOUCH SEN R OPEN
• B2417 TOUCH SEN L OPEN
• B2419 OPEN SW
• B2420 CLOSE SW
2 • B2422 BACK DOOR STATE
• B2423 ABD MTR TIME OUT
• B2426 SPINDLE SENSOR LH
• B2427 SPINDLE SENSOR RH
• B242A CLSR CONDITION
• B242B DETECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC Index INFOID:0000000010717467
NOTE:
Details of time display
• 1 - 39: Displayed if any previous malfunction is present when current condition is normal. It increases like 1
→ 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. The counter
remains at 39 even if the number of cycles exceeds it. It is counted from 1 again when turning ignition switch
OFF → ON after returning to the normal condition if the malfunction is detected again.

U1000: CAN COMM × DLK-466
U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN) × DLK-467
B2401: IGN OPEN × DLK-428
B2409: HALF LATCH SW × DLK-430
B2416: TOUCH SEN R OPEN × DLK-433
B2417: TOUCH SEN L OPEN × DLK-436
B2419: OPEN SW × DLK-439
B2420: CLOSE SW × DLK-442
B2422: BACK DOOR STATE × DLK-444
DLK-398
A
B2423: ABD MTR TIME OUT × DLK-447
B2426: SPINDLE SENSOR LH × DLK-449
B2427: SPINDLE SENSOR RH × DLK-452 B
B2428: AUTO BACK DR CNT UNIT × DLK-455
B242A: CLSR CONDITION × DLK-456
B242B: DETECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY × DLK-459 C
DLK
DLK-399
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4405GB
DLK-400
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4406GB
DLK-401
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4407GB
DLK-402
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4408GB
DLK-403
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4409GB
DLK-404
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4410GB
DLK-405
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4411GB
DLK-406
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4412GB
DLK-407
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4413GB
DLK-408
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4414GB
DLK-409
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4415GB
DLK-410
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4416GB
DLK-411
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4417GB
DLK-412
A
DLK
P
JRKWD4432GB
DLK-413
JRKWD4433GB
DLK-414
DLK
JRKWD4434GB
DLK-415
JRKWD4435GB
DLK-416
DLK
JRKWD4436GB
DLK-417
JRKWD4437GB
DLK-418
DLK
JRKWD4438GB
DLK-419
JRKWD4439GB
DLK-420
DLK
JRKWD4440GB
DLK-421
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-422

B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC C
1. Check DTC.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (print them out using CONSULT). D
- Erase DTC.
Are any symptoms described or any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed>>GO TO 4. F
Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 5.
Confirm the symptom described by the customer. G
H
>> GO TO 5.
J
>> GO TO 6.
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-77, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM) or DLK-398,
"DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (automatic back door control unit), and determine trouble diagnosis order. L
NOTE:
M
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". O
IS the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
SULT.
DLK-423
YES >> GO TO 8.
ment.
3. Check for DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
malfunction is completely repaired.
DLK-424
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMI-
A
NAL
B
When the battery is disconnected from the negative terminal, it is necessary to perform initial setting to oper-
ate automatic back door control system normally. Refer to DLK-427, "Work Procedure".
C
1.INITIALIZATION
D
1. Fully close the back door manually. (When back door is already fully closed, this operation is not neces-
sary)
2. Perform automatic back door open/close operation of back door.
3. Check for noise or malfunctioning during operation. E
4. Check automatic back door warning buzzer operates.
NOTE:
Never touch back door, or allow foreign materials to be pinched in back door, when performing automatic back F
door open/close operation of back door, until it is in the fully closed or fully open position.
>> WORK END G
DLK
DLK-425
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CON-
TROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
CONTROL UNIT
When replacing automatic back door control unit, or removing connector terminal, it is necessary to perform
initial setting to operate automatic back door system normally. Refer to DLK-426, "Work Procedure".
1.STEP 1
2. Select “RESET AUTO BACK DOOR STATUS” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
>> GO TO 2.
2.STEP 2
>> GO TO 3.
3.STEP 3
Operate back door opener switch and perform automatic back door open operation.
>> GO TO 4.
4.STEP 4
1. The back door fully opens.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
5.STEP 5
>> WORK END
DLK-426
A
When the following work is performed, it is necessary to perform initial setting of automatic back door position B
information to operate automatic back door system.
• After removing and installing, or replacing automatic back door control unit
• After removing and installing, or replacing back door assembly
• After removing and installing, or replacing spindle unit C
D
1.STEP 1
2. Select “RESET AUTO BACK DOOR STATUS” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode. E
>> GO TO 2. F
2.STEP 2
G
>> GO TO 3.
3.STEP 3 H
Operate back door opener switch and perform automatic open operation.
>> GO TO 4. I
4.STEP 4
1. The back door fully opens. J
YES >> GO TO 5. DLK
NO >> GO TO 2.
5.STEP 5
L
>> WORK END M
DLK-427
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

IGN OPEN Automatic back door control unit cannot detect ignition switch ON signal
B2401
(Ignition open) via CAN communication with BCM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• CAN communication system
• BCM
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC B2401 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000 or
U1010.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> U1000: Refer to DLK-466, "DTC Description". U1010: Refer to DLK-467, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF BCM AND IPDM E/R
Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” and “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index" (BCM) or PCS-38, "DTC Index" (IPDM E/R).
NO >> GO TO 3.
3. Select “IGN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Ignition switch (automatic back ON ON

IGN SW
door control unit judgment) OFF OFF
DLK-428
A
Ignition switch (IPDM E/R judg- ON ON
IGN SW
ment) OFF OFF
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO-1 >> Automatic back door control unit NG: Replace automatic back door control unit, refer to DLK-633,
"Removal and Installation". C
NO-2 >> IPDM E/R NG: Replace BCM, refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". D
>> INSPECTION END

E
DLK
DLK-429
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

HALF LATCH SW Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of half latch switch
B2409
(Half latch switch) during automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connectors (half latch switch circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH MONITOR ITEM

Fully closed OFF
Open ON
YES >> GO TO 7.
DLK-430
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL A

B
(+)
Voltage C
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D172 6 Ground 12 V D
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5. E
F
Automatic back door control unit Back door lock assembly G

Continuity
H
I
Continuity
B24 3 Not existed J
NO >> Repair or replace harness. DLK
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground. L

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7. N
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT O
YES >> GO TO 8. P
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC 2409. Refer to DLK-430, "DTC Description".
DLK-431
DLK-432
A

TOUCH SEN R OPEN Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of touch sensor RH
B2416
(Touch sensor right open) during automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Touch sensor RH
• Harness or connectors (touch sensor circuit is open or shorted) E
FAIL-SAFE

Is DTC detected? H
J
1.CHECK INSTALLATION OF TOUCH SENSOR RH
Check that touch sensor RH is installed normally.
Refer to DLK-622, "TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation". DLK
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-622, "TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation". L
2. Select “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT. M
N
TOUCH SEN RH Touch sensor RH
Detect obstruction ON O
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3. P

2. Check voltage between touch sensor RH harness connector and automatic back door control unit harness
connector.
DLK-433
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D175 1 Ground 6.1 V
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and touch sensor RH connector.
ness connector.

Continuity

Continuity
B24 1 Not existed
ness connector.

Continuity

Continuity
B24 13 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-434
A
2. Disconnect touch sensor RH connector. B
Touch sensor RH Resistance C

Condition
Terminal (Approx.)

1 2 Touch sensor RH D
DLK
DLK-435
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TOUCH SEN L OPEN Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of touch sensor LH
B2417
(Touch sensor left open) during automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Touch sensor LH
• Harness or connectors (touch sensor circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?
1.CHECK INSTALLATION OF TOUCH SENSOR LH

Check that touch sensor LH is installed normally.
Refer to DLK-622, "TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-622, "TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation".

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2. Check voltage between touch sensor LH harness connector and automatic back door control unit harness
connector.
DLK-436
(+) A
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D174 1 Ground 6.1 V
B

YES >> GO TO 5. C
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and touch sensor LH connector. D
ness connector.
E
Continuity
B24 2 D174 1 Existed F
Automatic back door control unit G

Continuity
B24 2 Not existed
H
NO >> Repair or replace harness. I
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and touch sensor LH har- J
ness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Touch sensor LH DLK

Continuity
L

Continuity M
B24 13 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR LH O

P
YES >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-437


Condition
Terminal (Approx.)

1 2 Touch sensor LH
DLK-438
B2419 OPEN SWITCH
B2419 OPEN SWITCH
A

OPEN SW Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of open switch dur-
B2419
(Open switch) ing automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Open switch E
• Harness or connectors (open switch circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE F
G
2. Operate automatic back door. H
Is DTC detected?
J

DLK
YES >> GO TO 2. L
Manually check open and close operation of back door. M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. N
3.CHECK OPEN SWITCH SIGNAL
1. Select “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT. O
2. Select “OPEN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

P
OPEN SW Back door
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
DLK-439
B2419 OPEN SWITCH
4.CHECK OPEN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.

Continuity

Continuity
B24 11 Not existed

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 8.
2. Erase DTC.
DLK-440
B2419 OPEN SWITCH
NO >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-633, "Removal and Installation". A
DLK
DLK-441
B2420 CLOSE SWITCH
B2420 CLOSE SWITCH
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CLOSE SW Automatic back door control unit detects a malfunction of close switch dur-
B2420
(Close switch) ing automatic operation of back door
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Close switch
• Harness or connectors (close switch circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CLOSE SWITCH SIGNAL

CLOSE SW Back door
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
DLK-442
B2420 CLOSE SWITCH
2. Disconnect back door lock assembly connector. A
(+)
B
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D172 5 Ground 12.2 V C
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5. D

1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit connector. E
F
Continuity
B24 5 D172 5 Existed G
H
Continuity
B24 5 Not existed
I

YES >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-633, "Removal and Installation". J
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground. DLK

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground L
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N
YES >> GO TO 8. O
8.REPLACE BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY P
2. Erase DTC.
DLK-443
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

BACK DOOR STATE When the automatic back door control unit detects back door position mal-
B2422
(Back door state) function according to the pulse signal
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Encoder
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?

Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. Select “SPINDLE SENSOR LH” and “SPINDLE SENSOR RH” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
DLK-444
Monitor item Status A

SPINDLE SENSOR LH 0 – 1000
SPINDLE SENSOR RH 0 – 1000
B
Is the difference between the 2 monitor items 10 or more?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
2. Disconnect spindle unit connector. D
3. Check voltage between spindle unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
E
Voltage
Spindle unit (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
LH B38 12.7 V F
3 Ground
RH B29 12.3 V
G
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT H
connector. I

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal J
19 LH B38
B24 3 Existed
20 RH B29
DLK

L
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
19
B24 Not existed M
20
YES >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-633, "Removal and Installation". N
O
connector.
P
Continuity
LH B38
B24 21 6 Existed
RH B29
DLK-445

Continuity
B24 21 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
DLK-446
A
CONSULT screen items (Trouble di-

agnosis content) C
ABD MTR TIME OUT
When the automatic back door control unit and spindle motor operate
B2423 (Automatic back door motor time
in the same direction for 180 seconds or more continuously
out)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Spindle motor
• Harness or connectors (circuit is shorted) E
FAIL-SAFE
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT. H
Is DTC detected?
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". I
J
1.ERASE DTC
1. At least 180 seconds are passed after automatic back door operation is inhibited.
DLK
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and spindle unit connector.
connector. N

Continuity
O
27 1
LH B38
34 2
B25 Existed
29 1 P
RH B29
36 2
DLK-447

Continuity
Connector Terminal
27
Ground
29
B25 Not existed
34
36
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE SPINDLE UNIT LH
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE SPINDLE UNIT RH
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
1. Replace automatic back door unit.
Is DTC detected?
DLK-448
B2426 ENCODER
B2426 ENCODER
A

SPINDLE SENSOR LH When the automatic back door control unit can not receive the pulse signal
B2426
(Spindle sensor left handle) from the encoder just after starting the open/close operation
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Back door mechanism E
• Encoder
F
FAIL-SAFE
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
Is DTC detected? I
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END J
1.CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR POSITION INFORMATION DLK

2. Erase DTC, and then repeat “PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. L
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END M
1. Check that back door assembly is installed normally. N
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
P
3. Select “SPINDLE LH ENCODER A” and “SPINDLE LH ENCODER B” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
DLK-449
B2426 ENCODER

HI ⇔ LO
SPINDLE LH ENCODER A al)
Back door
HI ⇔ LO
SPINDLE LH ENCODER B al)
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
(+)
Voltage
Spindle unit LH (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B38 3 Ground 12.7 V
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT
ness connector.

Continuity

Continuity
B24 19 Not existed
ness connector.

Continuity
DLK-450
B2426 ENCODER
Automatic back door control unit A

Continuity
B24 21 Not existed
B
YES >> GO TO 7.
C
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.REPLACE SPINDLE UNIT E

2. Erase DTC.
F
G
DLK
DLK-451
B2427 ENCODER
B2427 ENCODER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SPINDLE SENSOR RH When the automatic back door control unit can not receive the pulse signal
B2427
(Spindle sensor right handle) from the encoder just after starting the open/close operation
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Encoder
FAIL-SAFE
Is DTC detected?

Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. Select “SPINDLE RH ENCODER A” and “SPINDLE RH ENCODER B” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
DLK-452
B2427 ENCODER

HI ⇔ LO
SPINDLE RH ENCODER A al)
When stopped HI or LO B
Back door
HI ⇔ LO
SPINDLE RH ENCODER B al)
When stopped HI or LO C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-633, "Removal and Installation". D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect spindle unit RH connector.
F
(+)
Voltage
Spindle unit RH (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal G
B29 3 Ground 12.3 V
H
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT I
ness connector. J
Continuity
DLK
L

Continuity
B24 20 Not existed
N
6.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT 2 O
ness connector. P

Continuity
DLK-453
B2427 ENCODER

Continuity
B24 21 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.REPLACE SPINDLE UNIT
2. Erase DTC.
DLK-454
A

AUTO BACK DR CNT UNIT
B2428 Automatic back door control unit detected CPU malfunction
(Auto back door control unit)
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
FAIL-SAFE E

G
Is DTC detected?
I

When DTC B2428 is detected, replace automatic back door control unit. J
DLK
DLK-455
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CLSR CONDITION Automatic back door control unit detects malfunctions of open switch,
B242A
(Closure condition) close switch and half latch switch when auto closure of back door operates
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Close switch
• Open switch
• Harness or connectors (open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
2. Operate back door auto closure operation.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MONITOR ITEM
3. Select “HALF LATCH SW”, “OPEN SW” and “CLOSE SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
DLK-456

Fully closed OFF
HALF LATCH SW
Open ON
B
OPEN SW Back door
Closure operation ON C
CLOSE SW
YES >> GO TO 7. D
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL E
F
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.) G
Connector Terminal
4 12.2 V
D172 5 Ground 12.2 V H
6 12 V
I
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SWITCH CIRCUIT J
bly harness connector. DLK

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal L
3 6
11 4 M
N
Continuity
Connector Terminal
O
3 Ground
B24 5 Not existed
11 P
6.CHECK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
DLK-457

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 8.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure for DTC 242A. Refer to DLK-456, "DTC Description".
YES >> INSPECTION END.
DLK-458
B242B HANDS FREE DETECT SENSOR
B242B HANDS FREE DETECT SENSOR
A

DETECT SENSOR POWER
An excessive high voltage from hands free sensor power supply is sent to
B242B SUPPLY
automatic back door control unit.
(Detect sensor power supply)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Hands free sensor
• Harness or connector (hands free sensor power supply circuit is open or shorted) E
FAIL-SAFE
Hands free sensor power supply: ON→OFF F
Is DTC detected? H
1.CHECK HANDS FREE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J

2. Disconnect automatic back door control unit connector and hands free sensor connector.
DLK
3. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and hands free sensor har-
ness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Hands free sensor L

Continuity
M

Continuity N
B25 30 Not existed
O
YES >> Replace hands free sensor.
DLK-459
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

INSIDE ANTENNA An excessive high or low voltage from inside key antenna (instrument cen-
B2621–00
(Inside antenna) ter) is sent to BCM.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• BCM
• Inside key antenna (instrument center)
• Harness or connector [inside key antenna (instrument center) circuit is open or shorted]
FAIL-SAFE
–
KEY”.

DLK-460
(+) A
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
B
When Intelligent
Key is not in the C
antenna detec-
tion area
JMMIA1652GB
D
116
When Intelligent
E
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area F
door is open G
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detec- H
tion area
JSMIA1348GB
117 I
When Intelligent J
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area
DLK
JSMIA1406GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT M
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) harness
connector. N
BCM Inside key antenna (instrument center)

Continuity O
116 2
M86 M17 Existed
117 1
P
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
116
M86 Not existed
117
DLK-461

YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area
JMMIA1652GB
116
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area

door is open
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area
JSMIA1348GB
117
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area
JSMIA1406GB

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (instrument center).
DLK-462
A
CONSULT screen terms

(Trouble diagnosis content) C
INSIDE ANTENNA An excessive high or low voltage from inside key antenna (luggage room)
B2622–00
(Inside antenna) is sent to BCM
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• BCM
• Inside key antenna (luggage room)
• Harness or connector [inside key antenna (luggage room) circuit is open or shorted] E
FAIL-SAFE
–
F
G
KEY”. H
J

DLK
DLK-463
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelli-
gent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
JMMIA1652GB
22
When Intelli-
gent Key is in
the antenna
detection area

door is open
When Intelli-
gent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
JSMIA1507GB
23
When Intelli-
gent Key is in
the antenna
detection area
JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) harness con-
nector.
BCM Inside key antenna (luggage room)

Continuity
22 2
B47 B35 Existed
23 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
22
B47 Not existed
23
DLK-464
Is the inspection result normal? A

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 B
1. Replace inside key antenna (luggage room). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) connector.
C
(+) D
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E
When Intelli-
gent Key is not F
in the antenna
detection area
G
JMMIA1652GB
22
H
When Intelli-
gent Key is in
the antenna
detection area I

door is open J
When Intelli-
gent Key is not
DLK
in the antenna
detection area
JSMIA1507GB L
23
When Intelli- M
gent Key is in
the antenna
detection area
N
JSMIA1506GB

O
YES >> Replace inside key antenna (luggage room).
DLK-465
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-41, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica-
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAN COMM When automatic back door control unit cannot communicate CAN com-
U1000
(CAN communication) munication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC

YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
DLK-466
A

(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Automatic back door control unit detected internal CAN communica-
U1010
[Control unit (CAN)] tion circuit malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE D
FAIL-SAFE E

G
I

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace automatic back door control unit. J
DLK
DLK-467
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “BK DOOR CL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Pressed ON
Released OFF
YES >> Automatic back door close switch is OK.
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

3. Check voltage between automatic back door close switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Automatic back door close switch (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and automatic back door
close switch harness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Automatic back door close switch
Continuity

Continuity
B24 23 Not existed
3.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between automatic back door close switch harness connector and ground.
DLK-468
Automatic back door close switch A

Continuity
D173 2 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
3. Check continuity between automatic back door close switch terminals.
Automatic back door close switch I

Terminal
Automatic back door Pressed Existed

1 2 J
close switch Released Not existed
DLK-469
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “AUTO BD SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Pressed ON
Released OFF
YES >> Automatic back door switch is OK.
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

3. Check voltage between automatic back door switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Automatic back door switch (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M58 1 Ground 12.6 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
switch harness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Automatic back door switch

Continuity

Continuity
B24 22 Not existed
3.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between automatic back door switch harness connector and ground.
DLK-470
Automatic back door switch A

Continuity
M58 2 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
3. Check continuity between automatic back door switch terminals.
Automatic back door switch I

Terminal
Pressed Existed
1 2 Automatic back door switch J
DLK-471
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “MAIN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

ON ON
MAIN SW Automatic door main switch
OFF OFF
YES >> Automatic door main switch is OK.
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

3. Check voltage between automatic back door main switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Automatic back door main switch (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M54 1 Ground 12.2 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH CIRCUIT
main switch harness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Automatic back door main switch
Continuity
3. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit connector and ground.

Continuity
B24 10 Not existed
DLK-472
Automatic back door main switch A

Continuity
M54 3 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
3. Check continuity between automatic back door main switch terminals.
Automatic back door main switch I

Terminal
Automatic back door ON Existed

1 3 J
main switch OFF Not existed
DLK-473
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

3. Check voltage between automatic back door warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Automatic back door warning buzzer (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B28 1 Ground 12 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
warning buzzer harness connector.
Automatic back door control unit Automatic back door warning buzzer
Continuity

Continuity
B25 37 Not existed
Check continuity between automatic back door warning buzzer harness connector and ground.

Continuity
B28 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident"

DLK-474
2. Disconnect automatic back door warning buzzer connector. A
3. Check battery power supply directly to automatic back door warning buzzer terminals and check the oper-
ation.
B
Terminal Operation
(+) (-) C
1 2 Buzzer sounds
YES >> INSPECTION END D
NO >> Replace automatic back door warning buzzer.
DLK
DLK-475
1.CHECK BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL

(+)
Voltage
Back door lock assembly (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Closure operation 13 V
1
Back door closure Other than above 0V
D172 Ground
motor Closure operation 13 V
2
Other than above 0V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR CIRCUIT

Continuity
31 1
B25 D172 Existed
38 2

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
31
B25 Not existed
38
>> INCPECTION END
DLK-476
BACK DOOR SWITCH
BACK DOOR SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “DOOR SW-BK” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
Open On
Closed Off
F
1.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL G

3. Check signal between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. H
(+)
I
Connector Terminal
D172 7 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK
2. Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and BCM harness connector. L

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
N
Continuity
D172 7 Not existed O

YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". P
DLK-477
BACK DOOR SWITCH

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



Terminal
Lock Existed
7 8 Back door lock
Unlock Not existed
DLK-478
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “BACK DOOR OPENER SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
SW Released OFF
F
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPEN INPUT SIGNAL G

3. Check voltage between back door opener switch assembly harness connector and ground. H
(+)
I
Connector Terminal
D169 1 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door opener switch assembly harness con- L
nector.

Continuity M
BCM
Continuity
B47 16 Not existed
P
DLK-479

Continuity
D169 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



Terminal

1 2
DLK-480
A
Transmits lock/unlock operation to BCM. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
3. Select “REQ SW BD/TR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. D
Monitor item Condition Status E

Pressed ON
REQ SW -BD/TR Back door request switch
Released OFF
F
YES >> Back door request switch is OK.
G

3. Check voltage between back door opener switch assembly harness connector and ground. I
(+)
Back door opener switch assembly (–) Voltage J
Connector Terminal
D169 4 Ground 9 – 16 V
DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door opener switch assembly harness con- M
nector.

Continuity N
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. O
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground P
B47 6 Not existed
3.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
DLK-481

Continuity
D169 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check back door opener switch assembly terminals.

Terminal
Pressed Existed
4 3 Back door opener request switch
DLK-482
CLOSE SWITCH
CLOSE SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “CLOSE SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
CLOSE SW Back door
YES >> Close switch is OK.
F
1.CHECK CLOSE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL G

(+)
Voltage
(Approx.) I
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK

Continuity M

Continuity
B24 5 Not existed
P
DLK-483
CLOSE SWITCH

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-484
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “INSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. C
4. Touch “Buzzer 1”, “Buzzer 2” or “Buzzer 3” to check that it works normally.
Yes >> Combination meter buzzer is OK. D
No >> Refer to DLK-485, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
1.CHECK METER BUZZER CIRCUIT
Refer to WCS-54, "Component Function Check".
F
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace harness. G
H
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
DLK-485
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

(+)
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
1 Lock
2 Unlock
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.

Continuity
141 1
M85 D9 Existed
148 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
141
M85 Not existed
148
YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-486
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+) A
Connector Terminal
141 Lock
B
148 Unlock
PASSENGER SIDE D
1.CHECK FUNCTION E

F
G
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717546 H

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
J
(+)
(passenger side)
DLK
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
6 Unlock L
NO >> GO TO 2. M

1. Disconnect BCM and front door lock assembly (driver side) connector. N
ness connector.
O
Continuity
139 6 P
M85 D48 Existed
141 5
DLK-487
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M85 Not existed
141
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
139 Unlock
141 Lock
REAR LH
1.CHECK FUNCTION

(+)
Connector Terminal
1 Lock
2 Unlock
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-488
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM Rear door lock assembly LH A

Continuity
124 2
B46 D85 Existed B
125 1
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124 D
B46 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL F
G
(+)
Connector Terminal H
124 Unlock
125 Lock
I
J
REAR RH
DLK
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT. L
N
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL O

P
(+)
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
6 Unlock
DLK-489
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
124 6
B46 D105 Existed
125 5
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B46 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock
DLK-490
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
LOCK ON
CDL LOCK SW
(driver door) LOCK OFF E
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK ON
F
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717552 G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
I
(+)
3
15
DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. L
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector. M

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal N
50 3
M87 D5 Existed
80 15
O
BCM
Continuity P
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M87 Not existed
80
DLK-491

DLK-492
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “REQ SW-DR”, “REQ SW-AS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
Pressed ON
REQ SW -DR Driver side door request switch
Released OFF
Pressed ON E
REQ SW -AS Passenger side door request switch
Released OFF
F
YES >> Front door request switch is OK.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717554 G
1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door outside handle assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between malfunctioning front door outside handle assembly harness connector and
ground. I
(+)
Front door outside handle assembly (–) Voltage J
Connector Terminal
Driver side D33
3 Ground 9 – 16 V DLK
Passenger
D34
side
L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT M
BCM harness connector. N
Front door outside handle assembly BCM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
Driver side D33 105
3 M86 Existed
Passenger side D34 82
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door outside handle assembly harness connector and P
ground.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
105
M86 Not existed
82
DLK-493
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between malfunctioning front door outside handle assembly harness connector and ground.
Front door outside handle assembly

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D33
4 Existed
Passenger side D34
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace front door outside handle grip.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect malfunctioning front outside handle assembly connector.
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly terminals.
Front outside handle assembly

Terminal
Pressed Existed
3 4 Door request switch
NO >> Replace front outside handle grip.
DLK-494
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
mode. C

D
Open ON
Closed OFF
Open ON E
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH F
Closed OFF
Open ON
Closed OFF G
NO >> Refer to DLK-495, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector. J
(+)
DLK
Connector Terminal
Driver side B34 L
Passenger side B27
3 Ground 9 – 16 V
Rear LH B71
M
Rear RH B53
YES >> GO TO 3. N
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector. O
Door switch BCM P

Continuity
Driver side B34 17
3 B47 Existed
Rear LH B71 12
Rear RH B53 10
DLK-495
DOOR SWITCH
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B34
Ground
Passenger side B27
3 Not existed
Rear LH B71
Rear RH B53
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

3. Check continuity between door switch terminals.
Door switch
Terminal
Pressed Not existed
Driver side
Released Existed
Pressed Not existed
Passenger side
3 Door switch
Rear LH
Released Existed
Pressed Not existed
Rear RH
Released Existed
DLK-496
HALF LATCH SWITCH
HALF LATCH SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “HALF LATCH SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
Fully closed OFF
Open ON
YES >> Half latch switch is OK.
F
1.CHECK HALF LATCH INPUT SIGNAL G

(+)
Voltage
(Approx.) I
Connector Terminal
D172 6 Ground 12 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK

Continuity M

Continuity
B24 3 Not existed
P
DLK-497
HALF LATCH SWITCH

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-498
HANDS FREE SENSOR
HANDS FREE SENSOR
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “DETECT SENSOR PWR” and “DETECT SENSOR SIG 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
• Automatic back door main switch: ON
• Shift position: P position ON
DETECT SENSOR PWR • Back door: Fully closed
E
ON (auto open operation
ON
DETECT SENSOR SIG 1 Hands free sensor start)
F
YES >> Hands free sensor is OK. G
H
1.CHECK HANDS FREE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
2. Disconnect hands free sensor connector.
3. Check voltage between hands free sensor harness connector and ground.
(+) J
Voltage
Hands free sensor (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
DLK
• Automatic back
door main switch:
ON
• Shift position: P 12.2 V L
D170 1 Ground position
• Back door: Fully
closed
M
Other than above 0V
YES >> GO TO 3. N
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HANDS FREE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
O
2. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and hands free sensor har-
ness connector.
P
Automatic back door control unit Hands free sensor
Continuity
3. Check continuity between automatic back door control unit connector and ground.
DLK-499
HANDS FREE SENSOR

Continuity
B25 30 Not existed
3.CHECK HANDS FREE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between hands free sensor connector and ground.
Hands free sensor

Continuity
D170 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HANDS FREE SENSOR CANCEL SIGNAL
1. Connect hands free sensor connector.
2. Check voltage between automatic back door main switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Automatic back door main switch (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Hands free func-
Automatic back 0V
M54 5 Ground tion ON position
door main switch
OFF 12 V
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HANDS FREE SENSOR CANCEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between automatic back door main switch harness connector and hands free sensor
harness connector.
Automatic back door main switch Hands free sensor

Continuity
M54 5 D170 4 Existed
3. Check continuity between automatic back door main switch connector and ground.

Continuity
M54 5 Not existed
YES >> Replace hands free sensor.
DLK-500
HANDS FREE SENSOR
Automatic back door main switch A

Continuity
M54 3 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 7.
C
7.CHECK HANDS FREE SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Disconnect hands free sensor connector.
2. Check voltage between hands free sensor harness connector and ground. D
(+)
Hands free sensor (–) Voltage E
Connector Terminal
D170 2 Ground 9 – 16 V
F
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
G
8.CHECK HANDS FREE SENSOR CANCEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and hands free sensor harness connector. H
BCM Hands free sensor

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal I
J
Continuity
DLK
B47 9 Not existed
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". M
>> INSPECTION END

N
DLK-501
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
1.CHECK FUNCTION

YES >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-502
INFORMATION DISPLAY
INFORMATION DISPLAY
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “INDICATOR” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. C
4. Touch “KEY ON” or “KEY IND” to check that it works normally.
YES >> Information display is OK. D
E
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Refer to MWI-84, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
H
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
DLK-503

current value becomes about 10 mA. Refer to DLK-631, "Removal
and Installation".

Is the measurement value within the specification?
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery.
OCC0607D
DLK-504
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “OUTSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. C
4. Touch “On” to check that it works normally.
YES >> Intelligent Key warning buzzer is OK. D
E
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
F
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer connector.
3. Check voltage between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
(+) G
Intelligent Key warning buzzer (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
H
E25 1 Ground Buzzer ON 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3. I
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER CIRCUIT
J
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector.
BCM Intelligent Key warning buzzer DLK

Continuity
E23 164 E25 1 Existed
L
BCM
Continuity M
E23 164 Not existed
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER O
Check continuity between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
P
Continuity
E25 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
DLK-505

YES >> Replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts
DLK-506
OPEN SWITCH
OPEN SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “OPEN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
OPEN SW Back door
YES >> Open switch is OK.
F
1.CHECK OPEN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL G

(+)
Voltage
(Approx.) I
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK

Continuity M

Continuity
B24 11 Not existed
P
Check continuity between back door lock assembly connector and ground.
DLK-507
OPEN SWITCH

Continuity
D172 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-508
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
C
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value) D
Connector Terminal
E
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
F
JSMIA1348GB
100
G
Intelligent Key
is inside the H
vehicle
Ignition switch JSMIA1406GB I

door is open
J
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
DLK
JMMIA1652GB
120
L
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle M
JMMIA1653GB
N
NO >> GO TO 2.
O
2. Disconnect BCM connector and front door outside handle assembly (driver side) connector. P
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door outside handle assembly (driver side)
harness connector.
DLK-509
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
BCM Front door outside handle assembly (driver side)

Continuity
100 1
M86 D33 Existed
120 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
100
M86 Not existed
120
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Connect BCM connector and front door outside handle assembly (driver side) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JSMIA1348GB
100
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle

door is open
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JMMIA1652GB
120
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle
JMMIA1653GB

DLK-510
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
YES >> Replace front door outside handle grip.
PASSENGER SIDE
B

Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. C
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition D
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle F
JSMIA1507GB
118 G
Intelligent Key
H
is inside the
vehicle

I
door is open
J
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
DLK
JSMIA1507GB
119
L
Intelligent Key
is inside the M
vehicle
JSMIA1506GB
N
NO >> GO TO 2. O
P
2. Disconnect BCM connector and front door outside handle assembly (passenger side) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door outside handle assembly (passenger
side) harness connector.
DLK-511
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Front door outside handle assembly (passenger

BCM
side) Continuity
118 2
M86 D34 Existed
119 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
118
M86 Not existed
119
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Connect BCM connector and front door outside handle assembly (passenger side) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JSMIA1507GB
118
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle

door is open
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JSMIA1507GB
119
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle
JSMIA1506GB
DLK-512
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
YES >> Replace front door outside handle grip. A
REAR BUMPER
B
REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717574
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 C

(+) D
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E
Intelligent Key
is outside the F
vehicle
JMMIA1652GB
G
21
H
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle
I
door is open J
Intelligent Key
is outside the
DLK
vehicle
JSMIA1507GB
24 L
Intelligent Key M
is inside the
vehicle
N
JSMIA1506GB

YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". O
NO >> GO TO 2.
P
2. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) harness con-
nector.
DLK-513
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
BCM Outside key antenna (rear bumper)

Continuity
21 2
B47 B32 Existed
24 1
BCM
Connector Terminal Continuity
Ground
21
B47 Not existed
24
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JMMIA1652GB
21
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle

door is open
Intelligent Key
is outside the
vehicle
JSMIA1507GB
24
Intelligent Key
is inside the
vehicle
JSMIA1506GB

DLK-514
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
YES >> Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper).
DLK
DLK-515
FRONT DOOR LOCK
1.CHECK FUSE

Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M85 143 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M85 Existed
147
REAR DOOR LOCK
1.CHECK FUSE

Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-516
A
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
M85 151 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M85 Existed F
147
H
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717577
1.CHECK FUSIBLE LINK AND CIRCUIT BREAKER I

Check that the following fuse and circuit breaker are not fusing.
Fusible link No. Signal name

J
R9M engine models T (30A)
Battery power supply
Except for R9M engine models J (30A)
Is the fuse fusing? DLK
YES >> Replace the blown fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
2. Disconnect automatic back door control unit connector. M
3. Check voltage between automatic back door control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage N
Automatic back door control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B25 25 Ground 13.6 V O
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check continuity between automatic back door control unit harness connector and ground.
DLK-517

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
B24 16
Existed
B25 32
DLK-518
TOUCH SENSOR
TOUCH SENSOR
A
RH
RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010717578
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “AUTO BACK DOOR” using CONSULT. C
D
TOUCH SEN RH Touch sensor RH E
YES >> Touch sensor RH is OK. F
NO >> Refer to DLK-519, "RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
G
2. Disconnect touch sensor RH connector. H
3. Check voltage between touch sensor RH harness connector and ground.
(+) I
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D175 1 Ground 6.1 V J

YES >> GO TO 3. DLK
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit connector. L
ness connector.
M
Continuity
B24 1 D175 1 Existed N
Automatic back door control unit O

Continuity
B24 1 Not existed
P
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and touch sensor LH connector.
DLK-519
TOUCH SENSOR
ness connector.

Continuity

Continuity
B24 13 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
Refer to DLK-520, "RH : Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

RH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010717580

2. Disconnect touch sensor RH connector.
Touch sensor RH Resistance

Condition
Terminal (Approx.)

1 2 Touch sensor RH
LH
LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010717581
1.CHECK FUNCTION

DLK-520
TOUCH SENSOR
YES >> Touch sensor LH is OK. A
NO >> Refer to DLK-521, "LH : Diagnosis Procedure".
B
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
3. Check voltage between touch sensor LH harness connector and ground.
(+) D
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E
D174 1 Ground 6.1 V
YES >> GO TO 3. F
NO >> GO TO 2.
G
ness connector.
H
Continuity
I
J
Continuity
B24 2 Not existed DLK
1. Disconnect automatic back door control unit and touch sensor RH connector. M
ness connector.

N
Continuity
O
Automatic back door control unit P

Continuity
B24 13 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
DLK-521
TOUCH SENSOR

Refer to DLK-522, "LH : Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

LH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010717583


Condition
Terminal (Approx.)

1 2 Touch sensor LH
DLK-522
SPINDLE MOTOR
SPINDLE MOTOR
A
RH
B
2. Disconnect spindle unit RH connector. C
(+) D
Voltage
Spindle unit RH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E
Auto open op-
12 V
eration
1
Auto close op-
eration G
JMKIB2776ZZ
B29 Ground Back door H
Auto close op-
13.4 V
eration
2
Auto open op-
eration J
JMKIB2776ZZ
DLK
YES >> Replace spindle unit RH.
NO >> GO TO 2. L
M
connector.
Automatic back door control unit Spindle unit RH N

Continuity
29 1
B25 B29 Existed O
36 2
P
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
29
B25 Not existed
36
DLK-523
SPINDLE MOTOR
LH

(+)
Voltage
Spindle unit LH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Auto open op-
12 V
eration
1
Auto close op-
eration
JMKIB2776ZZ
B38 Ground Back door
Auto close op-
13.4 V
eration
2
Auto open op-
eration
JMKIB2776ZZ

YES >> Replace spindle unit LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
ness connector.

Continuity
27 1
B25 B38 Existed
34 2

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
27
B25 Not existed
34
DLK-524
SPINDLE MOTOR
A
DLK
DLK-525
UNLOCK SENSOR
UNLOCK SENSOR
1.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground with oscillo-
scope.
(+)
Connector Terminal
D9 3 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
M86 104 Not existed

Continuity
D9 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
DLK-526
UNLOCK SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END A
B
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector. C

Condition Continuity D
Terminal
Unlock Existed
3 4 Driver door
Lock Not existed E
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side). F
DLK
DLK-527
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Refer to DLK-384, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key Sys-
tem, Without Super Lock)".
YES >> GO TO 2
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-528
A
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B

3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Lock)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM E
Is the result normal? F
G
DLK
DLK-529
ALL SWITCHES
ALL SWITCHES : Description INFOID:0000000010717588
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using all switches.
ALL SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717589

YES >> GO TO 2.
Check automatic back door control unit power supply and ground circuit.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION
Check back door auto closure function.
Does back door auto closure function operate with back door opener switch?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Refer to DLK-538, "OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure".
Check automatic back door main switch.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR
Check touch sensor.
Refer to DLK-520, "LH : Component Function Check" (LH) and DLK-519, "RH :
Component Function Check" (RH).
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SPINDLE MOTOR
Check spindle motor.
Refer to DLK-524, "LH : Diagnosis Procedure" (LH) and DLK-523, "RH : Diagnosis Procedure" (RH).
YES >> GO TO 7.
DLK-530
A
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010717590
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using automatic back door switch. B
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717591
1.CHECK AUTO CLOSE FUNCTION C

Check auto close function using automatic back door close switch or Intelligent Key button operation.
D
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH E
Check automatic back door switch.
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT G
H
I
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010717592
J
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using automatic back door close switch.
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717593
DLK
Check auto open/close function using automatic back door switch. L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-530, "ALL SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure". M
Check automatic back door close switch.
Refer to DLK-468, "Component Function Check". N
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. O
1. Replace automatic back door control unit. Refer to DLK-633, "Removal and Installation". P
INTELLIGENT KEY
DLK-531
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using Intelligent Key.

Check remote keyless entry function.
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010717596
Automatic back door open/close function does not operate using back door opener switch.
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717597

YES >> GO TO 2.
Check back door opener switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-532
A
DLK
DLK-533
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR HANDS FREE FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR HANDS FREE FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
1.RECONNECT BATTERY
1. Remove battery negative terminal.
2. Reconnect battery negative terminal.
3. Confirm the hands free function operation.
NO >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check auto open/close using Intelligent Key button operation.
Does auto open/close function operate with Intelligent Key button?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Refer to DLK-532, "INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure".
4.CHECK HANDS FREE SENSOR
Check hands free sensor.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE HANDS FREE SENSOR
1. Replace hands free sensor.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE BCM
NO >> GO TO 7.
DLK-534
A
BUZZER
BUZZER : Description INFOID:0000000010717599
B
Automatic back door warning buzzer does not operate when automatic back door warning function are per-
formed.
BUZZER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717600
C

D
Check automatic back door warning buzzer.
E
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT F
H
DLK
DLK-535
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH

Check automatic door main switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
DLK-536
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT B

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR LH D
Check touch sensor LH.
Refer to DLK-520, "LH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TOUCH SENSOR RH F
Check touch sensor RH.
Refer to DLK-519, "RH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 4.
H
DLK
DLK-537
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description INFOID:0000000010717606
Back door auto closure function does not operate when back door opening and closing operations are per-
formed.
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717607

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OPEN SWITCH
Check open switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CLOSE SWITCH
Check close switch.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR
Check back door closure motor.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 7.
DLK-538
CLOSURE FUNCTION
A
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description INFOID:0000000010717608
Back door auto closure function does not operate when back door closing operations are performed. B
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717609
1.CHECK HALF LATCH SWITCH C

YES >> GO TO 2.
E
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. F
NO >> GO TO 3. G
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. H
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". I
DLK
DLK-539
SWITCH
ALL DOOR

LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door).
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
FRONT DOOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-540
YES >> INSPECTION END A
REAR DOOR
B
C
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT D

Refer to DLK-516, "REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR F
Check rear door lock actuator.

G
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000010717616 DLK
Driver door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717617 L

Check front door lock actuator (driver door). M
YES >> GO TO 2. N
2.REPLACE BCM O
Is the result normal? P
PASSENGER SIDE
Passenger door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
DLK-541

Check front door lock actuator (passenger door).
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR LH
Rear LH door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

Check rear door lock actuator LH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR RH
Rear RH door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

Check rear door lock actuator RH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-542
A
DLK
DLK-543
DOOR KEY CYLINDER

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-544
A
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description INFOID:0000000010717624
B
All doors do not lock/unlock using all door request switches.
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717625
C
Check door lock/unlock using Intelligent Key button operation. D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-547, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
2.CHECK “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
2. Select “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. F
3. Check “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Lock)". G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “On” in “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY”. H
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-495, "Component Function Check". I
YES >> GO TO 4.
J
Check inside key antenna. DLK
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA M
Check outside key antenna.
• Driver door : Refer to DLK-509, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Passenger door : Refer to DLK-511, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". N
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-513, "REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 6. O
6.REPLACE BCM
P
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DLK-545
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010717626
All doors do not lock/unlock using front door request switch (driver door).
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717627

Check front door request switch (driver door).
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check outside key antenna (driver door).
Refer to DLK-509, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010717628
All doors do not lock/unlock using front door request switch (passenger door).
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010717629
1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Check front door request switch (passenger door).
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check outside key antenna (passenger door).
Refer to DLK-511, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-546
A
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY B

For Intelligent Key that cannot be used for door lock and unlock, check that the Intelligent Key belongs to the
vehicle to be checked.
Does the Intelligent Key belong to the vehicle to checked? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check Intelligent Key button operation with registered Intelligent Key belonging to the vehicle.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING D
Check that the Intelligent Key low battery warning is operated.

Is the Intelligent Key low battery warning operated? E
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 >> With another registered Intelligent Key: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without another registered Intelligent Key: GO TO 4. F
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BUTTON OPERATION
Check that door lock and unlock can be performed by operating the buttons of another registered Intelligent
Key. G
Can door lock and unlock be performed with another registered Intelligent Key?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 7. H
4.CHECK ENGINE START
While depressing the brake pedal, contact the backside of the Intelligent Key that cannot be used to perform I
door lock and unlock operation to the push-button ignition switch. Operate the push-button ignition switch, and
check that the vehicle is in START status.
Is the vehicle in START status? J
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY DLK
Check the inside of the Intelligent Key for rust or corrosion by water. Simultaneously check the internal circuits
for damage.
Is the vehicle in START status? L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key.
6.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY M
Check the Intelligent Key battery.

N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery. O
Does door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch? P
YES >> GO TO 8.
DLK-547
DLK-548
A
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK FUNCTION B

Check door lock using door request switch.
Does door lock with door request switch?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-545, "ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER D
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM F
H
DLK
DLK-549
HAZARD LAMP OPERATES WHEN AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR IS OPERATED
HAZARD LAMP OPERATES WHEN AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR IS OPERAT-
ED
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT

Check automatic back door control unit ground circuit.
YES >> GO TO 2.
Replace automatic back door control unit.
Refer to DLK-633, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
DLK-550
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER B

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INFORMATION DISPLAY D

YES >> GO TO 3.
Check Intelligent Key battery.
Refer to DLK-504, "Component Inspection". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check inside key antenna. I
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM DLK
Is the result normal? L
M
DLK-551
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE BCM
DLK-552
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INFORMATION DISPLAY D

YES >> GO TO 3.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-460, "DTC Description". G
YES >> GO TO 4. H
4.REPLACE BCM
I
Is the result normal? J
DLK
DLK-553
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check back door switch.
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DLK-554
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH D

Refer to DLK-495, "Component Function Check". E
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer. I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". DLK
L
DLK-555
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM, TCM AND COMBINATION METER

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM, TCM and combination meter.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-2 >> Refer to TM-288, "DTC Index". (TCM)
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
DLK-556
A
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010754993
B
Reminder function does not operate using door request switch.
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010754994
C
Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter. D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index". (BCM) E
Check hazard function. F
YES >> GO TO 3. G
3.REPLACE BCM H
Is the result normal? I
INTELLIGENT KEY J
Reminder function does not operate using Intelligent Key. DLK
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-2 >> Refer to MWI-105, "DTC Index". (Combination meter) N
Refer to DLK-502, "Component Function Check". O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. P
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-557

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
DLK-558
A

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

DLK
DLK-559
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
defining the noise.
DLK-560
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
B
vehicle body.
porarily. G
noise.
REPAIR THE CAUSE
I
CAUTION:
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
• SILICONE GREASE
• SILICONE SPRAY
• DUCT TAPE P
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
DLK-561
INSTRUMENT PANEL
ness.
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
repair the noise.
TRUNK
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
DLK-562
SEATS
the noise.
UNDERHOOD
H
I
DLK
DLK-563
PIIB8740E
DLK-564
DLK
PIIB8742E
DLK-565
HOOD

HOOD
JMKIB2689ZZ

: Pawl
: Body grease
HOOD ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING:
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-566
HOOD
ment".
B
: Inspection".
C
apply grease. D
: Body grease
E
JMKIB2933ZZ
G
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
H
DLK
DLK-567
HOOD
JMKIB2934GB

Hood lock assembly
: Vehicle front
: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-568
HOOD
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
MAX)
7.2 – 11.2 B
[0.283 – 0.441]
Hood – 7.0 – 11.0
2.5 – 4.5
[0.098 – 0.177] D
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
ber.
I
JMKIB3498ZZ
DLK
tion".
HOOD HINGE M
N
REMOVAL
JMKIB2955ZZ
DLK-569
HOOD
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
hinge.
ment".
: Inspection".
HOOD SUPPORT ROD
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING:
assembly.
INSTALLATION
RADIATOR CORE SEAL
REMOVAL
JMKIB2956ZZ

CAUTION:
: Clip
JMKIB2957ZZ

INSTALLATION
DLK-570
HOOD
HOOD INSULATOR A
B
REMOVAL
C
: Clip
JMKIB0387ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-571
MR20DD
MR20DD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010728113
JMKIB2691GB

MR20DD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728114

Removal
"Exploded View".
DLK-572
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3006ZZ
D
E
: Vehicle front
G
JMKIB3005ZZ

8. Remove hood lock support stay mounting bolts, and then move hood lock support stay to a location where H
it does not inhibit work.
10. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support upper. I
Installation
J
Removal
DLK
2. Remove air lower guide fixing clips, and then remove air lower guide.
3. Use belts (A) to suspend radiator and condenser to prevent L
CAUTION:
M
JMKIB3007ZZ
O
Installation P
QR25DE
DLK-573
QR25DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010728115
JMKIB2691GB

QR25DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728116

Removal
"Exploded View".
DLK-574
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3006ZZ
D
E
: Vehicle front
G
JMKIB3005ZZ

Installation
J
Removal
DLK
3. Remove CVT fluid cooler lower bracket mounting bolt and CVT fluid cooler tube bracket mounting bolts (if L
equipped). Refer to TM-441, "QR25DE : Exploded View".
CAUTION: M
JMKIB3007ZZ
5. Remove radiator core support lower mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower. P
Installation
R9M
DLK-575
JMKIB3660GB


Removal
"Exploded View".
DLK-576
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3661ZZ
D
E
: Vehicle front
G
JMKIB3662ZZ

: Vehicle front
I
JMKIB3005ZZ
DLK
Installation M
N
Removal
DLK-577
CAUTION:
JMKIB3663ZZ

CAUTION:
JMKIB3664ZZ
Installation
DLK-578
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
A
I
JMKIB3665ZZ

: Pawl
DLK
FRONT FENDER
REMOVAL
tion". N
DLK-579
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3666ZZ

outside.
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5633ZZ

CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
bolts.
FENDER COVER
REMOVAL
DLK-580
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3008ZZ
F
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
CAUTION: G
with urethane etc.
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: I
DLK
DLK-581
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3502GB
Front door panel Grommet TORX bolt

Door striker Bumper rubber Bumper rubber
DLK-582
FRONT DOOR
Door check link Door hinge (lower) Door hinge (upper)
A
: Clip
: Pawl B

: Body grease
D
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL G
JMKIB3503ZZ DLK

JMKIB3504ZZ
O
INSTALLATION P
CAUTION:
ment".
DLK-583
FRONT DOOR
: Inspection".
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-584
FRONT DOOR
DLK
L
JMKIB3479GB

N

O
: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-585
FRONT DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.0 – 5.0
H Clearance
[0.118 – 0.197]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
I Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
K Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

sion.
CAUTION:
nuts.
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Inspection".
DOOR HINGE
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
INSTALLATION
DLK-586
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION: A
ment".
B
: Inspection".
DOOR CHECK LINK C
D
REMOVAL
F
G
JMKIB3505ZZ
INSTALLATION J
CAUTION:
Inspection".
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
L
REMOVAL
M
N
P
JMKIB0401ZZ
DLK-587
FRONT DOOR
: Clip
JMKIB0402ZZ
CAUTION:
JMKIB3506ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3507ZZ
DLK-588
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3508ZZ
F
: Pawl

INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-589
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
JMKIB3509GB
Rear door panel Grommet TORX bolt

Door striker Bumper rubber Child lock lever cover
DLK-590
REAR DOOR
A
: Clip
: Pawl B

: Body grease
D
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL G
H
J
JMKIB3510ZZ
JMKIB3511ZZ
N
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
ment".
: Inspection".
DLK-591
REAR DOOR
: Body grease
JMKIB0329ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-592
REAR DOOR
DLK
L
JMKIB3479GB

N

O
: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-593
REAR DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
K Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.0 – 5.0
L Clearance
[0.118 – 0.197]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
M Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

and Installation".
CAUTION:
nuts.
Installation".
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Inspection".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
and Installation".
DLK-594
REAR DOOR
A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
and nuts.
: Inspection".
D
DOOR CHECK LINK
E
REMOVAL
G
JMKIB3512ZZ
INSTALLATION DLK
CAUTION:
Inspection".
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
M
REMOVAL
N
O
JMKIB0410ZZ
DLK-595
REAR DOOR
: Clip
JMKIB0411ZZ
CAUTION:
JMKIB3513ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3514ZZ
DLK-596
REAR DOOR
JMKIB3515ZZ
F
: Pawl

G
JMKIB3516ZZ
J
DLK
O
JMKIB3517ZZ
: Pawl P
INSTALLATION
DLK-597
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3683GB
Back door hinge Back door weather-strip Bumper rubber

Wedge bracket Back door wedge Back door striker
TORX bolt Back door panel Plug
Stud ball Back door damper
: Center mark
: Seam
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
DLK-598
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
B
: Vehicle front
D
JMKIB3115ZZ

ing clips .
: Vehicle front F
JMKIB3116ZZ H
I
DLK
JMKIB3117ZZ
: Vehicle front M
JMKIB3118ZZ
O
DLK-599
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3119ZZ
Installation".
body.
JMKIB3120ZZ
WARNING:
back door stay.
11. Remove spindle unit from back door. Refer to DLK-620, "SPINDLE UNIT : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
ward lightly.
DLK-600
BACK DOOR
: Body grease
B
JMKIB3113ZZ
D
DLK
JMKIB3480GB

DLK-601
BACK DOOR
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
MAX)
5.0 – 9.0
D Clearance —
[0.197 – 0.354]
(−3.0) – (+1.0)
[(−0.118) – (+0.039)]
3.0 – 7.0 <2.0
[0.118 – 0.276] [0.079]
panel –
(−3.0) – (+1.0)
[(−0.118) – (+0.039)]
– H Clearance —
fascia [0.217 – 0.374]
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
MAX)
5.1 – 9.1
D Clearance —
[0.201 – 0.358]
(−2.0) – (+2.0)
[(−0.079) – (+0.079)]
2.5 – 6.5 <2.0
[0.098 – 0.256] [0.079]
panel –
(−3.3) – (+0.7)
[(−0.130) – (+0.028)]
– H Clearance —
fascia [0.224 – 0.382]

DLK-602
BACK DOOR
CAUTION:
B
CAUTION:
C
• After adjusting, perform calibration of automatic back door position information (with automatic
back door). Refer to DLK-427, "Work Procedure". D
"CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure" (with navigation).
BACK DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT E
BACK DOOR STRIKER
F
REMOVAL G
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed. I
Adjustment".
• After installation, check that door opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-600, "BACK DOOR J
BACK DOOR HINGE
DLK
REMOVAL
L
2. Remove back door hinge cover. Refer to EXT-46, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove back door hinge mounting nuts of vehicle body side, and then remove back door hinge. M
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: N
Adjustment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts. O
P
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
DLK-603
BACK DOOR
INSTALLATION
tion mark and install weather-strip onto the vehicle .
JMKIB3151ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3152ZZ
: Vehicle front
3. Pull back door weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section.
CAUTION:
DLK-604
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
A
J
JMKIB3484GB
Hood lock assembly Hood lock bell crank assembly Hood lock control cable assembly DLK
Hood lock control handle assembly
Cable clip
L
: Body grease
M
HOOD LOCK
N
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect hood lock switch harness connector (if equipped). O
: Vehicle front
P
JMKIB2974ZZ
DLK-605
HOOD LOCK
CRANK : Removal and Installation".
assembly according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by
JMKIB3486ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
tion".
NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
JMKIB3518ZZ

JMKIB3499ZZ
DLK-606
HOOD LOCK
JMKIB3549ZZ
D
Primary latch
E
F
: Body grease
JMKIB2979ZZ
I

J
: Body grease
DLK
JMKIB2980ZZ
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE M
N
REMOVAL
2. Remove hood lock control cable from hood opener lever O
P
JMKIB0324ZZ
DLK-607
HOOD LOCK
OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
1. Remove air duct 1. Refer to EM-31, "Removal and Installation" (MR20DD) or EM-175, "Removal and
Installation" (QR25DE) or EM-308, "Removal and Installation" (R9M).
3. Remove fender protector LH. Refer to EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
6. Remove dash side finisher LH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
JMKIA5814ZZ
tion".
REMOVAL
DLK-608
HOOD LOCK
bracket of hood lock assembly according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in A
the figure.
JMKIB2981ZZ F
: Pawl
: Vehicle front G
H
DLK
JMKIB2982ZZ
: Vehicle front M
INSTALLATION N
CAUTION:
After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-606, "HOOD LOCK : Inspection". O
DLK-609
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3519GB
Outside handle escutcheon Rear gasket TORX bolt

Key rod (driver side) Door lock assembly Cable clip
Inside handle Outside handle bracket Front gasket
Outside handle grip
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
DLE : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
DLK-610
FRONT DOOR LOCK
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed. A
routed normally.
B
C
3. Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body D
: Body grease E
JMKIA8534ZZ G
INSIDE HANDLE
H
REMOVAL
I
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Disengage inside handle from door panel while sliding J
dle.
DLK
: Pawl
JMKIB3520ZZ M
4. Disengage lock knob cable and inside handle cable from
inside handle according to the numerical order 1→4 indicated
by arrows as shown in the figure. N
P
JMKIB3521ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-611
FRONT DOOR LOCK
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
JMKIB3522ZZ
: Vehicle front
6. Disconnect door harness connector and disengage outside handle harness connector fixing clip .
JMKIB3688ZZ
: Clip
: Vehicle front
DLK-612
FRONT DOOR LOCK
7. Disengage rod holder and disconnect key rod from door lock assembly according to the numerical
order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure (driver side). A
JMKIB3523ZZ
F
: Vehicle front
G
DLK
JMKIB3524ZZ
9. Remove outside handle escutcheon while pulling outside L

M
JMKIA8374ZZ O
DLK-613
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
it.
: Vehicle front
JMKIB2034ZZ

JMKIB3525ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
routed normally.
DLK-614
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
I
JMKIB3526GB
Outside handle escutcheon Rear gasket TORX bolt J

Door lock assembly Inside handle Outside handle bracket
Front gasket Outside handle grip
DLK
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Always replace after every disassembly. L
: Body grease M
DOOR LOCK
N
REMOVAL
O
Removal and Installation". P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-615
REAR DOOR LOCK
routed normally.
: Body grease
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
dle.
: Pawl
JMKIB3527ZZ

JMKIB3521ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
DLK-616
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
REMOVAL
B
4. Remove sealing screen and rear door lower sash. Refer to GW-52, "REAR DOOR LOWER SASH : C
D
H
JMKIB3528ZZ

handle grip according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated I
DLK
JMKIB2479ZZ
L
shown in the figure. M
O
JMKIA0524ZZ
DLK-617
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front

it.
: Vehicle front
JMKIB2034ZZ

JMKIB3525ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
routed normally.
DLK-618
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
I
JMKIB3552GB
Back door panel Spindle unit Back door stay upper bracket J
Double-sided tape Back door lock & remote control as-
Back door touch sensor
[t: 1.2 mm (0.047 in)] sembly
: Always replace after every disassembly. DLK
: Body grease L
, , : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
DOOR LOCK M
REMOVAL N
2. Disconnect back door lock & remote control assembly harness connector. O
3. Remove back door lock & remote control assembly mounting bolts, and then remove back door lock &
remote control assembly from back door panel.
INSTALLATION P
CAUTION:
DLK-619
BACK DOOR LOCK
: Body grease
JMKIB1220ZZ
UNLOCK PROCEDURES
NOTE:
Release lock according to the following procedures when lock cannot be unlocked due to a malfunction of
door lock assembly or battery discharge.
unlocked by operating knob of cancel lever in the direction of arrow as shown in the figure.
JMKIB3161ZZ
: Vehicle front
SPINDLE UNIT
SPINDLE UNIT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728167
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-139, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove luggage side upper finisher. Refer to INT-45, "LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation".
DLK-620
BACK DOOR LOCK
3. Disconnect spindle unit harness connector.
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3153ZZ
D
4. Remove harness grommet from back main center pillar ,
and then pull out spindle unit harness from vehicle body.
E
G
JMKIB3154ZZ
H
WARNING:
back door stay.
6. Apply protective tape (A) to back door touch sensor around spin- I
dle unit for preventing damage.
DLK
L
JMKIB3155ZZ

stay and stud ball using a remover tool (A) according to the M
JMKIA2255ZZ
P
8. Disengage spindle unit and stud ball of back door side.
9. Remove back door stay upper bracket mounting bolts, and then remove spindle unit with back door stay
upper bracket.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-621
BACK DOOR LOCK
• Perform calibration of automatic back door position information. Refer to DLK-427, "Work Proce-
dure".
• After installation, check back door lock. Refer to DLK-619, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection".
TOUCH SENSOR
TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728168
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect back door touch sensor harness connector .
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3156ZZ
3. Remove spindle unit of back door side.

4. Remove back door touch sensor fixing clips, and then remove back door touch sensor while tearing off
double-sided tape.
5. Remove harness grommet from back door panel , and then
pull out back door touch sensor harness from back door panel
and remove back door touch sensor .
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3157ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Before installing, remove double-sided tape remaining on back door touch sensor and back door
panel neatly.
• When installing, apply primer for resin to double-sided tape sticking point of back door touch sensor
and back door panel.
• After installing, check that there is no clearance between back door touch sensor and back door
panel.
• After installing, check that back door turns over normally by back door touch sensor.
DLK-622
A
DLK
JMKIB3488ZZ
P
: Clip
: Pawl
DLK-623
FUEL FILLER LID
REMOVAL
JMKIB3183ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
NOTE:
Unit: mm [in]
Clearance Evenness
2.5 – 4.5 (−1.0) – (+1.0)
[0.098 – 0.177] [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
REMOVAL
NOTE:
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
JMKIB1094ZZ
DLK-624
4. Disengage fuel filler lid opener cable and remove fuel filler lid
opener cable while pressing stopper pin according to the A
JMKIA5719ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: E
F
REMOVAL
G
2. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid opener H
I
JMKIA5901ZZ DLK
3. Remove kicking plate inner LH and rear kicking plate inner (LH and RH). Refer to INT-24, "KICKING
PLATE : Removal and Installation".
L
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish LH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
M
LOCK : Removal and Installation". N
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
DLK-625
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
door switch .
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-626
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010717717
B
REMOVAL
C
2. Disconnect inside key antenna (instrument center) harness connector.
3. Remove inside key antenna (instrument center) mounting clip
, and then remove inside key antenna (instrument center) . D
JMKIB2755ZZ
G
INSTALLATION
LUGGAGE ROOM H
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010717718
I
REMOVAL
3 Seat Rows
1. Remove rear seat. Refer to SE-54, "Removal and Installation". J
and then remove inside key antenna (luggage room) . DLK
JMKIB2756ZZ
N
2 Seat Rows
1. Remove luggage floor board. Refer to INT-40, "Exploded View".
O
DLK-627
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
and then remove inside key antenna (luggage room) .
JMKIB3602ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-628
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010717719
B
REMOVAL
Remove outside handle grip. Refer to DLK-612, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
C
INSTALLATION
REAR BUMPER D
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010717720
REMOVAL E

2. Disconnect outside key antenna (rear bumper) harness connector.
F
3. Remove the outside key antenna (rear bumper) mounting clip ,
and then remove outside key antenna (rear bumper) .
G
I
JMKIB2757ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. J
DLK
DLK-629
REMOVAL
1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector.
3. Remove Intelligent Key warning buzzer mounting bolt , and
then remove Intelligent Key warning buzzer .
JMKIB2758ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-630
A
1. Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key. B
2. Insert remover tool (A) wrapped with a cloth into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. C
CAUTION:
• Never touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
PIIB6221E
F
Battery replacement :Coin-type lithium battery G

(CR2032)
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts, and then push them H
together until it is securely closed.
CAUTION:
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other for-
eign materials off the electrode contact area. I
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key
functions work normally.
J
PIIB6222E DLK
DLK-631
REMOVAL
2. Remove back door lock assembly. Refer to DLK-619, "DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect back door opener switch assembly harness connector.
4. Remove switch cover mounting screw .
JMKIB2751ZZ
5. Remove grommet , and then remove switch cover .
JMKIB2752ZZ
6. Press toward outside (in the direction shown by arrow) and then
remove back door opener switch assembly .
JMKIB2753ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-632
A
REMOVAL B
1. For 3 seat row models: Remove third seat. Refer to SE-70, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove luggage side lower finisher LH. Refer to INT-43, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation". C
3. Disconnect automatic back door control unit harness connector.
4. Remove the automatic back door control unit mounting bolt ,
and then remove the automatic back door control unit . D
JMKIB2759ZZ
G
INSTALLATION
NOTE: H
After installing automatic back door control unit, perform additional service when replace control unit. Refer to
DLK-426, "Work Procedure".
DLK
DLK-633
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
the instrument lower panel LH .
JMKIB3603ZZ
3. Remove automatic back door main switch from the switch

bracket.
: Pawl
JMKIB3604ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-634
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
the instrument lower panel LH . C
JMKIB3603ZZ
F
3. Remove automatic back door switch from the switch bracket.
: Pawl G
I
JMKIB3605ZZ
INSTALLATION J
DLK
DLK-635
REMOVAL
1. Remove automatic back door close switch and switch finisher
using a remover tool.
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape on the part to protect it from damage.
JMKIB2761ZZ
2. Disconnect automatic back door close switch harness connector.

3. Remove automatic back door close switch from automatic
back door close switch finisher using flat-bladed screwdriver
(A).
: Pawl
JMKIA6045ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-636
A
REMOVAL B
2. Disconnect automatic back door warning buzzer harness connector.
C
3. Remove the automatic back door warning buzzer mounting
nuts , and then remove automatic back door warning buzzer .
F
JMKIB2784ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-637
HANDS FREE SENSOR
HANDS FREE SENSOR
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect hands free sensor harness connector.
3. Remove the hands free sensor mounting nuts , and then
remove hands free sensor .
JMKIB2843ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-638
APPLICATION NOTICE
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL A

APPLICATION NOTICE
B
Destination C
Service information
D
Type 4 LHD Without Without E
DLK
DLK-639
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
connectors.
WARNING:
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
windshield.
PIIB3706J
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010708330
When disconnecting the battery terminal, pay attention to the following.

• Always use a 12V battery as power source.
• Never disconnect battery terminal while engine is running.
DLK-640
PRECAUTIONS
• When removing the 12V battery terminal, turn OFF the ignition
switch and wait at least 30 seconds. A
• For vehicles with the engine listed below, remove the battery termi-
nal after a lapse of the specified time:
B
D4D engine : 20 minutes ZD30DDTi : 60 seconds
HRA2DDT : 12 minutes ZD30DDTT : 60 seconds
K9K engine : 4 minutes
C
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
SEF289H
V9X engine : 4 minutes
D
YD25DDTi : 2 minutes
NOTE:
ECU may be active for several tens of seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. If the battery terminal E
is removed before ECU stops, then a DTC detection error or ECU data corruption may occur.
• After high-load driving, if the vehicle is equipped with the V9X engine, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait
for at least 15 minutes to remove the battery terminal.
NOTE: F
• Turbocharger cooling pump may operate in a few minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
• Example of high-load driving
- Driving for 30 minutes or more at 140 km/h (86 MPH) or more. G
- Driving for 30 minutes or more on a steep slope.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main battery and the sub battery before turning ON
the ignition switch.
NOTE: H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of main battery and sub battery discon-
nected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC. I
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
Work INFOID:0000000010708331 J
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operational. DLK
DLK-641
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000010708332
Tool name Description
Engine ear Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
Remover tool Remove the clips, pawls, and metal clips
PIIB7923J
Power tool
PIIB1407E
DLK-642
COMPONENT PARTS
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010708333
B
JMKIB2953ZZ DLK
View with door opened View with back door panel

L
Rear door lock assembly RH DLK-644, "Door Lock Assembly"
M
Front door lock assembly (driver side) DLK-644, "Door Lock Assembly"
DLK-644, "Door Lock and Unlock Switch"
and unlock switch) N
Ignition key cylinder (key switch) DLK-645, "Ignition Key Cylinder"
Combination meter O
BCM detects the vehicle status according to signals from each door switch. BCM
transmits drive signal to door lock actuator when BCM receives operation signal
BCM from remote keyless entry receiver (integrated in BCM). P
DLK-644, "Door Lock Assembly"
side)
Rear door lock assembly LH DLK-644, "Door Lock Assembly"
Back door lock assembly DLK-644, "Back Door Lock Assembly"
DLK-643
COMPONENT PARTS
Door switch DLK-645, "Door Switch"
Back door opener switch assembly DLK-644, "Back Door Opener Switch Assembly"
Back Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010708334
• Back door lock assembly integrates back door opener actuator and back door switch.
• Back door opener actuator opens the back door according to the back door open signal from BCM.
• Back door switch detects open/close status of back door.
JMKIB2941ZZ
Back Door Opener Switch Assembly INFOID:0000000010708335
• Back door opener switch assembly integrates back door opener switch.
• Back door opener switch detects open operation of back door and transmits back door opener switch signal
to BCM.
• Back door opener switch assembly is installed in the back door
panel.
JMKIA9666ZZ
Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010708336
locks/unlocks door.
to BCM.
JMKIA9347ZZ
Door Lock and Unlock Switch INFOID:0000000010708337
DLK-644
COMPONENT PARTS
• Driver side door lock and unlock switch is integrated in the
power window main switch. A
JMKIA9352ZZ
D
E
G
JMKIB1506ZZ
H
Door Switch INFOID:0000000010708338

I
DLK
JMKIA9779ZZ
L
Ignition Key Cylinder INFOID:0000000010708339
• Key switch is installed in ignition key cylinder.

• Key switch detects ignition key or keyfob is inserted in ignition key M
cylinder, and then transmits key insertion status to BCM.
JMKIB0273ZZ
P
DLK-645
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB2435GB
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

• The door lock and unlock switches are built into power window main switch and front power window switch
(passenger side).
locked.
unlocked.
Unlock Sensor
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position once
CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System, With Super Lock)".
Operation Condition
and unlock switch.

• Doors are not locked by keyfob and auto door lock function
LOCK/UNLOCK

• While ignition key is inserted in ignition key cylinder and driver door is open, door is not locked when door
lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction. This prevents keyfob from being left in the vehicle.
• While door lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction, combination meter buzzer sounds and
warns.
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state, refer to INL-11, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description"
OVERRIDE FUNCTION
DLK-646
lock becomes invalid and the door is open. A
Unlock function operates when driver door is open while all of the following conditions are satisfied. B

• Driver side door switch is switched from OFF to ON C
Operation condition
NOTE:
D
The door lock status indicator indicates door lock status under the following condition. E
Indicator operation Ignition position Door status Lock operation

All doors are closed and door F
ON (30 minutes timer) OFF Door lock and unlock switch
is locked
ON ON Door lock and unlock switch
is locked
G
ON (1 minute timer) OFF switch or auto door lock func-
is locked
tion
H
ON ON switch or auto door lock func-
is locked
tion
(All doors are closed → any I
door is open) or (All doors are
ON → OFF – –
locked → any door is un-
locked)
J
ON (timer is running) → ON
OFF → ON – –
(timer is stop)
ON → ON (30 minutes timer) ON → OFF – Door lock and unlock switch DLK
ON → ON (1 minute timer) ON → OFF – switch or auto door lock func-
tion
L
DLK-647
JMKIB3731GB
DLK-648
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
A
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
B
System Diagram
C
JMKIB3686GB
G
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK OPERATION

• When door lock and unlock button of keyfob is pressed, door lock and unlock signal transmits from keyfob to H
BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• When BCM receives the door lock and unlock signal, it operates door lock actuator, brinks the hazard lamp
at the same time as a reminder.
I
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the keyfob is operated.
J
Remote controller operation Operation condition
• Key switch is off
Lock
DLK
Unlock Key switch is off
OPERATION AREA
To ensure that the keyfob works effectively, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each door, however the operable L
range may differ according to surroundings.
Information of super lock function with anti-hijack function. M
REMINDER FUNCTION
N
When doors are locked or unlocked by keyfob button operation, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a
reminder.
Door lock operation O

(With keyfob button)
Lock Once
P
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

After door is unlocked by keyfob button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing the fol-
lowing operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not activate.
DLK-649

Operating condition • Door is locked
• Key switch is ON
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-
659, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (With Super Lock)".
DLK-650
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010708343
DLK
JMKIB3732GB
P
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION
DLK-651
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010728213
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3687GB
• Super lock provides a higher anti-theft performance than a conventional door lock function.
• BCM controls the super lock system.
• When all doors are closed super lock system can be set/release by keyfob.
• When super lock is set, inside handle of doors do not work.
SUPER LOCK SET OPERATION (LOCK OPERATION)
When Keyfob lock button is operated while all doors are in unlock state, super lock of all doors is set, and
simultaneously, all doors are locked.
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITH ANTI-HIJACK MODE
When Keyfob unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is released,
and simultaneously, driver door are unlocked. When Keyfob unlock button is operated again, all doors are
unlocked.
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITHOUT ANTI-HIJACK MODE
When keyfob unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is released,
and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) CHANGE IGNITION SWITCH
Super Lock Release by Ignition Switch is Changed from OFF to ON
When the super lock is set, release super lock when the ignition switch is changed from OFF to ON.
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION SETTING
With CONSULT
Refer to DLK-658, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key Sys-
tem, With Super Lock)".
Without CONSULT
• ON/OFF can be switched when keyfob lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for 4 sec-
onds or more while steering lock is locked.
OFF → ON : 1 blinks
ON → OFF : 3 blink

DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that each door or trunk lid is open or is not fully closed.
DLK-652
Symbol Message A
–
C
D
JMKIB2780ZZ
SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP E

SYSTEM DIAGRAM F
JMKIB3593GB I
SIGNAL PATH
• When combination meter judges according to received door switch signal that a door is open or not fully J
DLK
All door switches are OFF L
TIMING CHART
O
JMKIB3594GB
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Key System Malfunction P

INFOID:0000000010708347
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that engine cannot be started.
DLK-653
Symbol Message
Key System Error

JMKIB1398ZZ

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3620GB
SIGNAL PATH
• When BCM detects that the engine cannot be started, meter display signal is transmitted by BCM to combi-
nation meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, key system malfunction displays.
The engine cannot be started.
• Engine non-start status is resolved.
INFOID:0000000010708348
Item Reference
Door open warning
Door Open Warning"
Key system malfunction
Key System Malfunction"
Item Reference
Refer to WCS-11, "WARNING CHIME : Key Warning Chime (Without Intelligent Key Sys-
Key warning chime
tem)".
DLK-654
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
JMKIA6011GB
BACK DOOR OPENER OPERATION G

When back door opener switch is pressed, BCM operates back door opener actuator.
NOTE:
Back door opener actuator is not for locking the back door. The function is only to open the back door. H
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, back door opener operation is performed.
I
• When back door opener switch is pressed while all doors are in unlock status.
Back door open J
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
NOTE:
• When battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected during all doors unlock state, back door may not
open. DLK
• Regardless of door lock actuator state, BCM resets recognition of all doors unlock state approximately 30
seconds after battery terminal is disconnected and BCM recognizes that all doors are in lock state.
• When battery terminal is reconnected and back door does not open, have BCM recognize that all doors are L
in unlock state.
DLK-655
JMKIB3600GB
DLK-656
A
COMMON ITEM
B
APPLICATION ITEM
C
D
Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
NOTE:
Diagnosis mode
I
DLK
M
NVIS - NATS IMMU ×
P
NOTE:
CONSULT.
DLK-657

NOTE:
VEHICLE COND —
NOTE:
POWER SUPPLY
COUNTER
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key
System, With Super Lock) INFOID:0000000010708351
WORK SUPPORT

Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
NOTE:
AUTO UNLOCK TYPE
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
KEY SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of key switch
ACTIVE TEST
DLK-658
Test item Description A

DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
B
This test is able to check super lock actuator operation
SUPER LOCK • The all door lock actuators are set when “LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are released when “UNLOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
C
This test is able to check door lock status indicator operation
DOOR LOCK IND • On: Operate
D
MULTI REMOTE ENT
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (With Su-
E
per Lock) INFOID:0000000010733992
WORK SUPPORT
F
Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: Non-operation
G
• MODE 2: 30 sec.
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minute H
NOTE: I
ANSWER BACK
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS NOTE:
LOCK UNLOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be used J
NOTE:
WELCOME LIGHT OP SET
DLK
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. L

CONFRM ID ALL
M
CONFRM ID4
Indicates [Yet] at all time.Switches to [Done] when a registered key is inserted into ignition key
CONFRM ID3
cylinder. N
CONFRM ID2
CONFRM ID1
Indicates [ID OK] when key ID that is registered is received or is not yet received. Indicates [ID O
NOT REGISTERED
NG] when key ID that is not registered is received.
TP 4
TP 3 P
Indicates the number of IDs that are registered.
TP 2
TP 1

DLK-659
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from keyfob
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from keyfob
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from keyfob
KEY SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch
IGN SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in START position

ACTIVE TEST

FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/Off]
NOTE:
HORN
NOTE:
MIRROR+5
NOTE:
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) (Without Intelligent Key System, With
DATA MONITOR
DLK-660
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable A

B
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored C
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
NOTE: D
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
NOTE: E
RKE-TR/BD
DLK
DLK-661
BCM

BCM
ECU Reference
BCS-76, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-78, "DTC Index"
DLK-662
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM A
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
B
DLK
JRKWD4418GB
DLK-663
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4419GB
DLK-664
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4420GB
DLK-665
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4421GB
DLK-666
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4422GB
DLK-667
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4423GB
DLK-668
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4424GB
DLK-669
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4425GB
DLK-670
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4426GB
DLK-671
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4427GB
DLK-672
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4428GB
DLK-673
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4429GB
DLK-674
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4430GB
DLK-675
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4431GB
DLK-676
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
DLK
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-677
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
- Erase DTC.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 6.
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-77, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
SULT.
DLK-678
Is malfunctioning part detected? A
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART B

C
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
D
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the E
malfunction is repaired securely.
symptom is not detected. F
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4. G
DLK
DLK-679
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION
Perform the system initialization when replacing BCM, replacing keyfob or registering an additional keyfob.
Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
DLK-680
BACK DOOR SWITCH
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
BACK DOOR SWITCH
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
D
Open On
DOOR SW-BK Back door E
Closed Off
YES >> Back door switch is OK. F
G
(+) I
Connector Terminal
J
D168 3 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3. DLK
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
Back door lock assembly BCM M

Continuity
N

Continuity O
D168 3 Not existed
DLK-681
BACK DOOR SWITCH

Continuity
D168 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



Terminal
Lock Existed
3 4 Back door lock
Unlock Not existed
DLK-682
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
A
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL B

3. Check voltage between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground. C
(+)
Back door lock assembly (–) Condition Voltage D
Connector Terminal
Back door
D168 1 Ground ON 9 – 16 V E
opener switch
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. F
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect BCM connector. G
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock assembly harness connector.
BCM Back door lock assembly

Continuity H
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. I
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground J
B46 121 Not existed
DLK
L
3.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR GROUND CIRCUIT
M
Continuity
D168 2 Existed N
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Replace back door lock assembly.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. O
DLK-683
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “BACK DOOR OPENER SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

SW Released OFF
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPEN INPUT SIGNAL

(+)
Connector Terminal
D169 1 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
nector.

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
B47 16 Not existed
DLK-684
Back door opener switch assembly A

Continuity
D169 2 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
Back door opener switch assembly I

Terminal

1 2 J
DLK-685
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

(+)
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
4 Lock
5 Unlock
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.

Continuity
141 4
M85 D35 Existed
148 5
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
141
M85 Not existed
148
YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-686
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+) A
Connector Terminal
141 Lock
B
148 Unlock
PASSENGER SIDE D
1.CHECK FUNCTION E

F
G
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010708368 H

J
(+)
(passenger side)
DLK
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock L
NO >> GO TO 2. M

1. Disconnect BCM and front door lock assembly (driver side) connector. N
ness connector.
RHD models O
Continuity
139 2 P
M85 D73 Existed
141 3
DLK-687
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M85 Not existed
141
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
139 Unlock
141 Lock
REAR LH
1.CHECK FUNCTION

(+)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-688
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM Rear door lock assembly LH A

Continuity
124 2
B46 D118 Existed B
125 3
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124 D
B46 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3. E
G
(+)
124 Unlock
125 Lock
I
J
REAR RH
DLK
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT. L
N
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL O

P
(+)
Connector Terminal
4 Lock
5 Unlock
DLK-689
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
124 5
B46 D99 Existed
125 4
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B46 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock
DLK-690
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
D
LOCK ON
CDL LOCK SW E
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK ON
F
NO >> Refer to DLK-691, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". G
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL H

3. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground. I
(+)
Power window main switch (–) Voltage J
Connector Terminal
3
D25 Ground 9 – 16 V DLK
15
YES >> GO TO 3. L
NO >> GO TO 2.
M
BCM Power window main switch N

Continuity
50 3
M87 D25 Existed O
80 15
P
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M87 Not existed
80
DLK-691
PASSENGER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

LOCK ON
CDL LOCK SW
(passenger door) LOCK OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK ON
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch (passenger door) is OK.
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION

2. Check door lock/unlock using driver side door lock and unlock switch operation.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front power window switch (passenger side) (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
1
2
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
1. Disconnect BCM and power window main switch connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) har-
ness connector.
DLK-692
BCM Front power window switch (passenger side) A

Continuity
50 1
M87 D67 Existed B
80 2
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50 D
M87 Not existed
80
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". E
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F
YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-74, "FRONT POWER WIN- G
DOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Removal and Installation".
H
DLK
DLK-693
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR LOCK IND” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Monitor item Status

ON Turns ON
DOOR LOCK IND Door lock status indicator
OFF Turns OFF
YES >> Door lock status indicator is OK.
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect indicator unit connector.
3. Check voltage between indicator unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Indicator unit (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M92 5 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> Replace indicator unit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and indicator unit harness connector.
BCM Indicator unit

Continuity
M86 111 M92 5 Existed
BCM
Continuity
M86 111 Not existed
DLK-694
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
mode. C

D
Open ON
Closed OFF
Open ON E
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH F
Closed OFF
Open ON
Closed OFF G
NO >> Refer to DLK-695, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector. J
(+)
DLK
Connector Terminal
Driver side B34 L
Passenger side B27
3 Ground 9 – 16 V
Rear LH B71
M
Rear RH B53
YES >> GO TO 3. N
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector. O
Door switch BCM P

Continuity
Driver side B34 17
3 B47 Existed
Rear LH B71 12
Rear RH B53 10
DLK-695
DOOR SWITCH
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B34
Ground
Passenger side B27
3 Not existed
Rear LH B71
Rear RH B53
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

3. Check continuity between door switch terminals.
Door switch
Terminal
Pressed Not existed
Driver side
Released Existed
Pressed Not existed
Passenger side
3 Door switch
Rear LH
Released Existed
Pressed Not existed
Rear RH
Released Existed
DLK-696
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
2. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
3. Select “FLASHER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. C
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK. D
E
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EXL-361, "Symptom Table". G
H
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
DLK-697
KEY SWITCH
KEY SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “KEY SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Inserted in key cylinder On
KEY SW Keyfob
Removed from key cylinder Off
YES >> Key switch is OK.
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect key switch connector.
3. Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground.
Key switch
Voltage
M25 1 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between key switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Key switch BCM

Continuity
3. Check continuity between key switch harness connector and ground.
Key switch
Continuity
M25 1 Not existed
3.CHECK KEY SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between key switch harness connector and ground.
DLK-698
KEY SWITCH
Key switch A
Continuity
M25 2 Not existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> Replace ignition key cylinder.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
E
COMPONENT INSPECTION
F
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
2. Disconnect key switch connector. G
3. Check continuity between key switch terminals.
Key switch H
Terminal
Inserted in key cylinder Existed
1 2 Keyfob I
Removed from key cylinder Not existed
YES >> INSPECTION END J
NO >> Replace key switch.
DLK
DLK-699
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
1.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY

current value becomes about 10 mA.

NO >> Replace keyfob battery. Refer to DLK-789, "Removal
and Installation".
OCC0607D
DLK-700
A
FRONT DOOR LOCK
B
1.CHECK FUSE
C
D
Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2. Disconnect BCM connector. F
(+) G
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
H
M85 143 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3. I
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. J
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal DLK
Ground
146
M85 Existed
147
L
NO >> Repair or replace harness. M
REAR DOOR LOCK
N
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuse is not fusing. O

Rear door lock actuator power supply 3 (20 A) P
Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-701
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M85 151 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M85 Existed
147
DLK-702
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “SUPER LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. C
D
E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
G
(+)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) Condition Voltage
5 Release
6 Set
I
NO >> GO TO 2.
J
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness DLK
connector.

Continuity L
148 5
M85 D35 Existed
149 6 M
BCM N
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
148
M85 Not existed O
149

YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-703
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
(+)
Connector Terminal
148 Release
149 Set
PASSENGER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

(+)
Front door lock assembly (passenger side) (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
1 Set
2 Release
NO >> GO TO 2.
ness connector.

Continuity
139 2
M85 D73 Existed
149 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M85 Not existed
149
DLK-704
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3. A
B
(+) C
Connector Terminal
D
139 Release
149 Set
REAR LH F
G
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “SUPER LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. H
YES >> Super lock actuator is OK. I
J
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. DLK
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH.
(+) L
Connector Terminal
M
1 Set
2 Release
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT O
P
Continuity
124 2
B46 D118 Existed
131 1
DLK-705
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B46 Not existed
131

YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Release
131 Set
REAR RH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH.
(+)
Connector Terminal
5 Release
6 Set
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-706
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM Rear door lock assembly RH A

Continuity
124 5
B46 D99 Existed B
131 6
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124 D
B46 Not Existed
131
YES >> GO TO 3. E
G
(+)
124 Release
131 Set
I
J
DLK
DLK-707
UNLOCK SENSOR
UNLOCK SENSOR

scope.
(+)
Connector Terminal
D35 3 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
M86 104 Not existed

Continuity
D35 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
DLK-708
UNLOCK SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END A
B

Terminal
Unlock Existed
3 2 Driver door
Lock Not existed E
DLK
DLK-709
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Refer to DLK-658, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key
System, With Super Lock)".
YES >> GO TO 2
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-710
A
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING WITH CONSULT B

3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-659, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (With
Super Lock)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM E
G
DLK
DLK-711
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPEN

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
Check back door opener actuator.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-712
A
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
B
C

LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door). E
YES >> GO TO 2.
Refer to DLK-691, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check" (driver door) and DLK-692, "PASSENGER G
SIDE : Component Function Check" (passenger door).
H
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM I
Is the result normal? J
FRONT DOOR DLK
Front doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch. L
M
Refer to DLK-701, "FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure". N
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. O
Refer to DLK-686, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check" (driver door). P
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-713
REAR DOOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
Driver side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE
DLK-714
A
Passenger side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
B
Check front door lock assembly (passenger side).
C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". E
YES >> INSPECTION END F
REAR LH
G
Rear LH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
H
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR I

Check rear door lock assembly LH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM DLK

2. Confirm the operation after replacement. L
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". M
REAR RH
N
Rear RH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
O
Check rear door lock assembly RH P
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-715
DLK-716
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-713, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure". D
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". G
YES >> INSPECTION END H
DLK
DLK-717
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH KEYFOB
1.CHECK KEYFOB LED

Check keyfob LED is blink using keyfob button operation.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK KEYFOB
Check the inside of the keyfob for rust or corrosion by water. Simultaneously check the internal circuits for
damage.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace keyfob.
Check keyfob battery.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE KEYFOB
1. Replace keyfob.
DLK-718
A
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR B

Check door lock status indicator.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

NO >> GO TO 1. F
DLK
DLK-719
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH

Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH
Check driver side door switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-720
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP D
Check hazard warning lamp.

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". H
DLK
DLK-721
ALL DOOR
All super lock do not operate.


Check driver door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
Does driver door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check driver door super lock actuator.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
Driver side super lock does not operate.


Check driver side super lock actuator.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE
DLK-722
A
Check passenger side super lock actuator.
Refer to DLK-704, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". B
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". D
REAR LH
F
Rear LH side super lock does not operate.

G
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR H

Check super lock actuator rear LH.
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM J

DLK
L
REAR RH
M
N
Check super lock actuator rear RH.
O
YES >> GO TO 2. P
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-723
DLK-724
A

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

DLK
DLK-725
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
defining the noise.
DLK-726
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
B
vehicle body.
porarily. G
noise.
REPAIR THE CAUSE
I
CAUTION:
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
• SILICONE GREASE
• SILICONE SPRAY
• DUCT TAPE P
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
DLK-727
INSTRUMENT PANEL
ness.
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
repair the noise.
TRUNK
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
DLK-728
SEATS
the noise.
UNDERHOOD
H
I
DLK
DLK-729
PIIB8740E
DLK-730
DLK
PIIB8742E
DLK-731
HOOD

HOOD
JMKIB2689ZZ

: Pawl
: Body grease
HOOD ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING:
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-732
HOOD
ment".
B
: Inspection".
C
apply grease. D
: Body grease
E
JMKIB2933ZZ
G
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
H
DLK
DLK-733
HOOD
JMKIB2934GB

Hood lock assembly
: Vehicle front
: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-734
HOOD
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
MAX)
7.2 – 11.2 B
[0.283 – 0.441]
Hood – 7.0 – 11.0
2.5 – 4.5
[0.098 – 0.177] D
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
ber.
I
JMKIB3550ZZ
DLK
tion".
HOOD HINGE M
N
REMOVAL
JMKIB2955ZZ
DLK-735
HOOD
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
hinge.
ment".
: Inspection".
HOOD SUPPORT ROD
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING:
assembly.
INSTALLATION
RADIATOR CORE SEAL
REMOVAL
JMKIB2956ZZ

CAUTION:
: Clip
JMKIB2957ZZ

INSTALLATION
DLK-736
HOOD
HOOD INSULATOR A
B
REMOVAL
C
: Clip
JMKIB0387ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-737
R9M
JMKIB3660GB


Removal
"Exploded View".
DLK-738
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3661ZZ
D
E
: Vehicle front
G
JMKIB3662ZZ

: Vehicle front
I
JMKIB3005ZZ
DLK
Installation M
N
Removal
DLK-739
CAUTION:
JMKIB3663ZZ

CAUTION:
JMKIB3664ZZ
Installation
DLK-740
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
A
I
JMKIB3665ZZ

: Pawl
DLK
FRONT FENDER
REMOVAL
tion". N
DLK-741
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3666ZZ

outside.
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5633ZZ

CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
bolts.
FENDER COVER
REMOVAL
DLK-742
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3008ZZ
F
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
CAUTION: G
with urethane etc.
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: I
DLK
DLK-743
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3163GB
Front door panel Door hinge (upper) Door hinge (lower)

Door check link Bumper rubber Bumper rubber
DLK-744
FRONT DOOR
A
: Clip
: Pawl B

: Body grease
D
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL G
JMKIB3019ZZ DLK

JMKIB3020ZZ
O
INSTALLATION P
CAUTION:
ment".
DLK-745
FRONT DOOR
: Inspection".
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-746
FRONT DOOR
DLK
L
JMKIB3479GB

N

O
: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-747
FRONT DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.0 – 5.0
H Clearance
[0.118 – 0.197]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
I Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
K Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

sion.
CAUTION:
nuts.
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Inspection".
DOOR HINGE
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
INSTALLATION
DLK-748
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION: A
ment".
B
: Inspection".
DOOR CHECK LINK C
D
REMOVAL
F
G
JMKIB3021ZZ
INSTALLATION J
CAUTION:
Inspection".
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
L
REMOVAL
M
N
P
JMKIB2225ZZ
DLK-749
FRONT DOOR
: Clip
JMKIB2226ZZ
CAUTION:
JMKIB3058ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3059ZZ
DLK-750
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3060ZZ
F
: Pawl

INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-751
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
JMKIB3181GB
Rear door panel Door hinge (upper) Door hinge (lower)

Door check link Child lock lever cover Bumper rubber
DLK-752
REAR DOOR
A
: Clip
: Pawl B

: Body grease
D
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL G
H
J
JMKIB3071ZZ
JMKIB3072ZZ
N
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
ment".
: Inspection".
DLK-753
REAR DOOR
: Body grease
JMKIB0329ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-754
REAR DOOR
DLK
L
JMKIB3479GB

N

O
: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-755
REAR DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
K Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.0 – 5.0
L Clearance
[0.118 – 0.197]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
M Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

and Installation".
CAUTION:
nuts.
Installation".
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Inspection".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
and Installation".
DLK-756
REAR DOOR
A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
and nuts.
: Inspection".
D
DOOR CHECK LINK
E
REMOVAL
G
JMKIB3073ZZ
INSTALLATION DLK
CAUTION:
Inspection".
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
M
REMOVAL
N
O
JMKIB2232ZZ
DLK-757
REAR DOOR
: Clip
JMKIB2233ZZ
CAUTION:
JMKIB3090ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3091ZZ
DLK-758
REAR DOOR
JMKIB3092ZZ
F
: Pawl

G
JMKIB3093ZZ
J
DLK
O
JMKIB3094ZZ
: Pawl P
INSTALLATION
DLK-759
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
JMKIB2695GB
Back door hinge Back door stay Back door weather-strip

Bumper rubber Wedge bracket Back door wedge
Back door striker TORX bolt Back door panel
Plug Stud ball Back door damper
: Center mark
: Seam
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
, : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
DLK-760
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
B
: Vehicle front
D
JMKIB3115ZZ

ing clips .
: Vehicle front F
JMKIB3116ZZ H
I
DLK
JMKIB3117ZZ
: Vehicle front M
JMKIB3118ZZ
O
DLK-761
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3119ZZ
8. Disconnect rear view camera washer tube (with around view monitor). Refer to WW-103, "REAR CAM-
ERA WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation".
body.
JMKIB3120ZZ
WARNING:
back door stay.
11. Remove back door stay from back door. Refer to DLK-765, "BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installa-
tion".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
ward lightly.
DLK-762
BACK DOOR
: Body grease
B
JMKIB3113ZZ
D
DLK
JMKIB3480GB

DLK-763
BACK DOOR
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
MAX)
5.0 – 9.0
D Clearance —
[0.197 – 0.354]
(−3.0) – (+1.0)
[(−0.118) – (+0.039)]
3.0 – 7.0 <2.0
[0.118 – 0.276] [0.079]
panel –
(−3.0) – (+1.0)
[(−0.118) – (+0.039)]
– H Clearance —
fascia [0.217 – 0.374]
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
MAX)
5.1 – 9.1
D Clearance —
[0.201 – 0.358]
(−2.0) – (+2.0)
[(−0.079) – (+0.079)]
2.5 – 6.5 <2.0
[0.098 – 0.256] [0.079]
panel –
(−3.3) – (+0.7)
[(−0.130) – (+0.028)]
– H Clearance —
fascia [0.224 – 0.382]

DLK-764
BACK DOOR
CAUTION:
B
CAUTION:
C
"CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure" (with navigation). D
BACK DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
E
BACK DOOR STRIKER
F
REMOVAL
G
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. H
CAUTION:
Adjustment". I
BACK DOOR HINGE J
DLK
REMOVAL
2. Remove back door hinge cover. Refer to EXT-46, "Removal and Installation". L
3. Remove back door hinge mounting nuts of vehicle body side, and then remove back door hinge.
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
Adjustment". N
ASSEMBLY : Inspection". O
BACK DOOR STAY
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728574
P
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
2 workers are required to support back door.
1. Support the back door with the suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
DLK-765
BACK DOOR
back door stay.
CAUTION:
JMKIA2255ZZ
3. Disengage back door stay and stud ball of back door side.
4. Remove back door stay mounting bolts, and then remove back door stay.
INSTALLATION
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal INFOID:0000000010728575
CAUTION:
When performing disposal operation, wear the protective glasses and protective gloves.
1. Fix back door stay using a vise (C).
CAUTION:
When cutting a hole on back door stay, always cover a
hacksaw (A) using a shop cloth (B) to avoid scattering
metal fragments or oil.
JMKIA3336ZZ
2. Using hacksaw (A) slowly make 2 holes in the back door stay, in
numerical order as shown in the figure.
A: 20.0 mm (0.787 in)

: Cut at the groove.
JMKIA3609ZZ

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
DLK-766
BACK DOOR
tion mark and install weather-strip onto the vehicle . A
JMKIB3151ZZ
F
: Vehicle front
G
DLK
JMKIB3152ZZ
L
: Vehicle front
3. Pull back door weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section. M
CAUTION:
N
DLK-767
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
JMKIB3483GB
Hood lock control handle assembly Hood lock control cable assembly Hood lock assembly
Hood lock bell crank assembly
Cable clip
: Body grease
HOOD LOCK
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect hood lock switch harness connector (if equipped).
: Vehicle front
JMKIB2974ZZ
DLK-768
HOOD LOCK
CRANK : Removal and Installation". A
assembly according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by B
JMKIB2975ZZ
E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never bend cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.937 in) or more. F
ment". G
tion".
HOOD LOCK : Inspection INFOID:0000000010728579 H
NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. I
ary striker from the dead load of hood assembly. J
DLK
JMKIB3518ZZ
M
N
P
JMKIB3551ZZ
DLK-769
HOOD LOCK
JMKIB3487ZZ

Primary latch
: Body grease
JMKIB2979ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB2980ZZ
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE

REMOVAL
2. Remove hood lock control cable from hood opener lever
JMKIB0327ZZ
DLK-770
HOOD LOCK
OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation". A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: B
C
REMOVAL D
2. Remove fender protector RH. Refer to EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation". E
LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and Installation". F
CAUTION: G
INSTALLATION
H
CAUTION:
• Install grommet in the panel hole surely. I
J
DLK
L
JMKIA5814ZZ
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-769, "HOOD LOCK : Inspec- M
tion".
N
REMOVAL O
DLK-771
HOOD LOCK
bracket of hood lock assembly according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in
the figure.
JMKIB2981ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
JMKIB2982ZZ
: Vehicle front
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-772
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
DLK
L
JMKIB3667GB
Outside handle escutcheon Outside handle grip Front gasket M

Outside handle bracket Inside handle Cable clip
Door lock assembly TORX bolt Key rod protector (driver side)
N
Key rod (driver side) Rear gasket
: Pawl
: Vehicle front O

P
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
DLK-773
FRONT DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
routed normally.
: Body grease
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
dle.
: Pawl
JMKIB3668ZZ
DLK-774
FRONT DOOR LOCK
ing to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in A
the figure.
JMKIB3669ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: E
OUTSIDE HANDLE
F
REMOVAL
G
3. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-774, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation". H
5. Remove key rod protector mounting bolt and fixing clip, and then remove key rod protector. I
DLK
JMKIB3670ZZ N
: Vehicle front
O
DLK-775
FRONT DOOR LOCK
7. Disengage rod holder and disconnect key rod from door lock assembly according to the numerical
JMKIB3672ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3066ZZ

JMKIA0441ZZ
DLK-776
FRONT DOOR LOCK
according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as A
JMKIA2948ZZ
D
G
JMKIB2240ZZ
: Pawl
H
: Vehicle front
I
it.
: Vehicle front
J
DLK
JMKIB2241ZZ
L
shown in the figure. M
O
JMKIB2242ZZ
INSTALLATION P
CAUTION:
routed normally.
DLK-777
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3684GB
Outside handle escutcheon Outside handle grip Inside handle

Door lock assembly TORX bolt Rear gasket
Front gasket Outside handle bracket
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect inside handle cable from inside handle. Refer to DLK-779, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and
Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-778
REAR DOOR LOCK
routed normally. A
B
: Body grease D
F
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
G
REMOVAL H
dle.
J
: Pawl
DLK
JMKIB3685ZZ
L

ing to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in M
the figure.
JMKIB3669ZZ
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
DLK-779
REAR DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
JMKIB3096ZZ

JMKIA9526ZZ

JMKIA2948ZZ
DLK-780
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
JMKIB2240ZZ
D
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
E
it.
F
: Vehicle front
H
JMKIB2241ZZ

DLK
JMKIB2242ZZ
L
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: M
routed normally.
DLK-781
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3481GB
Back door panel Back door lock assembly
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect back door lock assembly harness connector.
3. Remove back door lock assembly mounting bolts, and then remove back door lock assembly from back
door panel.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-782
BACK DOOR LOCK
grease to door lock if necessary. A
: Body grease
B
JMKIB1220ZZ
D
UNLOCK PROCEDURES E
NOTE:
door lock assembly or battery discharge. F
unlocked by operating opener lever in the direction of arrow as shown in the figure.
G
DLK
JMKIB3162ZZ
: Vehicle front
L
DLK-783
JMKIB3182ZZ
: Clip
: Pawl
FUEL FILLER LID

REMOVAL
DLK-784
A
JMKIB3183ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. E
CAUTION:
• After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation. F
NOTE:
Unit: mm [in] G
Clearance Evenness
2.5 – 4.5 (−1.0) – (+1.0) H
[0.098 – 0.177] [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
I
REMOVAL J
Removal and Installation". DLK
order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure. L
NOTE:
M
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
N
JMKIB1094ZZ
4. Disengage fuel filler lid opener cable and remove fuel filler lid O
P
JMKIA5719ZZ
DLK-785
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
JMKIA5672ZZ
3. Remove kicking plate inner RH and rear kicking plate inner RH. Refer to INT-24, "KICKING PLATE :
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish RH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-786
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
door switch . C
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION F
DLK
DLK-787
REMOVAL
2. Remove door lock status indicator mounting bolt , and then
remove door lock status indicator .
JMKIB3656ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-788
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
A
REMOVAL B
1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (A) wrapped with a cloth into the
slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the
lower part. C
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
E
JMKIB3016ZZ
2. Replace the battery with new one. F
Battery replacement :Coin-type lithium battery

(CR2032) G
CAUTION:
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other foreign materials off the electrode contact
area. H
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key functions work normally.
INSTALLATION I
DLK
DLK-789
APPLICATION NOTICE

APPLICATION NOTICE
Destination
Service information
DLK-790
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
F
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
connectors. G
WARNING: H
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover DLK
windshield.
L
PIIB3706J N
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010754999
When disconnecting the battery terminal, pay attention to the following. O

• Always use a 12V battery as power source.
• Never disconnect battery terminal while engine is running.
P
DLK-791
PRECAUTIONS
• When removing the 12V battery terminal, turn OFF the ignition
switch and wait at least 30 seconds.
• For vehicles with the engine listed below, remove the battery termi-
nal after a lapse of the specified time:
D4D engine : 20 minutes ZD30DDTi : 60 seconds

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes ZD30DDTT : 60 seconds
K9K engine : 4 minutes
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
SEF289H
V9X engine : 4 minutes
YD25DDTi : 2 minutes
NOTE:
ECU may be active for several tens of seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. If the battery terminal
is removed before ECU stops, then a DTC detection error or ECU data corruption may occur.
• After high-load driving, if the vehicle is equipped with the V9X engine, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait
for at least 15 minutes to remove the battery terminal.
NOTE:
• Turbocharger cooling pump may operate in a few minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
• Example of high-load driving
- Driving for 30 minutes or more at 140 km/h (86 MPH) or more.
- Driving for 30 minutes or more on a steep slope.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main battery and the sub battery before turning ON
the ignition switch.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of main battery and sub battery discon-
nected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
Work INFOID:0000000010755000
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operational.
DLK-792
PREPARATION
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000010755001
B
Tool name Description

C
D
Engine ear Locating the noise
E
SIIA0995E
Remover tool Remove the clips, pawls, and metal clips
PIIB7923J
Power tool I
PIIB1407E J
DLK
DLK-793
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010755002
JMKIB3591ZZ
View with door opened View with back door panel

Combination meter
Transmits shift position signal to BCM via CAN communication line.
TCM Refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
BCM detects the vehicle status according to signals from each door switch. BCM
transmits drive signal to door lock actuator when BCM receives operation signal
BCM from remote keyless entry receiver (integrated in BCM).
Ignition key cylinder (key switch) DLK-796, "Ignition Key Cylinder"
DLK-796, "Door Lock and Unlock Switch"
and unlock switch)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) DLK-795, "Door Lock Assembly"
Rear door lock assembly LH DLK-795, "Door Lock Assembly"
Back door lock assembly DLK-795, "Back Door Lock Assembly"
DLK-794
COMPONENT PARTS
A
Rear door lock assembly RH DLK-795, "Door Lock Assembly"
DLK-795, "Door Lock Assembly"
side)
B
Door switch DLK-796, "Door Switch"
Back door opener switch assembly DLK-795, "Back Door Opener Switch Assembly"
C
Back Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010755003
• Back door lock assembly integrates back door opener actuator and back door switch. D
• Back door opener actuator opens the back door according to the back door open signal from BCM.
• Back door switch detects open/close status of back door.
E
JMKIB2941ZZ
H
Back Door Opener Switch Assembly INFOID:0000000010755004
• Back door opener switch assembly integrates back door opener switch. I
• Back door opener switch detects open operation of back door and transmits back door opener switch signal
to BCM.
• Back door opener switch assembly is installed in the back door J
panel.
DLK
JMKIA9666ZZ M
Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010755005
N
• Door lock actuator receives lock/unlock signal from BCM, and then O
locks/unlocks door.
to BCM. P
JMKIA9347ZZ
DLK-795
COMPONENT PARTS
Door Lock and Unlock Switch INFOID:0000000010755006
• Door lock and unlock switch is integrated in the power window
main switch.
JMKIA9352ZZ

JMKIB1506ZZ
Door Switch INFOID:0000000010755007
JMKIA9779ZZ
Ignition Key Cylinder INFOID:0000000010755008
• Key switch is installed in ignition key cylinder.

• Key switch detects ignition key or keyfob is inserted in ignition key
cylinder, and then transmits key insertion status to BCM.
JMKIB0273ZZ
DLK-796
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010755009
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
JMKIB3733GB
G
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

Door Lock and Unlock Switch H
• The door lock and unlock switch is built into power window main switch.
locked. I
unlocked.
Unlock Sensor J
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position once DLK
Anti-hijack function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT. Refer to DLK-808, "DOOR LOCK : L
CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System and Super Lock)".
Operation Condition
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed using the door lock M
and unlock switch.

N
• Doors are not locked by keyfob and auto door lock function
LOCK/UNLOCK
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION O

• While ignition key is inserted in ignition key cylinder and driver door is open, door is not locked when door
lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction. This prevents keyfob from being left in the vehicle.
• While door lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction, combination meter buzzer sounds and P
warns.
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description"
OVERRIDE FUNCTION
DLK-797
SYSTEM

• Driver side door switch is switched from OFF to ON
Operation condition
NOTE:
DLK-798
SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010755010
DLK
JMKIB3734GB
P
DLK-799
SYSTEM
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010755011
System Diagram
JMKIB3697GB
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK OPERATION

• When door lock and unlock button of keyfob is pressed, door lock and unlock signal transmits from keyfob to
BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• When BCM receives the door lock and unlock signal, it operates door lock actuator, brinks the hazard lamp
at the same time as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the keyfob is operated.
Remote controller operation Operation condition

• Key switch is off
Lock
Unlock Key switch is off
OPERATION AREA
To ensure that the keyfob works effectively, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each door, however the operable
range may differ according to surroundings.
• When an LOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob, all doors are locked.
• When an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob once, driver side door is unlocked.
• Then, if an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob again, all other doors are unlocked.
With CONSULT
Anti-hijack mode can be set to ON or OFF using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-808, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System
and Super Lock)".
Without CONSULT
• ON/OFF can be switched when keyfob lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for 5 sec-
onds or more while steering lock is locked.
OFF → ON : 1 blinks
ON → OFF : 3 blink
REMINDER FUNCTION
When doors are locked or unlocked by keyfob button operation, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a
reminder.
DLK-800
SYSTEM
Door lock operation A

(With keyfob button)
Lock Once
Unlock (all door unlock) Twice B
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION C

After door is unlocked by keyfob button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing the fol-
lowing operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not activate.
D
Operating condition • Door is locked
• Key switch is ON
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK- E
809, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Without Super Lock)".
F
DLK
DLK-801
SYSTEM
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010755012
JMKIB3735GB
DLK-802
SYSTEM
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010755013
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIA6011GB F
BACK DOOR OPENER OPERATION
When back door opener switch is pressed, BCM operates back door opener actuator.
NOTE: G
Back door opener actuator is not for locking the back door. The function is only to open the back door.
OPERATION CONDITION H
If the following conditions are satisfied, back door opener operation is performed.

I
• When back door opener switch is pressed while all doors are in unlock status.
Back door open
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
NOTE: J
• When battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected during all doors unlock state, back door may not
open.
• Regardless of door lock actuator state, BCM resets recognition of all doors unlock state approximately 30
seconds after battery terminal is disconnected and BCM recognizes that all doors are in lock state. DLK
• When battery terminal is reconnected and back door does not open, have BCM recognize that all doors are
in unlock state.
L
DLK-803
SYSTEM
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010755014
JMKIB3600GB

DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that each door or trunk lid is open or is not fully closed.
Symbol Message
JMKIB2780ZZ

DLK-804
SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
A
JMKIB3593GB
D
SIGNAL PATH
closed, door open warning displays. E

F
TIMING CHART G
JMKIB3594GB J
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Key System Malfunction

INFOID:0000000010755016
DLK
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that engine cannot be started.
L
Symbol Message
N
Key System Error
JMKIB1398ZZ
P
DLK-805
SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIB3620GB
SIGNAL PATH
• When BCM detects that the engine cannot be started, meter display signal is transmitted by BCM to combi-
nation meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, key system malfunction displays.
The engine cannot be started.
• Engine non-start status is resolved.
INFOID:0000000010755017
Item Reference
Door open warning
Door Open Warning"
Key system malfunction
Key System Malfunction"
Item Reference
Refer to WCS-11, "WARNING CHIME : Key Warning Chime (Without Intelligent Key Sys-
Key warning chime
tem)".
DLK-806
A
COMMON ITEM
B
APPLICATION ITEM
C
D
Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
NOTE:
Diagnosis mode
I
DLK
M
NVIS - NATS IMMU ×
P
NOTE:
CONSULT.
DLK-807

NOTE:
VEHICLE COND —
NOTE:
POWER SUPPLY
COUNTER
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key
System and Super Lock) INFOID:0000000010755020
WORK SUPPORT

Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
NOTE:
AUTO UNLOCK TYPE
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
KEY SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of key switch
ACTIVE TEST
DLK-808
Test item Description A

DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
B
NOTE:
SUPER LOCK
NOTE: C
DOOR LOCK IND
MULTI REMOTE ENT

D
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Without
E
WORK SUPPORT
Test item Description F

Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: Non-operation
• MODE 2: 30 sec.
G
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 6: 4 minute H
NOTE:
ANSWER BACK
I
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS NOTE:
LOCK UNLOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
WELCOME LIGHT OP SET J
DATA MONITOR
NOTE: DLK
L
CONFRM ID ALL
CONFRM ID4 M
Indicates [Yet] at all time.Switches to [Done] when a registered key is inserted into ignition key
CONFRM ID3
cylinder.
CONFRM ID2
N
CONFRM ID1
Indicates [ID OK] when key ID that is registered is received or is not yet received. Indicates [ID
NOT REGISTERED
NG] when key ID that is not registered is received.
O
TP 4
TP 3
Indicates the number of IDs that are registered.
TP 2 P
TP 1

DLK-809
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from keyfob
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from keyfob
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from keyfob
KEY SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch
IGN SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in START position

ACTIVE TEST

FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/Off]
NOTE:
HORN
NOTE:
MIRROR+5
NOTE:
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) (Without Intelligent Key System and
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
DLK-810
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. A

STARTER CUT RELAY Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay B
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
NOTE: C
TR CANCEL SW
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored D
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored E
DLK
DLK-811
BCM

BCM
ECU Reference
BCS-76, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-78, "DTC Index"
DLK-812
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM A
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
B
DLK
JRKWD4405GB
DLK-813
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4406GB
DLK-814
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4407GB
DLK-815
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4408GB
DLK-816
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4409GB
DLK-817
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4410GB
DLK-818
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4411GB
DLK-819
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4412GB
DLK-820
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4413GB
DLK-821
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4414GB
DLK-822
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4415GB
DLK-823
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWD4416GB
DLK-824
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWD4417GB
DLK-825
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-826

B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC C
1. Check DTC.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.) D
- Erase DTC.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. F
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. G
H
>> GO TO 5.
J
>> GO TO 6.
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-77, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order. L
NOTE:
M
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". O
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
SULT.
DLK-827
YES >> GO TO 8.
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
malfunction is repaired securely.
DLK-828
A
Perform the system initialization when replacing BCM, replacing keyfob or registering an additional keyfob. B
Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
DLK
DLK-829
BACK DOOR SWITCH
BACK DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Open On
Closed Off

(+)
Connector Terminal
D168 3 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity

Continuity
D168 3 Not existed
DLK-830
BACK DOOR SWITCH

Continuity
D168 4 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
Back door lock assembly I

Terminal
Lock Existed
3 4 Back door lock J
Unlock Not existed
DLK-831
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL

(+)
Back door lock assembly (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
Back door
D168 1 Ground ON 9 – 16 V
opener switch
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock assembly harness connector.
BCM Back door lock assembly

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
B46 121 Not existed

3.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR GROUND CIRCUIT

Continuity
D168 2 Existed
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Replace back door lock assembly.
DLK-832
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
3. Select “BACK DOOR OPENER SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C

D
SW Released OFF
F
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPEN INPUT SIGNAL G

3. Check voltage between back door opener switch assembly harness connector and ground. H
(+)
I
Connector Terminal
D169 1 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door opener switch assembly harness con- L
nector.

Continuity M
BCM
Continuity
B47 16 Not existed
P
DLK-833

Continuity
D169 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



Terminal

1 2
DLK-834
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
E
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL F

G
(+)
(–) Condition Voltage H
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
1 Lock I
2 Unlock
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side). J
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT DLK
connector.
L
Continuity
M
141 1
M85 D9 Existed
148 2
BCM
Continuity
Ground
141
M85 Not existed
148
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-835
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+)
Connector Terminal
141 Lock
148 Unlock
PASSENGER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

(+)
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
6 Unlock
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM and front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
ness connector.

Continuity
139 6
M85 D48 Existed
141 5
DLK-836
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M85 Not existed B
141
YES >> GO TO 3. C
1. Connect BCM connector. D
(+) E
Connector Terminal
139 Unlock
F
141 Lock
REAR LH H
1.CHECK FUNCTION I

2. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT. J
DLK
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010755039 L

N
(+)
1 Lock
2 Unlock
P
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-837
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

Continuity
124 2
B46 D85 Existed
125 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B46 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock
REAR RH
1.CHECK FUNCTION

(+)
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
6 Unlock
DLK-838
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly RH. A
NO >> GO TO 2.
B
BCM Rear door lock assembly RH C

Continuity
124 6
B46 D105 Existed D
125 5
E
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124 F
B46 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
I
(+)
124 Unlock
125 Lock
DLK
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". L
DLK-839
1.CHECK FUNCTION

LOCK ON
CDL LOCK SW
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK ON

(+)
Connector Terminal
3
15
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
50 3
M87 D5 Existed
80 15
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M87 Not existed
80
DLK-840
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-74, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : B
C
DLK
DLK-841
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
mode.

Open ON
Closed OFF
Open ON
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH
Closed OFF
Open ON
Closed OFF

(+)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B34
Passenger side B27
3 Ground 9 – 16 V
Rear LH B71
Rear RH B53
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
Door switch BCM

Continuity
Driver side B34 17
3 B47 Existed
Rear LH B71 12
Rear RH B53 10
DLK-842
DOOR SWITCH
A
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B34 B
Ground
Passenger side B27
3 Not existed
Rear LH B71
C
Rear RH B53
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". D
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
E
YES >> GO TO 4. F
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". G
>> INSPECTION END

H
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH I

3. Check continuity between door switch terminals. J
Door switch
Terminal DLK
Pressed Not existed
Driver side
Released Existed
L
Pressed Not existed
Passenger side
3 Door switch
Rear LH M
Released Existed
Pressed Not existed
Rear RH
Released Existed N
O
DLK-843
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
1.CHECK FUNCTION

YES >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-844
KEY SWITCH
KEY SWITCH
A
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Select “KEY SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
D
Inserted in key cylinder On
KEY SW Keyfob
Removed from key cylinder Off E
YES >> Key switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-845, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
G
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect key switch connector. H
3. Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground.
Key switch
Voltage I
M25 1 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT DLK

2. Check continuity between key switch harness connector and BCM harness connector. L
Key switch BCM
Continuity
M
3. Check continuity between key switch harness connector and ground.
N
Key switch
Continuity
M25 1 Not existed O
P
3.CHECK KEY SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between key switch harness connector and ground.
DLK-845
KEY SWITCH
Key switch
Continuity
M25 2 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> Replace ignition key cylinder.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
2. Disconnect key switch connector.
3. Check continuity between key switch terminals.
Key switch
Terminal
Inserted in key cylinder Existed
1 2 Keyfob
Removed from key cylinder Not existed
NO >> Replace key switch.
DLK-846
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
A
1.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY B

current value becomes about 10 mA.
C
YES >> INSPECTION END D
NO >> Replace keyfob battery. Refer to DLK-930, "Removal
and Installation".
E
OCC0607D
DLK
DLK-847
FRONT DOOR LOCK
1.CHECK FUSE

Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M85 143 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M85 Existed
147
REAR DOOR LOCK
1.CHECK FUSE

Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-848
A
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
M85 151 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M85 Existed F
147
DLK
DLK-849
UNLOCK SENSOR
UNLOCK SENSOR

scope.
(+)
Connector Terminal
D9 3 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
M86 104 Not existed

Continuity
D9 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
DLK-850
UNLOCK SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END A
B

Terminal
Unlock Existed
3 4 Driver door
Lock Not existed E
DLK
DLK-851
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Refer to DLK-808, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key
System and Super Lock)".
YES >> GO TO 2
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-852
A
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING WITH CONSULT B

3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-809, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Without
Super Lock)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM E
G
DLK
DLK-853

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
Check back door opener actuator.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-854
A
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
B
C

LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door). E
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
H
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". I
YES >> INSPECTION END J
FRONT DOOR
DLK
L
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT M

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR O

P
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-855
REAR DOOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
Driver side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE
Passenger side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
DLK-856
A
Check front door lock assembly (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-836, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". B
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". D
REAR LH
F
Rear LH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
G
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR H

Check rear door lock assembly LH.
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM J

DLK
L
REAR RH
M
Rear RH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
N
Check rear door lock assembly RH
O
YES >> GO TO 2. P
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-857
DLK-858
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-855, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure". D
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". G
YES >> INSPECTION END H
DLK
DLK-859
1.CHECK KEYFOB LED

Check keyfob LED is blink using keyfob button operation.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK KEYFOB
Check the inside of the keyfob for rust or corrosion by water. Simultaneously check the internal circuits for
damage.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace keyfob.
Check keyfob battery.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE KEYFOB
1. Replace keyfob.
DLK-860
A
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH B

Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH D
Check driver side door switch.

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". H
DLK
DLK-861

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP
Check hazard warning lamp.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-862
A

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

DLK
DLK-863
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
defining the noise.
DLK-864
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
B
vehicle body.
porarily. G
noise.
REPAIR THE CAUSE
I
CAUTION:
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
• SILICONE GREASE
• SILICONE SPRAY
• DUCT TAPE P
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
DLK-865
INSTRUMENT PANEL
ness.
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
repair the noise.
TRUNK
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
DLK-866
SEATS
the noise.
UNDERHOOD
H
I
DLK
DLK-867
PIIB8740E
DLK-868
DLK
PIIB8742E
DLK-869
HOOD

HOOD
JMKIB2689ZZ

: Pawl
: Body grease
HOOD ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING:
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-870
HOOD
ment".
B
: Inspection".
C
apply grease. D
: Body grease
E
JMKIB2933ZZ
G
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
H
DLK
DLK-871
HOOD
JMKIB2934GB

Hood lock assembly
: Vehicle front
: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-872
HOOD
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
MAX)
7.2 – 11.2 B
[0.283 – 0.441]
Hood – 7.0 – 11.0
2.5 – 4.5
[0.098 – 0.177] D
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
ber.
I
JMKIB3498ZZ
DLK
tion".
HOOD HINGE M
N
REMOVAL
JMKIB2955ZZ
DLK-873
HOOD
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
hinge.
ment".
: Inspection".
HOOD SUPPORT ROD
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING:
assembly.
INSTALLATION
RADIATOR CORE SEAL
REMOVAL
JMKIB2956ZZ

CAUTION:
: Clip
JMKIB2957ZZ

INSTALLATION
DLK-874
HOOD
HOOD INSULATOR A
B
REMOVAL
C
: Clip
JMKIB0387ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-875
MR20DD
MR20DD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010728625
JMKIB2691GB

MR20DD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728626

Removal
"Exploded View".
DLK-876
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3006ZZ
D
E
: Vehicle front
G
JMKIB3005ZZ

Installation
J
Removal
DLK
3. Use belts (A) to suspend radiator and condenser to prevent L
CAUTION:
M
JMKIB3007ZZ
O
Installation P
QR25DE
DLK-877
QR25DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010728627
JMKIB2691GB

QR25DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728628

Removal
"Exploded View".
DLK-878
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3006ZZ
D
E
: Vehicle front
G
JMKIB3005ZZ

Installation
J
Removal
DLK
3. Remove CVT fluid cooler lower bracket mounting bolt and CVT fluid cooler tube bracket mounting bolts (if L
equipped). Refer to TM-441, "QR25DE : Exploded View".
CAUTION: M
JMKIB3007ZZ
5. Remove radiator core support lower mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower. P
Installation
R9M
DLK-879
JMKIB3660GB


Removal
"Exploded View".
DLK-880
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3661ZZ
D
E
: Vehicle front
G
JMKIB3662ZZ

: Vehicle front
I
JMKIB3005ZZ
DLK
Installation M
N
Removal
DLK-881
CAUTION:
JMKIB3663ZZ

CAUTION:
JMKIB3664ZZ
Installation
DLK-882
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
A
I
JMKIB3665ZZ

: Pawl
DLK
FRONT FENDER
REMOVAL
tion". N
DLK-883
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3666ZZ

outside.
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5633ZZ

CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
bolts.
FENDER COVER
REMOVAL
DLK-884
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3008ZZ
F
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
CAUTION: G
with urethane etc.
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: I
DLK
DLK-885
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3502GB
Front door panel Grommet TORX bolt

Door striker Bumper rubber Bumper rubber
DLK-886
FRONT DOOR
A
: Clip
: Pawl B

: Body grease
D
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL G
JMKIB3503ZZ DLK

JMKIB3504ZZ
O
INSTALLATION P
CAUTION:
ment".
DLK-887
FRONT DOOR
: Inspection".
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-888
FRONT DOOR
DLK
L
JMKIB3479GB

N

O
: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-889
FRONT DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.0 – 5.0
H Clearance
[0.118 – 0.197]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
I Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
K Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

sion.
CAUTION:
nuts.
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Inspection".
DOOR HINGE
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
INSTALLATION
DLK-890
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION: A
ment".
B
: Inspection".
DOOR CHECK LINK C
D
REMOVAL
F
G
JMKIB3505ZZ
INSTALLATION J
CAUTION:
Inspection".
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
L
REMOVAL
M
N
P
JMKIB0401ZZ
DLK-891
FRONT DOOR
: Clip
JMKIB0402ZZ
CAUTION:
JMKIB3506ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3507ZZ
DLK-892
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3508ZZ
F
: Pawl

INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-893
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
JMKIB3509GB
Rear door panel Grommet TORX bolt

Door striker Bumper rubber Child lock lever cover
DLK-894
REAR DOOR
A
: Clip
: Pawl B

: Body grease
D
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL G
H
J
JMKIB3510ZZ
JMKIB3511ZZ
N
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
ment".
: Inspection".
DLK-895
REAR DOOR
: Body grease
JMKIB0329ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-896
REAR DOOR
DLK
L
JMKIB3479GB

N

O
: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-897
REAR DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
K Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.0 – 5.0
L Clearance
[0.118 – 0.197]
(−1.0) – (+1.0)
M Surface height
[(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

and Installation".
CAUTION:
nuts.
Installation".
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Inspection".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
and Installation".
DLK-898
REAR DOOR
A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
and nuts.
: Inspection".
D
DOOR CHECK LINK
E
REMOVAL
G
JMKIB3512ZZ
INSTALLATION DLK
CAUTION:
Inspection".
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
M
REMOVAL
N
O
JMKIB0410ZZ
DLK-899
REAR DOOR
: Clip
JMKIB0411ZZ
CAUTION:
JMKIB3513ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMKIB3514ZZ
DLK-900
REAR DOOR
JMKIB3515ZZ
F
: Pawl

G
JMKIB3516ZZ
J
DLK
O
JMKIB3517ZZ
: Pawl P
INSTALLATION
DLK-901
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
JMKIB2695GB
Back door hinge Back door stay Back door weather-strip

Bumper rubber Wedge bracket Back door wedge
Back door striker TORX bolt Back door panel
Plug Stud ball Back door damper
: Center mark
: Seam
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
, : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
DLK-902
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
B
: Vehicle front
D
JMKIB3115ZZ

ing clips .
: Vehicle front F
JMKIB3116ZZ H
I
DLK
JMKIB3117ZZ
: Vehicle front M
JMKIB3118ZZ
O
DLK-903
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3119ZZ
Installation".
body.
JMKIB3120ZZ
WARNING:
back door stay.
11. Remove back door stay from back door. Refer to DLK-907, "BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installa-
tion".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
ward lightly.
DLK-904
BACK DOOR
: Body grease
B
JMKIB3113ZZ
D
DLK
JMKIB3480GB

DLK-905
BACK DOOR
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
MAX)
5.0 – 9.0
D Clearance —
[0.197 – 0.354]
(−3.0) – (+1.0)
[(−0.118) – (+0.039)]
3.0 – 7.0 <2.0
[0.118 – 0.276] [0.079]
panel –
(−3.0) – (+1.0)
[(−0.118) – (+0.039)]
– H Clearance —
fascia [0.217 – 0.374]
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
MAX)
5.1 – 9.1
D Clearance —
[0.201 – 0.358]
(−2.0) – (+2.0)
[(−0.079) – (+0.079)]
2.5 – 6.5 <2.0
[0.098 – 0.256] [0.079]
panel –
(−3.3) – (+0.7)
[(−0.130) – (+0.028)]
– H Clearance —
fascia [0.224 – 0.382]

DLK-906
BACK DOOR
CAUTION:
B
CAUTION:
C
"CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure" (with navigation). D
BACK DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
E
BACK DOOR STRIKER
F
REMOVAL
G
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. H
CAUTION:
Adjustment". I
BACK DOOR HINGE J
DLK
REMOVAL
2. Remove back door hinge cover. Refer to EXT-46, "Removal and Installation". L
3. Remove back door hinge mounting nuts of vehicle body side, and then remove back door hinge.
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
Adjustment". N
ASSEMBLY : Inspection". O
BACK DOOR STAY
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728703
P
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
1. Support the back door with the suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
DLK-907
BACK DOOR
back door stay.
CAUTION:
JMKIA2255ZZ
3. Disengage back door stay and stud ball of back door side.
4. Remove back door stay mounting bolts, and then remove back door stay.
INSTALLATION
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal INFOID:0000000010728704
CAUTION:
When performing disposal operation, wear the protective glasses and protective gloves.
1. Fix back door stay using a vise (C).
CAUTION:
When cutting a hole on back door stay, always cover a
hacksaw (A) using a shop cloth (B) to avoid scattering
metal fragments or oil.
JMKIA3336ZZ
2. Using hacksaw (A) slowly make 2 holes in the back door stay, in
numerical order as shown in the figure.
A: 20.0 mm (0.787 in)

: Cut at the groove.
JMKIA3609ZZ

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
DLK-908
BACK DOOR
tion mark and install weather-strip onto the vehicle . A
JMKIB3151ZZ
F
: Vehicle front
G
DLK
JMKIB3152ZZ
L
: Vehicle front
3. Pull back door weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section. M
CAUTION:
N
DLK-909
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
JMKIB3484GB
Hood lock assembly Hood lock bell crank assembly Hood lock control cable assembly
Hood lock control handle assembly
Cable clip
: Body grease
HOOD LOCK
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect hood lock switch harness connector (if equipped).
: Vehicle front
JMKIB2974ZZ
DLK-910
HOOD LOCK
CRANK : Removal and Installation". A
assembly according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by B
JMKIB3486ZZ
E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: F
G
ment".
tion".
H
NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. I
J
DLK
JMKIB3518ZZ
M
mately 200 mm (7.874 in) height]. N
P
JMKIB3499ZZ
DLK-911
HOOD LOCK
JMKIB3549ZZ

Primary latch
: Body grease
JMKIB2979ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB2980ZZ
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE

REMOVAL
2. Remove hood lock control cable from hood opener lever
JMKIB0324ZZ
DLK-912
HOOD LOCK
OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation". A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: B
C
REMOVAL D
1. Remove air duct 1. Refer to EM-31, "Removal and Installation" (MR20DD) or EM-175, "Removal and
Installation" (QR25DE) or EM-308, "Removal and Installation" (R9M).
2. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-910, "HOOD LOCK E
3. Remove fender protector LH. Refer to EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips. F
6. Remove dash side finisher LH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation". G
CAUTION:
While pulling, never damage (peeling) the outside of hood lock control cable. H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: I
• Check that cable is not offset from the positioning grommet, J
DLK
JMKIA5814ZZ M
tion". N
O
REMOVAL
P
DLK-913
HOOD LOCK
bracket of hood lock assembly according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in
the figure.
JMKIB2981ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
JMKIB2982ZZ
: Vehicle front
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-914
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
I
JMKIB3519GB
Outside handle escutcheon Rear gasket TORX bolt J

Key rod (driver side) Door lock assembly Cable clip
Inside handle Outside handle bracket Front gasket
DLK
Outside handle grip
: Pawl
: Vehicle front L
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) M

: Body grease
DOOR LOCK N
O
REMOVAL
P
INSTALLATION
DLK-915
FRONT DOOR LOCK
CAUTION:
routed normally.
: Body grease
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
dle.
: Pawl
JMKIB3520ZZ

JMKIB3521ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-916
FRONT DOOR LOCK
OUTSIDE HANDLE
A
REMOVAL B
3. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-916, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation". C
D
JMKIB3522ZZ
I
: Vehicle front
6. Disengage rod holder and disconnect key rod from door lock assembly according to the numerical J
DLK
JMKIB3523ZZ
O
: Vehicle front
DLK-917
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3524ZZ

JMKIA8374ZZ

JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-918
FRONT DOOR LOCK
it. A
: Vehicle front
B
JMKIB2034ZZ
D
E
G
JMKIB3525ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
routed normally. I
J
DLK
DLK-919
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3526GB
Outside handle escutcheon Rear gasket TORX bolt

Door lock assembly Inside handle Outside handle bracket
Front gasket Outside handle grip
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-920
REAR DOOR LOCK
routed normally. A
B
: Body grease D
F
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
G
REMOVAL H
dle.
J
: Pawl
DLK
JMKIB3527ZZ
L

inside handle according to the numerical order 1→4 indicated M
JMKIB3521ZZ
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
DLK-921
REAR DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
JMKIB3528ZZ

JMKIB2479ZZ

JMKIA0524ZZ
DLK-922
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
JMKIB1627ZZ
D
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
E
it.
F
: Vehicle front
H
JMKIB2034ZZ

DLK
JMKIB3525ZZ
L
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: M
routed normally.
DLK-923
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3481GB
Back door panel Back door lock assembly
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect back door lock assembly harness connector.
3. Remove back door lock assembly mounting bolts, and then remove back door lock assembly from back
door panel.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-924
BACK DOOR LOCK
grease to door lock if necessary. A
: Body grease
B
JMKIB1220ZZ
D
UNLOCK PROCEDURES E
NOTE:
door lock assembly or battery discharge. F
unlocked by operating opener lever in the direction of arrow as shown in the figure.
G
DLK
JMKIB3162ZZ
: Vehicle front
L
DLK-925
JMKIB3488ZZ
: Clip
: Pawl
DLK-926
FUEL FILLER LID
A
REMOVAL B
C
JMKIB3183ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. G
CAUTION:
• After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation. H
NOTE:
I
Unit: mm [in]
Clearance Evenness
2.5 – 4.5 (−1.0) – (+1.0) J
[0.098 – 0.177] [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
DLK
REMOVAL L
Removal and Installation". M
order 1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure. N
NOTE:
O
: Pawl
: Vehicle front P
JMKIB1094ZZ
DLK-927
4. Disengage fuel filler lid opener cable and remove fuel filler lid
JMKIA5719ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
JMKIA5901ZZ
3. Remove kicking plate inner LH and rear kicking plate inner (LH and RH). Refer to INT-24, "KICKING
PLATE : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish LH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-928
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
door switch . C
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION F
DLK
DLK-929
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
REMOVAL
1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (A) wrapped with a cloth into the
slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the
lower part.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
immediately wipe it dry.
JMKIB3016ZZ
Battery replacement :Coin-type lithium battery

(CR2032)
CAUTION:
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other foreign materials off the electrode contact
area.
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key functions work normally.
INSTALLATION
DLK-930

DLK PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DLK PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DLK PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What components make up the door lock system?

What components make up the door lock system?

How does the intelligent key system work?

How does the intelligent key system work?

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION DLKDOOR & LOCK

PRECAUTIONS ..................................................23 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning

COMPONENT PARTS .......................................25 tion ...........................................................................38

INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................... 75 B2416 TOUCH SENSOR RH ........................... 123

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 156 REAR LH .................................................................. 177 L

REAR BUMPER .......................................................201

INTELLIGENT KEY ..................................................250 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 268

ALL DOOR ...............................................................251 FRONT FENDER .............................................. 271

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 290 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 312 C

BCM .................................................................. 392 B2420 CLOSE SWITCH .................................. 442

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 467 REAR LH ................................................................. 488

AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH. 468 REAR RH ................................................................. 489

AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR OPERATION ALL DOOR ............................................................... 540

REAR LH ..................................................................542 OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP-

REAR RH .................................................................542 P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER-

ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES .........................545 INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 557

HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 571 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ........................................ 595

FRONT FENDER .............................................. 579 BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 603

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 657 REAR LH .................................................................. 688 H

REAR LH ................................................................. 723

REAR DOOR ............................................................714 UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-

DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................714 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-

HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 735 DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................ 757

DOOR LOCK ............................................................778 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 794

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 830 UNLOCK SENSOR ......................................... 850

REAR LH ..................................................................857 MR20DD .................................................................. 876

REAR RH .................................................................857 QR25DE ................................................................... 877

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH R9M ......................................................................... 879

HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................870 REAR DOOR .................................................... 894

HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................874 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 898

DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 899

BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 908 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 924

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

VIEW WITH REAR C

No. Component Function A

Door switch DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch"

Inside key antenna (luggage room)

VIEW WITH FRONT N

No. Component Function

Touch sensor LH DLK-34, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor"

Spindle unit RH DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit"

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Close Switch INFOID:0000000010708016 D

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Control Unit INFOID:0000000010708017

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Main Switch INFOID:0000000010708018

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Warning Buzzer INFOID:0000000010708020

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010708021

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener Switch Assembly INFOID:0000000010708022

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010708023

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock Switch INFOID:0000000010708024

• Door lock status indicates door lock status.

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch INFOID:0000000010708025

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch INFOID:0000000010708026

Detects door open/close condition.

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna INFOID:0000000010708028